Courts Design Brief

COURTS STANDARD DESIGN
BRIEF
FEBRUARY 2010
i.
Document Version Control

Issue 1:
Client Issue Monday 5th June 2006
Issue 2:
Client Issue Friday 14th July 2006. Changes to Section D 1.2, 1.3 & 1.8.
Issue 3:
The following changes/additions completed on Fri 28th July 2006.

Addition to Section A 2. Relationship of the Legislature, Judiciary and
Executive to Courts and Court Building and 3. The Judiciary in Western
Australia.
Search & Replace tipstaff with usher
Addition to Section B 1.2. Siting
Issue 4:
Client Issue Friday 13th October 2006.
Issue 5:
Client Issue Friday 17th November 2006

General Amendments.
Issue 6:
Client Issue Monday 20th November 2006

General Amendments.
Issue 7:
Client Issue Friday 19th January 2007

Amendments following review.
Issue 8:
Client Issue 4th April 2007

Amendments following Graham Brawns review.
Issue 9:
Client Issue 6 March 2009

General Amendments.
Issue 10:
Client Issue 18 February 2010

Addition of 2.5 Access for People with a Disability
ii.
Work in Progress:
The current issue of the Court Standard Design Brief represents work in
progress and is currently subject to updating and review. Each project to
be procured utilising the Design Brief will require a supplementary
document providing project specific information and its own relevant
schedule of accommodation.
Acknowledgement
The contribution of the following two documents in regard to forming the framework of the
Courts Standard Design Brief is acknowledged:
The Department of Justice of Victoria Courts Design Guide 2001.
The Western Australia CBD Courts Project Brief 2004.
The Department of the Attorney General contact for this document is

Tina Arthur, Program Manager
on + 61 8 9264 9712
Department of the Attorney General
Level 12
141 St Georges Terrace
Perth WA 6000 Australia
GPO Box F317 Perth WA 6001
T + 61 8 9264 9712 F + 61 8 9264 9713
iii.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Definitions ......................................................................................................................1
A.
Scope and Legislative, Executive and Judicial Contexts ............................1
Scope of the Brief............................................................................................1
B.
Building Requirements Generally................................................................ 16
1.
Applicable Codes, Standards and Statutory Controls ............................... 16

1.1.
1.2.
2.
Architectural Design and Construction Principles..................................... 17

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
3.
Building Design for Sustainability...................................................... 32

Waste Reduction and Recycling ....................................................... 33
Energy Use for Sustainability............................................................ 34
Water Use for Sustainability.............................................................. 35
Reduced Travel and Vehicle Use for Sustainability .......................... 35
Occupational Health and Safety ....................................................... 35
Public Engagement........................................................................... 36
Social Responsibility ......................................................................... 36
Architectural Psychology Brief .................................................................... 36

4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
5.
Design Philosophy ............................................................................ 17

Construction Principles ..................................................................... 18
Architectural Considerations ............................................................. 18
Security Philosophy .......................................................................... 27
Access For People with a Disability .................................................. 30
Western Australian State Sustainability Strategy ...................................... 32

3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
4.
Compliances ..................................................................................... 16
Siting................................................................................................. 17
Introduction ....................................................................................... 36
Architectural Psychology and Courts Environments ......................... 37
Architectural Requirements............................................................... 37
Aboriginal Cultural Brief............................................................................... 42

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
Introduction ....................................................................................... 42
Objective........................................................................................... 42
Cultural Brief ..................................................................................... 42
Notes About People and Place ......................................................... 44
Physical Aspects of an Aboriginal Court ........................................... 47
References ....................................................................................... 48
6.
Multicultural or Culturally and Linguistically Diverse (CALD)

Brief ................................................................................................................ 49
C.
Operational Needs of a Courthouse .................................................................. 50
1.
Introduction ................................................................................................... 50
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
2.
Facilities Design Brief ....................................................................... 50

Conceptual Model of a Courthouse................................................... 50
Circulation Systems .......................................................................... 53
Access Controls ................................................................................ 55
Public Realm.................................................................................................. 55
iv.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
3.
Administration ............................................................................................... 59
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
4.
4.4.
Overview........................................................................................... 90
Design Criteria (Operational & Planning Principles).......................... 91
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Locations &
Relationships) ................................................................................... 92
Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences .......................................................... 97

9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
10.
Overview........................................................................................... 86
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location &
Relationships) ................................................................................... 88
Custody.......................................................................................................... 90
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
9.
Overview........................................................................................... 83
Relationships) ................................................................................... 84
Trials and Hearings Support Including Witness Services ......................... 85

7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
8.
Overview........................................................................................... 79
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location and
Relationships) ................................................................................... 81
Judiciary ........................................................................................................ 83
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
7.
Overview of the Component ............................................................. 70

Accommodation Requirements (Provision, Location &
Relationship) ..................................................................................... 73
Specific Courtroom Elements ........................................................... 76
Jury................................................................................................................. 79
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
6.
Functional Group .............................................................................. 59

Registries and Courts Administration................................................ 59
Jury Management ............................................................................. 64
Court Recording Service Areas......................................................... 65
Records and Stores (Including Exhibits) ........................................... 65
Training and Education ..................................................................... 68
Staff Amenities.................................................................................. 68
Trials............................................................................................................... 70
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
5.
Overview........................................................................................... 55
Accommodation Requirements ......................................................... 56
Overview........................................................................................... 97
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location and
Relationships) ................................................................................... 98
Legal and Support Agencies (External) .................................................... 100

10.1.
10.2.
Overview......................................................................................... 100
Design Criteria (Operational & Planning Principles)........................ 101
v.
10.3.
11.
Schedule of Accommodation..................................................................... 102

11.1.
12.

Relationships) ................................................................................. 101
Space Planning Criteria and Standards .......................................... 102
Activity Flow Diagrams............................................................................... 108

12.1.
12.2.
12.3.
12.4.
12.5.
12.6.
Section C.5 Jury........................................................................... 108

Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences ............................................. 113
Trials and Hearings Support ........................................................... 117
Legal and Support Agencies........................................................... 119
Judiciary.......................................................................................... 120
Custody........................................................................................... 123
13.
Police Courts ............................................................................................... 129
D.
Building Engineering Services Specification ........................................... 132
1.
Introduction ................................................................................................. 132

1.1.
General ........................................................................................... 132
1.2.
Communications Services .............................................................. 133
1.3
Electrical Services........................................................................... 145
1.4
Electronic Security .......................................................................... 153
1.6
Fire Services ................................................................................... 163
1.7.
Hydraulic Services .......................................................................... 168
1.8.
Mechanical Services ....................................................................... 171
1.9.
Structural ........................................................................................ 182
Vertical Transportation Services ................................................................... 185
E.
Information Services and Directional Signage ......................................... 190
1.
Overview ...................................................................................................... 190
2.
Special Considerations............................................................................... 190
3.
Building Listing Display (This section is optional depending on

the size and type of proposed courthouse) .............................................. 190
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
4.
Placement and User Ergonomic ..................................................... 190

Logos and Emblems ....................................................................... 190
Timing of Display Information ......................................................... 191
Arrangement of Listing Information ................................................. 191
Search Engine and Sub-Display ..................................................... 191
Technology ..................................................................................... 191
System Availability and Resiliency.................................................. 192
Electronic Signage - Courtrooms and Mediation Rooms (This

section is optional depending on the size and type of proposed
courthouse) ................................................................................................. 192
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
Placement and Position .................................................................. 192

Logos and Emblems ....................................................................... 192
Timing of Display Information ......................................................... 192
Arrangement of Listing Information ................................................. 192
Status of Proceeding....................................................................... 193
Technology ..................................................................................... 193
Availability of Display System ......................................................... 193
vi.
F.
Acoustic & Sound Reinforcement Specification ...................................... 194
1.
Introduction ................................................................................................. 194

1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
1.10.
G.
Environmental Noise....................................................................... 194

Background Noise........................................................................... 194
Acoustic Isolation ............................................................................ 195
Speech Privacy ............................................................................... 196
Reverberation ................................................................................. 197
Room Acoustics .............................................................................. 197
Hearing Conservation ..................................................................... 198
Mechanical Services - Acoustics..................................................... 198
Hydraulic Services- Acoustics......................................................... 199
Electrical Services- Acoustics ......................................................... 199
Audiovisual and Transcription System ..................................................... 201

1.
1.1.
2.
2.1.
3.
4.
5.
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
6.
6.1.
6.2.
7.
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.
7.9.
8.
9.
10.
10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
10.5.
10.6.
10.7.
10.8.
11.
11.1.
11.2.
Introduction ..................................................................................... 201

Scope Overview.............................................................................. 201
States Policy and Requirements .................................................... 201
IT Policy and Standards.................................................................. 201
Audiovisual Standard Operating Environment ................................ 202
Audiovisual Operations ...................................................................202
Electronic Courtrooms and Audiovisual Facilities ........................... 202
Electronic Courtroom Types ........................................................... 202
Courtroom Assignment Matrix ........................................................ 204
Other Audiovisual Facilities............................................................. 204
Portable AV Equipment................................................................... 207
Structured Cabling System ............................................................. 207
Audiovisual and IT Cables .............................................................. 208
IT Communication Outlets in Courtrooms and AV Facilities ........... 208
Cabling and Associated Infrastructure ............................................ 209
Cabling standards ........................................................................... 209
Audio............................................................................................... 209
Composite video ............................................................................. 209
RGBHV & XGA ............................................................................... 209
Network........................................................................................... 210
Control ............................................................................................ 210
Rack specification ........................................................................... 210
Patch Panel specification................................................................ 210
Future Proofing, Conduit and Cable Access ................................... 211
In-Court Equipment and Housing.................................................... 211
Master Clock Synchronisation ........................................................ 212
System Characteristics and Design Criteria.................................... 213
Scalability and modularity ............................................................... 213
Connectivity .................................................................................... 213
Transparency of Signals ................................................................. 214
Capacity of Systems ....................................................................... 214
Availability of Systems .................................................................... 214
Security and Access ....................................................................... 214
User Ergonomic and Interface ........................................................ 214
Maintainability and Manageability ................................................... 215
Audio System System Design...................................................... 215
Audio System Characteristics ......................................................... 215
Microphones ................................................................................... 216
vii.
11.3.
11.4.
11.5.
11.6.
12.
12.1.
12.2.
12.3.
12.4.
12.5.
12.6.
13.
13.1.
13.2.
13.3.
13.4.
13.5.
13.6.
14.
14.1.
15.
15.1.
15.2.
15.3.
15.4.
15.5.
16.
16.1.
16.2.
17.
18.
18.1.
19.
19.1.
20.
20.1.
20.2.
20.3.
21.
22.
23.
24.
24.1.
24.2.
25.
26.
26.1.
Processing equipment .................................................................... 216

Sound reinforcement system .......................................................... 217
Audio switching unit ........................................................................ 218
Audio teleconferencing unit............................................................. 218
Video System General ................................................................. 218
Video System Standards ................................................................ 219
Camera equipment ......................................................................... 219
Video switcher equipment............................................................... 220
Video Playback and Recording ....................................................... 221
Displays .......................................................................................... 222
Videoconference CODEC(s) ........................................................... 224
System Support .............................................................................. 226
Defects liability period service levels............................................... 226
Remote access ............................................................................... 226
Software.......................................................................................... 226
Intellectual property......................................................................... 226
Reporting ........................................................................................ 226
Maintenance ................................................................................... 226
AV Touch screen control system .................................................... 227
General requirements ..................................................................... 227
Voice Over IP.................................................................................. 228
Audio Standards ............................................................................. 228
Video standards .............................................................................. 229
Communications Standards............................................................ 229
Encryption & Collaboration Standards ............................................ 229
Jitter & Latency ............................................................................... 229
Applicable and Relevant State-of-Art Technologies........................ 230
General ........................................................................................... 230
Relevant Technologies ................................................................... 230
PC Playback Positions.................................................................... 230
Digital Recording, Monitoring and Transcription Systems............... 231
Digital Recording............................................................................. 231
AV Controller Interface and System................................................ 232
AV Controller Interface.................................................................... 232
Switching and Routing Functions.................................................... 234
Audio Switching .............................................................................. 234
Video Switching .............................................................................. 234
Self Test.......................................................................................... 234
System Performance ...................................................................... 235
System Change-out Facilities ......................................................... 235
Statistical Reports ........................................................................... 235
User Manuals and Documentation.................................................. 235
Quick Reference Guide................................................................... 236
Audiovisual Operation Manual ........................................................ 236
Documentation................................................................................ 236
Telecommunications ....................................................................... 236
Summary ........................................................................................ 236
APPENDICES ............................................................................................................. 243

1.
BCA Alternative Solution for Custodial Accommodation........................ 243
2.
Courtroom Analysis Report ....................................................................... 243
viii.
Definitions
"AHU" means Air Handling Unit.
"ALS" means Aboriginal Legal Service.
"Australian Standard" means standards approved and published by the Standards
Association of Australia (Standards Australia).
"AV LAN" means AV system communications cabling.
"BMS" means "Building Management System"
"CCA" means copper, chrome and arsenic.
"CCM" means the "Standards Australia Communications Cabling Manual".
"CCTV" means closed circuit television.
"Court Users" means persons, other than PICs, Bailees, who attend the Facilities for a
legitimate purpose, including Judicial Officers, and their support staff, parties to and witnesses
in proceedings, journalists, employees of the State and other members of the public.
"Cultural Briefing Report" means the Cultural Briefing Report; Barker and Spring, 2003.
"Custodial Areas" means the custodial centre and sally port within the building which are
secured as part of the custodial environment.
"CWS" means Child Witness Service.
"DHW" means the Department of Housing and Works.
"DotAG" means Department of the Attorney General
"DPP" means Director of Public Prosecutions.
"ECP" means Emergency Control Panel.
"EWIS" means Emergency Warning and Intercommunication System.
"Extranet" means an extension of the Department of the Attorney General internet which gives
authorised outsiders controlled access to parts of the intranet.
"FESA" means the Fire and Emergency Services Authority.
"FIP" means a fire indicator panel.
"Judicial Officer" includes justices of the Supreme Court, judges and registrars of the District
Court, judge of the Liquor Licensing Court, president of the Childrens Court, deputy presidents
of the State Administrative Tribunal, magistrates and Family Court judges, registrars and
magistrates.
"KVM" means keyboard, video and mouse.
"Legal Aid" means the Legal Aid service of Western Australia.
"NEBB" means National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
"OH& S" means occupational health and safety.
"OOS" means "occupational overuse syndrome".
"Primary Security Checkpoint" means location at or close to the main entry at which Court
Users will be searched to prevent Unauthorised Articles entering the secure areas of the
buildings.
"PTZ" means Pan Tilt Zoom".
"RSI" means repetitive strain injury.
"RT" means Reverberation Time.
"SAT" means the State Administration Tribunal.
"SFIP" means the sub-fire indicator panel.
"SOE" means Standard Operating Environment.
"SRV" means Small Rigid Vehicle".
"Unauthorised Articles" means: Category 1 Articles and Category 2 Articles.
"UPS" means Uninterruptible Power Supplies.
"VESDA" means very early smoke detection and alarm system.
"VSS" means Victim Support Services
WAPOL means Western Australia Police
SECTION A
A.
1
Scope and Legislative, Executive and Judicial Contexts

Scope of the Brief
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
a.
Each functional area has been described within an Overview, Design Criteria
(Operational & Planning Principles) and Specific Accommodation Requirements
(Provisions, Location & Relationships).
Accommodation provisions have been discussed or described under each
functional area and quantified in the Schedule of Accommodation in Section
C.11.
The Schedule of Accommodation identifies net area requirements to be used as
a guide to the expected size of required accommodation.
Activity flow diagrams and supporting descriptions are provided in Section C.12.
These descriptions provide useful courts operational information.
Technical criteria to be addressed include the following:
D. Building Engineering Services;
E. Information Services and Directional Signage; and
F. Acoustic and sound reinforcement.
Aboriginal Cultural Brief and Architectural Psychology Brief (Sections B.5 and
B.4)
These sections provide outcomes of studies/research regarding the effect of
court environments on the users of courthouses as recommended by The Law
Reform Commission (1999).
Relationship of the Legislature, Judiciary and Executive to Courts and
Court Building
b. General
Our system of government functions through three separate but interrelated
arms: the legislature (the Parliament), the judiciary (the judges), and the
executive (the ministers of state and the departments or agencies for which they
are responsible). The expression 'the Government' is used commonly in
everyday speech to refer only to the executive branch of the government and not
to the totality of the three arms that together constitute our government.
c. The Legislative Function in Relation to Courts
The most obvious function of the legislature in relation to courts is the enactment
of statutes. Such statutes establish, confirm, change, or restrict the rights and
obligations of individuals in their relationships with each other and with the State.
The judiciary has developed and continues to develop doctrines, rules, and
principles known as 'the common law'. The legislature has the power to abolish
or amend any part of the common law and frequently exercises that power.
Thus, the judiciary is subordinate to the legislature in that the legislature makes
the laws and the judiciary applies those laws. The judiciary cannot change
statute law.
The legislature allocates funds for provision and maintenance of court buildings,
for judicial salaries, and for the services necessary to enable the courts to
operate satisfactorily. Generally fees paid to and fines imposed by the courts go
into consolidated revenue, although in some cases the legislation requires that
they be applied to specific purposes.
SECTION A
d. The Judicial Function
An individual who seeks to enforce a right against another individual or against
the State may institute civil proceedings in a court against that individual or the
State. When an individual is alleged to have committed a breach of criminal law
an appropriate officer may institute criminal proceedings in a court against that
individual.
e. The Executive Function in Relation to Courts
i. General
The judiciary decide civil or criminal proceedings by applying the law,
whether statutory law or common law. In civil proceedings the judicial
officer makes appropriate orders in favour of the successful party or, in
criminal proceedings, makes an appropriate order against the accused.
The judiciary has the sole responsibility for deciding what law is relevant in
the circumstances of the particular case.
The source of money for running the court is the legislature. The
conversion of such funds into the provision of the required resources is the
function of the executive. The executive is a party to many civil
proceedings and is always one of the parties to criminal proceedings. It is
of fundamental importance that the judiciary be independent of the
executive, which provides those resources and which is so frequently a
party in court proceedings. It is of equal importance that the judiciary be
perceived as being independent of the executive. In litigation involving the
executive, an unsuccessful litigant is likely to be dissatisfied if the judiciary,
which has ruled against him, appears to be associated with the executive.
If the public were to lose confidence in the impartiality of judicial officers

then this would result in a public loss of confidence in our system of law
and of courts as dispute-resolving mechanisms, ultimately leading to a
threat to the stability of our society. If there is a suspicion that a judicial
officer was prejudiced or partial in a particular case, he or she should stand
down, even if there is no suggestion of actual bias or partiality. Judicial
officers have a duty to exercise their powers in whatever ways may be
necessary to ensure that they are, and are seen to be, independent.
Courts are under a duty to ensure that there is no possibility that they may
appear to be subject to interference or influence by the executive arm of
government because in that event the courts might appear to lack
impartiality.
A significant difference between the way in which the judicial and the
executive functions are performed is the openness to public scrutiny of the
former and the relative privacy of the latter. The parties, their legal
representatives, the press, and the public generally are able to see how
judicial officers perform their functions. Judicial officers are required to
publicly state their reasoning process and to decide cases upon the basis
of material publicly presented.
Members of the public must have advance notice of when and where cases
are to be heard and the building in which the court is situated must be
adequately identified. The public must be given free access to the building
SECTION A
and to the courtroom. Sign posting within the building and adequate
seating within the court must be provided. While in court, members of the
public must be able to see and hear what is happening. People should be
free to exercise their right to attend court and not be restricted in the use of
doors or lifts. Whilst, generally there is no impediment to access to the
courtrooms, those attending may be asked by court security officials for
evidence of identification or for information as to what their business in the
building might be. Articles being brought into the building may be x-ray
scanned or physically searched if there appears to be good reason to
require this.
The design of courtroom facilities has a direct impact on the quality and the
effectiveness of proceedings in court. For example a miscarriage of justice
could result from a juror who is distracted because his or her seat is
uncomfortable, he or she cannot hear proceedings or the air conditioning is
too hot. Such problems are detrimental to the administration of justice as
they can affect public confidence in the judiciary.
ii. The Executive
The executive is that part of our democratic system commonly referred to
as 'the Government' or as 'the Public Service' and is the ministers of state
and the departments for which they are responsible.
iii. The Treasurer
The Department of Treasury and Finance considers submissions made by
departments and makes recommendations to the Cabinet as to the
allocation of funds and, in particular for present proposals, funds for the
construction, refurbishment, and maintenance of court buildings.
iv. The Minister for Police and Emergency Services
Members of the Western Australian Police are informants in criminal
proceedings in Magistrates Court, are significant witnesses in criminal
proceedings in the courts at all levels, and provide security services to the
courts and the judiciary, other than where security is provided by private
organisations contracted to Government to provide such services.
v. The Minister for Corrections
Officers of the Department of Corrective Services are involved in various
ways in relation to the sentencing process and adult or juvenile persons in
custody, whether awaiting trial or undergoing sentence.
vi. The Attorney-General

The Attorney-General is the Minister assigned responsibility for the Courts
and Tribunals. He is one of the Ministers of the Crown whose Ministries
comprise the Department of the Attorney General.
SECTION A
vii. Activities of the Department of the Attorney General
The employment of officers who carry out the required judicial
administration of the courts (subject to the control of the judiciary) and
officers who carry out the non judicial administration of the courts (subject
to the control of the department).
The provision of administrative and operational support for the courts.
The provision of court recording services for the courts.
The provision of buildings for the courts.
The provision of services for the courts, including administrative policy
and program direction, management information, administrative
systems, communications equipment and systems, computer services,
and the like.
Attention to the budgeting requirements implicit in the operation of the
courts.
The Director General of the Department of the Attorney General (DotAG) is
the chief administrator of the department.
viii. Summary of Executive Involvement with Court Buildings
The provision of new court buildings involves the following procedures:
Determination by the Department of the Attorney General in

consultation with the judiciary, of a requirement for the building work.
Submission by the Department of the Attorney General of a proposal for
a feasibility study of the work (along with all other works and services
proposals of the department) to the Department of Treasury and
Finance as part of the budgetary process.
Approval by Cabinet of major capital works.
Invitation, evaluation of submissions and the engagement of
consultants.
The carrying out of the work by, or under the control of, the Department
of the Attorney General.
The Judiciary in Western Australia

f.
General
This chapter provides a succinct overview of the operations of the courts in

Western Australia as relevant to building designers and consultants.
g. Hierarchy of Courts
The Supreme Court of Western Australia is the superior court in the State. Next
in the hierarchy is the Family Court of Western Australia followed by, the District
Court of Western Australia, the Childrens Court and the Magistrates Court of
Western Australia. Additionally, there is the State Administrative Tribunal which
is not a court but its most senior judicial officers are a Supreme Court Justice and
two District Court Judges. The higher courts hear more serious criminal cases
and civil cases with a higher jurisdictional monetary limit. There is a separate
Children's Court and Coroner's Court, although these functions are exercised by
the local Magistrates and registry staff in regional areas.
4
SECTION A
h. The Supreme Court of Western Australia
i. Supreme Court Jurisdiction
The Supreme Court has jurisdiction in all matters, civil and criminal, which
are not excluded by statute. (The following comments about the facilities
required in the Supreme Court are generally relevant to the District Court
as well). The main activities of the court take place in Perth at the Supreme
Court complex however the court sits on circuit at Albany, Broome,
Bunbury, Busselton, Carnarvon, Derby, Esperance, Fremantle, Geraldton,
Kalgoorlie, Karratha, Kununurra, Rockingham and South Hedland.
Regional court buildings must therefore accommodate sittings of the
Supreme Court, District Court and Family Court of Western Australia when
they go on circuit as well as the more frequent sittings of the Magistrates
Court, the Children's Court and the sittings of the State Administrative
Tribunal.
ii. The Operations of the Supreme Court
The Supreme Court has two divisions: The General Division deals with very
serious criminal charges, such as wilful murder, murder, armed robbery and
serious breaches of Commonwealth drug enforcement laws. Generally, it
hears civil cases where the amount involved in the dispute is more than
$500,000.
The General Division also deals with probate (including disputes over wills),
Admiralty (disputes involving ships), disputed elections and applications
under the Corporations Act.
The Court of Appeal hears appeals from single judge decisions of the
Supreme Court and from lower courts and various tribunals. Decisions of
the Supreme Court bind all inferior jurisdictions, as well as having a
persuasive effect throughout the common law world.
iii. Court Sitting Hours
Courts usually sit from 10.00 a.m. until 1.00 p.m. and from 2.15 p.m. to 4.30
p.m. Trial procedures in the Supreme Court and District Court are similar.
iv. Court Lists
The court divides its workload into different lists which cover different areas
of law.
v. Separation of Court Staff
Accommodation for members of the judiciary must be physically separate
and isolated from the public areas. The judiciary must be provided with
separate points of ingress and egress to the building and the courtrooms as
well as separate facilities. It is vital that the judiciary accommodation be
separate from the public and from members of the legal profession. They
must never come face to face with litigating parties, potential witnesses, or
jurors outside the courtroom.
SECTION A
vi. Associate, Secretary and Orderly/Usher
Each judge has an associate, a secretary and an orderly/usher, each of
whom is a personal appointee of the judge. Each associate and secretary
occupies or shares a room close to the relevant judge's chambers.
Orderlies/ushers may be accommodated together or some may have their
own office.
vii. The Masters
Masters of the Supreme Court hold judicial office and sit in court. They are
appointed by the Governor-in-Council, and they assist the judges in
discharging the civil and criminal jurisdiction of the court.
viii. The Library and Its Staff
The Supreme Court Library is used by the judiciary, the legal profession,
and persons who have obtained the permission of the librarian. There are
court libraries at the various court buildings throughout the State where a
Magistrate is located. The library is maintained under the control of a
librarian.
ix. Chief Executive Officer
The Executive Director of Court and Tribunal Services is responsible for the
non judicial administrative arrangements and supports of the court as well
as being responsible to the Director General of the Department of the
Attorney General.
x. Court Registry
The Principal Registrar oversees the administrative aspects of actions and
appeals coming within the jurisdiction of the court. Registry staff are
responsible for the general administration of the court. Civil proceedings
are instituted in the court by issuing a writ of summons out of the Registry,
and all documents related to proceedings are filed in the Registry. Many
thousands of proceedings are instituted each year, and the task of
adequately and properly recording all proceedings and of filing documents
is a complex task. Officers in the Registry are responsible for the listing of
civil cases and for providing the appropriate file to the judge or master
dealing with each case.
xi. The Sheriffs Office and its Staff
The Sheriffs office and its staff enforce writs and warrants of the Supreme
Court in Western Australia in civil matters and in some criminal matters and
is responsible for the provision and supervision of jurors for the Supreme
Court. Accommodation for any other Supreme Court Sheriff's office
function should not be provided in court buildings.
xii. Juries and Persons Required to Service Them
In Western Australia, criminal trials in the Supreme Court are required to be
held before a jury. Whilst only twelve jurors are called upon to determine
guilt or innocence at the end of the trial, up to six additional jurors may be
SECTION A
empanelled in long trials to ensure that the withdrawal of jurors through
illness or other reason during the course of the trial will not abort the
proceedings.
xiii. Juries and Persons Required to Service Them
Civil proceedings in the Supreme Court can be heard before a judge alone
or a judge and jury of six people.
xiv. Parties to Cases
Litigants, witnesses, and counsel attend the court not only in the
courtrooms and their ancillary areas but also in the administrative and
custodial areas of the building.
xv. Recording Services
The recording of proceedings in the court and the provision of transcripts of
those proceedings is the responsibility of the court reporting contractors.
xvi. Court Security Contractors Officers
Court security contractors officers and police officers attend the court each
day to provide security in the building and, in particular, in the courtrooms.
xvii. Department of Corrective Services Officers
Court security contractors officers transport persons in custody to and from
the court and are responsible for their safe custody while within the
building.
xviii. Court Registrars
Clerks of the Court (Registrars) are responsible for the general
administration of the State's courts outside of Perth. The number and
composition of the support staff varies according to the size of the court.
Typically it would include registrars, deputy registrars, and other persons
appointed to the administrative staff. Registrars perform a variety of
administrative, advisory, and quasi-judicial functions. The administrative
functions include maintaining records, issuing summonses, listing cases,
receiving fine and other payments, and generally being responsible for the
running of the court. They are employed in administrative areas in
Magistrates' and District Courts. In Magistrates Courts, administrative staff
also perform the function of judicial support officers to magistrates.
Registrars are required to provide a range of advice, assistance, and
referral services because the court is often used as the first point of call by
those who need help with their problems, whether of a legal or a general
nature.
xix. Clerical Assistants
Under the direction of court registrars, persons appointed to the
administrative staff of the court perform a variety of functions, which include
SECTION A
issuing process, filing documents, receipt and banking of moneys, and the
preparation of courts lists.
xx. Other Staff in the Building
There may also be building facility managers, cleaning staff, security and
other staff within the building.
xxi. Other People in the Building
Other people include the parties to the proceedings listed for hearing that
day and the relatives and friends of such parties, accused persons whether
on bail or in custody, witnesses, members of the legal profession (both
barristers and solicitors), practitioners and clerks attending to file
documents, practitioners and their clients attending pre-trial conferences,
persons involved in jury service including jury room supervisors, the jury
pool, jurors already empanelled, police officers, members of the press,
members of the public visiting the courts, and official visitors meeting with
judicial officers and the like.
Agencies involved in providing assessments of offenders suitability for
certain sentencing options, (e.g. Community Justice Officers) often have
dedicated facilities within a major court building, as do the Aboriginal Legal
Service and Legal Aid Commission in those courts where they provide a
Duty Solicitor Service.
Also found in a court building on a typical day include representatives of the
press, members of the public attending the courts including school groups,
court security officers, Court Network and Salvation Army officers and other
welfare groups.
i. The District Court of Western Australia

i. General
The District Court has concurrent criminal jurisdiction with the Supreme
Court over indictable offences other than wilful murder, murder, armed
robbery and serious breaches of Commonwealth drug enforcement laws.
Indictable offences are serious criminal offences that cannot be dealt with
in a Magistrates Court. However, some such offences can be dealt with by
a magistrate with the consent of the defendant.
The judicial activities of the District Court fall substantially into the exercise
of three jurisdictions:
The criminal jurisdiction, in which significant criminal matters (other than
wilful murder, murder, armed robbery and serious breaches of
Commonwealth drug enforcement laws) are dealt with.
The civil jurisdiction.
The appellate jurisdiction deals with appeals from decisions in relation to
civil matters in Magistrates Courts.
SECTION A
ii. Appellate Jurisdiction
A person convicted or sentenced in a Magistrates Court may appeal
against his conviction or sentence to the Supreme Court and have the
matter re-heard.
j. Criminal Jurisdiction in the Supreme and District Courts

i. General
The exercise of the criminal jurisdiction embraces the trial of persons
charged with criminal offences and the sentencing of persons who plead
guilty or who are convicted at trial. Many cases involve multiple accused
persons.
ii. Pleas
When an accused person pleads guilty, submissions are made to the judge
by or on behalf of the offender directed towards the imposition of a lenient
sentence. Where appropriate, submissions are also made on behalf of the
prosecution.
Depending upon the nature of the case, the judge may be able to
determine the appropriate sentence immediately, or a delay of some hours,
days, or weeks may ensue. If sentencing is delayed, the offender is
returned to the court for sentence. If a custodial sentence is imposed, the
offender is immediately taken into custody. The offender may be remanded
in custody or released on bail between the time he pleads guilty and the
time the sentence is imposed.
iii. Jury Trials
The trial procedure occurs where an accused person pleads not guilty. A
judge often has to make rulings as to admissibility of evidence and other
such matters prior to the empanelment of a jury.
When the jury is empanelled, a number of potential jurors (usually about 30
for a single accused and an additional 5 for each additional accused) are
brought to the courtroom from a jury pool room. The jury courtroom must
sometimes accommodate and seat up to 100 people.
During the
empanelment process, an accused and the State may peremptorily
challenge up to five potential jurors each. When 12 jurors have been
selected, they are sworn. In lengthy trials up to 6 additional jurors may also
be selected and sworn. From time to time during the trial, the jury may be
sent to the jury deliberation room whilst legal argument takes place. The
trial proceeds with witnesses being called by the prosecution and crossexamined by the defence.
Following the closure of the prosecution case, the accused may stand mute
give evidence and in either case may call other evidence.
SECTION A
Following the closure of the defence case, addresses are made to the jury
by the prosecutor and defence counsel and the judge charges the jury. In
charging the jury, the judge informs the jury of the relevant law and gives a
summary of the evidence.
The members of the jury then retire to the jury deliberation room to consider
their verdict. During their deliberations they may wish to ask questions
concerning the law or the evidence. In that event, the court is reassembled
and the question is dealt with. The jury has to be kept together and
secluded from public contact during its retirement.
The whole of the proceedings upon the trial are recorded, and in many
cases a transcript of the proceedings is made available to the judge and to
the lawyers, but not to the jury.
When the jury has agreed upon a verdict, the court reassembles and the
verdict is announced. A jury may take from an hour to several days to
reach a verdict. In the event of a guilty verdict, any prior convictions of the
accused are alleged and either admitted by him or proved by the
prosecution. Thereafter, the procedure is similar to that following a plea of
guilty and the accused is sentenced by the judge. In the event of a verdict
of not guilty, the accused is discharged from custody (unless he/she is in
custody for other unrelated matters). A criminal trial may last from a day to
several months. A typical trial would occupy three to four days.
iv. Mentions, Pre-trial Hearings and Other Proceedings
In addition to the criminal proceedings outlined above, criminal matters may
be dealt with for the purpose of a mention or for the purpose of a pre-trial
hearing. Such procedures are directed to determining the readiness of the
matter for trial or applications for adjournment. They are also directed to
exploring the possibility of agreement between the Prosecutor and the
Defence as to a plea of guilty to particular charges or to narrowing of the
issues and thereby shortening the trial or nolle prosequi.
A judge may have to deal with proceedings relating to the breach of noncustodial sentences. If a person is released upon a bond, a communitybased order, or a suspended sentence and fails to comply with the noncustodial sentence, proceedings may be taken in relation to the breach. In
such a situation, a further hearing occurs and appropriate orders are made,
whether by way of resentencing or otherwise. Where an offender fails to
pay a fine, enforcement proceedings are dealt with by a judge or a
registrar.
k. Magistrates Courts
i. General
By virtue of their varied jurisdiction, Magistrates Courts are the courts that
the average member of the community has most contact with. They
provide the community with the most accessible, simplest, and cheapest
court proceedings. Magistrates Courts commence at as early as 9.00am
and adjourn at 4.30 p.m. or when all business has been concluded.
Magistrates Courts vary greatly in both the volume of business and the
populations they serve. Some sit on an irregular basis in single courtroom
10
SECTION A
buildings; others sit continuously in several divisions. By far the largest and
busiest Magistrates Court in Western Australia is the Perth Magistrates
Court. All proceedings in the Magistrates Court are tape recorded either by
a judicial support officer or Court Reporting Contractor. Parties to actions
may purchase transcript of the proceedings.
ii. Criminal Jurisdiction
In the criminal jurisdiction, the Magistrates Court hears and determines
indictable offences triable summarily and all summary offences, as well as
conducting committal mentions for indictable offences that are to be
committed to the Supreme & District Courts. In essence, summary
offences are less serious crimes than indictable crimes.
Summary offences make up the bulk of criminal, quasi-criminal, and traffic
matters dealt with by the Magistrates Court. Summary offences extend to
any offence under any act or regulation of Parliament that provides that the
offence or breach may be prosecuted summarily and to all offences for
which no means of enforcement is provided. They may include street
offences, such as disorderly conduct, offensive behaviour or minor
assaults; traffic matters, such as drink-driving offences or speeding and
other prosecutions under various legislation.
If the matter is contested, evidence is called and witnesses are examined
and cross-examined. The magistrate makes findings of fact, rules upon
questions of law and the admissibility of evidence and ultimately
determines the guilt or otherwise of an accused. If the accused is found
guilty, prior convictions (if any) are alleged, and plea material is put to the
court on behalf of the accused as it is upon a plea of guilty.
All matters dealt with in the Magistrates Court are heard and determined
without a jury.
iii. Magistrates Courtroom integral with Police Station
Some regional police stations include facilities for a Magistrates Court. It is
referred to in this Brief as a Type C Court. A dedicated court within a local
police complex is provided in regional locations where there is a moderate
workload, ie where a Magistrate convenes a court at least 12 times
annually.
In regional police localities with a low court workload, court proceedings are
held in the operations room of the local police station.
l.
A Typical Day in a Large Magistrates Court
On a typical day, the building is opened to the public at 8.30 a.m. By 9.00 a.m.,
all foyers and court building corridors are heavily congested with public, accused,
witnesses, legal practitioners, and informants plus a variety of other interested
people. This congestion can be mitigated if sufficient formal waiting areas and
interview rooms are provided. Accused and barristers congregate around a
notice board in the main foyer where all matters for hearing and the courtrooms
in which the matters will be heard are listed. Floor attendants assist to direct the
public to court rooms or to the Legal Aid lawyer. Accused and practitioners then
11
SECTION A
make their way to the appropriate courtroom. As the courtrooms may be widely
dispersed throughout the building, adequate sign posting is essential. Other
activities at this stage of the morning include; unrepresented accused queuing for
legal aid; practitioners and prosecutors reporting to the court coordinator's office
to seek adjournments or otherwise discuss their cases; officers of the Court
Welfare Service and Salvation Army mingling with the crowd and offering comfort
and advice; and barristers and their clients sitting in urgent conference in private
areas. The public address system is constantly in use, primarily to locate
barristers, missing witnesses, or accused. Public telephones are available,
however many accused, their supporters and lawyers use their personal mobile
phones to communicate outside of the court building.
By 9.00 am, prisoner escort vans arrive with prisoners on remand. Those
arrested overnight are transported from the Watch House and on arrival
transferred to the custodial area of the court building. Between 9.30am and
10.00 am, magistrates report to their allotted courtrooms via a secure route and
not through public areas. All courts then commence, and accused and witnesses
are called either by court orderlies or judicial support officers. The public address
system is sometimes used for this purpose.
Prior to and after the court commences, accused in custody are escorted via a
secure route from the custody area to the dock of the appropriate courtroom.
User traffic in and out of a large Magistrates Court is constant and heavy.
Barristers, accused, witnesses, interested observers, school groups, members of
the press, and court officials come and go while the court is in progress;
therefore, the courtroom requires adequate acoustic treatment.
Accused that are to be further remanded are called according to a predetermined order of appearance. Those in custody are brought into the dock,
remanded to a further appearance date and returned to the custody area. Those
returning from bail are then called, remanded to a further appearance date with
bail extended and they then leave the courtroom.
Bail applications are made on behalf of persons held in custody. They are often
contested. Those granted bail are returned to the custody area where bail
paperwork is completed prior to their release on bail. Where surety approval is
necessary, court officials ensure that the relevant paper work is transmitted to the
duty Justice of the Peace, where the proposed surety/ies are directed. On
occasions accused are called and advised by the court that they are able to seek
legal aid. Such matters are often stood down and the court deals with other
matters or adjourns while instructions are sought.
Guilty pleas are then heard for charges ranging from a simple shop lifting to the
consolidation of charges for serious indictable offences. A large number of guilty
pleas may be dealt with during a sitting.
In other courtrooms, contested matters and committals for trial are proceeding.
Lunch is normally taken between 1.00 and 2.00 p.m. Appropriately located
vending machines may dispense hot and cold beverages and confectionery for
members of the public and staff. More substantial items of food may be
purchased from the coffee cart located on Level 2 of the Central Law Court
Building. A magistrates' common room with basic tea-making facilities is located
within the judicial zone. The courts resume between 2.00 p.m and 2.15pm.
Magistrates who are not required to sit in the afternoon, retire to chambers or the
library. Courts customarily rise for the day at 4.30 p.m. Accused in custody are
12
SECTION A
then returned to the custody area via a secure route. Magistrates and court staff
exit the courtroom via the secure judicial corridor and lifts to chambers, clerical
areas or the secure judicial car park. The court building is usually cleared by
6.00 p.m.
m. Childrens Court
The Children's Court deals exclusively with Children's Court matters. These are
divided into Criminal and Protection and Care Divisions. In Perth there is a
special Children's Court building but in regional courts, the courtrooms are
usually multi-purpose. The Children's Court of Western Australia sits as and
when required as directed by the President of the Court, generally between the
hours of 9.00am and 4.00pm. In practice, this means that the Children's Court
sits within the court building but separate from the other court activities. There
may be a separate entrance, waiting areas and public toilets to the courtroom
which functions as a Children's Court or alternatively, sittings may be held on a
day when the Magistrates Court is not sitting. Generally in regional Western
Australia, the Children's Court sits as required.
Proceedings in the Children's Court are conducted in a less formal manner but
the courtroom must still have the formality of a raised bench and adequate
distances between the bench and the floor of the courtroom. The sensitive nature
of proceedings in the Children's Court and the large number of government
agencies involved mean that there are issues of privacy and public access to the
courtroom may be restricted while it acts as a Children's Court. Children's Courts
are open to the public, but the court may exclude certain persons for part or all of
the proceedings by its own motion or on application by any party to the
proceedings or any other interested person. The publishing or broadcasting of
Children's Court proceedings are subject to restrictions.
Persons attending the Children's Court include magistrates, administrative staff,
including the registrar of the Children's Court, clerical assistants, secretarial staff,
legal practitioners, including Legal Aid solicitors, social workers from the
Community Justice Service, Salvation Army officers of the Court Welfare Service,
police prosecutors, children and their parents, relatives, friends and witnesses.
n. Coronial Service of Western Australia

The State Coroner and Deputy State Coroner are full-time coroners specialising
totally in the work of the Coronial Service of Western Australia. Their
investigations are based at the State Coroner's office in Perth. Most inquests are
held at the State Coroner's office, but some inquests are conducted by the State
Coroner or Deputy State Coroner in country Magistrates Courts. In country
areas, magistrates who are appointed coroners conduct coroner's investigations
and inquests in country Magistrates Courts.
The Coronial Service of Western Australia is an institution of civilian government
whose functions are to investigate, analyse, and learn from tragic events
involving reportable death and fire, to recommend means of avoiding
unnecessary repetition, and to inform the community and government by public
hearing and by formal report of what has been learned and what could be done
to avoid unnecessary repetition of tragedy.
13
SECTION A
The Coronial Service is a coordinated state-wide operation administered by the
State Coroner's office at Perth and has the jurisdiction to investigate reportable
deaths and fires. Reportable death means any death that is unexpected,
unnatural, or violent or has resulted directly or indirectly from accident or injury;
any death that occurs during or as a result of an anaesthetic; the death of a
person who was held in a psychiatric institution, by police, in prison, in an alcohol
or drug rehabilitation centre, or in any institution of the Department of Corrective
Services; the death of a person whose identity is unknown; and any death not
certified as to cause by a doctor under the Western Australian Registration of
Births, Deaths and Marriages Act or its equivalent outside Western Australia.
From the moment of death until release by the Coronial Service of the body of
the deceased person, the Coronial Service has exclusive and absolute control
over the body for the purpose of investigation.
Throughout country Western Australia each magistrate is appointed a coroner
and conducts coroner's investigations subject to the direction of the State
Coroner and within the administration of the state-wide Coronial Service by the
State Coroner's office. From time to time, each Magistrates Court is required to
conduct coroner's investigations.
These investigations may involve a public hearing or inquest requiring the use of
a courtroom, or they may be concluded in chambers without an inquest.
The increased demand for coroner's investigations, whether with or without
inquest, requires country Magistrates Courts to have sufficient allocation of
chambers and court space to cover these needs.
While coroner's investigations are being conducted, the following people are
expected to be in attendance; State Coroner or Deputy State Coroner;
administrative staff, including the coroner's clerical assistants and secretarial
staff. Also present are police officers who appear to assist the coroner in the
conduct of inquests; members of the legal profession who appear on behalf of
persons or institutions with a sufficient interest in a coronial proceeding;
witnesses both professional and non-professional; relatives and friends of the
deceased or of witnesses called upon to give evidence; school groups; media
personnel; court recording personnel; and service staff.
o. SAT (State Administrative Tribunal)

The State Administrative Tribunal (SAT) is a relatively new independent statutory
body, the leadership of which is through the President, a justice of the Supreme
Court.
The Tribunal represents the single most ambitious reform of
administrative law in Australia and has both original and review jurisdictional
powers, including the review of many of the decisions of Government made in
respect of the citizens of the State.
The (SAT) operates from premises at 12 St Georges Terrace Perth with 12
Hearing Rooms, 4 mediation rooms and 8 meeting/ break out rooms. Where the
Tribunal holds hearings in regional areas it may do so by using existing DotAG
court premises or by hiring alternative local facilities. The SAT has jurisdiction for
over 140 Acts and it is expected that its jurisdiction will expand into the
foreseeable future. With such jurisdiction comes eclectic demands on the fit out
design of hearings rooms and increase use of office workspace.
14
SECTION A
As a general premise, SAT does not operate with the formality of a court
however the hearing room and waiting area design must still cater for those
matters where critical incidents and challenging behaviours can be expected
from the parties. For example, in jurisdictions where the applicant or a person to
whom an application relates has a mental illness or cognitive disorder, the design
must incorporate both passive and active security considerations to ensure the
safety of members, parties and the public.
In matters where the risk of challenging behaviours is less likely, hearing rooms
will offer a mix of designs. In particular, designs will be conducive to the conduct
of hearings where the parties are more likely to be self represented. The current
facilities offer Tribunal members a range of hearing room options that they can
consider best appropriate for any particular matter. Options include close and
less informal designs to a greater distance and height between member and
parties if a greater degree of formability is needed and larger table tops on which
the lay out plans and large documents with large format papers. Hearing rooms
also offer large witness tables to facilitate concurrent evidence from up two
witnesses at any one time.
As the Tribunal operates throughout the State, integrated computer, telephone
and video conferencing technology has emerged as a matter of strategic
importance for the Tribunal and its provision in existing or new fit outs will require
careful examination.
Accessibility is and continues to be an issue of importance for Tribunal members
and staff and parties that attend hearings. Selection of space and fit out design
should meet the contemporary needs of people with disabilities and if necessary
be above the building code applicable to the premises under consideration.
15
SECTION B
B.
1.
Building Requirements Generally

Applicable Codes, Standards and Statutory Controls
1.1.
Compliances
A.
Construction of the works and provision of services shall comply but not be
limited to the following legislative requirements, Government policies and
guidelines.
Generally:
Building Code of Australia.
Australian Standards and Codes.
Disability Discrimination Act 1992.
Occupational Safety and Health Act 1984.
Occupational Health, Safety & Welfare Regulations 1988.
Health Act 1911.
Health (Public Buildings) Regulations 1992.
Health (Food Hygiene) Regulations 1993.
Heritage Council of Western Australia, Policies, Guidelines &

Conservation Plans.
Aboriginal Heritage Act 1972.
Public Works Act.
Builders Registration Act.
Western Australian Planning Commission Guidelines.
City of Perth Town Planning Scheme 1985.
Government / Private Utility Service providers requirements.
FESA Regulations and Requirements.
Insurance Council of Australia Requirements.

Custodial Provisions:
Western Australia Police Building Code 3.0 Planning Guidelines.
Inspector of Custodial Services Act.
Court Security and Custodial Services Act 1999.
Court Security and Custodial Services (Consequential Provisions).
Young Offenders Act 1994.
Prisons Act 1981.
Police Act 1892.
Bail Act 1982.
Supreme Court Act 1935.
District Court of Western Australia Act 1969.
Justices Act 1902.
Sentencing Act 1995.
Sentence Administration Act 1995.
Sentencing (Consequential Provisions) Act.
Childrens Court of Western Australia Act 1988.

Other relevant Western Australian legislation includes:
The Criminal Code.
The Criminal Practice rules.
Financial Administration and Audit Act 1985.
Equal Opportunity Act 1984.
Freedom of Information Act 1992.
Family Court of WA Act 1978.
Road Traffic Act 1974.

16
SECTION B
B.
1.2.
Parliamentary Commissioner Act 1971.

State Supply Commission Act 1991.
Coroners Act 1996.
Transport Coordination Act 1996.
Victims of Crime Act 1994 Schedule 1 "Guidelines As To How Victims
Should Be Treated".
The State is not able to provide a release from compliance with BCA
requirements in relation to fire egress from the custody centre. Refer to the
BCA Alternative Solution for Custodial Accommodation Report included
as Appendix 1.
Siting
Court buildings must be seen to be removed from and free of ordinary
commercial and partisan pressure. A court building should be constructed as a
single-purpose building, physically separate and distinct from other community
institutions. It should be sited in a prominent position and surrounded by
sufficient space to set it apart from day-to-day activities. Where the court building
is part of a regional justice complex comprising a Police Facility and Sheriff's
Office (Bailiff) and Community Justice Services it must have its own identity and
entrance. Materials, colours and details must distinguish it from the Police
Facility and Community Justice Services. It is also most desirable for a joint
Court/Police/Community Justice Services site to have separate street frontages
for both the Court and Police. Entry to car parking for both Courts, Police and
Community Justice Services is preferred to be via separate driveways with no
shared access. It is allowable to have a Police emergency exit through a gate
(normally kept locked) into the Court carpark in the case that persons other than
the police intentionally block the Police driveway. In the undesirable event that
Court/Police/Community Justice Services Complex must share the same streetfront there are a number of requirements:
A.
B.
C.
2.
Each public entry to the Court, Police and Community Justice Services
must have very separate identities.
Each public entry must be separated as physically far as possible and must
include a public courtyard or recess between the two entries with
appropriate planting to accentuate the separation.
The custody connection between the complexes must be discrete at the
rear of the building.
Architectural Design and Construction Principles

2.1.
Design Philosophy
A.
General
i.
The new building must reflect the importance of the State justice
system to the community. It should be architecturally impressive and
of a style commensurate with the dignity of the Court. It should also
be attractive to those who use it and those who may visit it. Design
proposals shall conform to contemporary Court standards unless
noted otherwise.
ii.
The Facilities should be full of light and particular attention should be
given to the use of interior space as a powerful design element e.g.
increased volume in busy public waiting area etc. Natural light,
17
SECTION B
iii.
iv.
2.2.
meaningful views out (views that afford a sense of orientation and/or

the prospect of some surrounding landscape/streetscape scene) and
easy access to the outdoors. The design should respond to the
climate fluctuations as well as providing a welcoming presence
indicating openness and accessibility. Therefore appropriate passive
design elements shall be incorporated to mitigate negative impacts.
The finishes and materials to be used throughout the Facilities are to
be of a high and durable quality, reflective of the importance of the
building and the Judicial Administration that operates within it.
Durability is a keynote criterion in public and custody areas.
With all of these criteria in mind, the following key design success
factors for the Facilities have been developed. The Project shall
provide:
a.
A new focus for and contribution to the civic architecture for the
City, Town or Metropolitan Region;
b.
An architecture that reflects the buildings function as an
instrument of Justice for the State;
c.
A design solution that clearly identifies and provides easy
access to all functional elements of the Facilities use of signage
shall not be considered on acceptable default position;
d.
The ability to take as much advantage as possible of natural
light in the Facilities as a means of de-stressing interiors;
e.
An energy efficient solution for the Facilities;
f.
The maximum and effective use of technology in the Facilities,
which meets the Courts functional requirements;
g.
A low maintenance design outcome for the Facilities;
h.
Minimum risk in relation to security, OH&S and public safety
within the Facilities;
i.
Ease of access for disabled persons;
j.
A high degree of constructability;
k.
Through a number of design initiatives as outlined in studies
undertaken on Aboriginal culture and psychology of the effects
of court environments ensure a less threatening experience for
all users of the Courts; and
l.
A landscape solution, which provides a high degree of high
quality but at the same time is low maintenance.
Construction Principles
The construction of the new building is to encompass Best Industry Practice in
the use of modern construction methods and technology. The inclusion of these
methods and technology will help to produce time and cost savings and also to
provide a thoroughly modern, technologically advanced building.
2.3.
Architectural Considerations
A.
B.
Materials
The types of materials to be used for the construction are to be high quality,
robust and low maintenance and must contribute to the overall physical
impression and attractiveness of the Facilities, in reflecting the qualities of
permanence, stability and strength without being ostentatious.
Finishes
Surface treatments and applied finishes must be durable, longwearing, low
maintenance and must also be visually appealing. Preference shall be
given to finishes that are repairable on site as surfaces will be subjected to
continuous hard wear.
18
SECTION B
i.
External
a.
Glazing to windows shall take due account of thermal
requirements and if appropriate to the design shall incorporate
heat reflective glass (reflective and severely tinted glazing shall
be avoided). All windows to the ground floor entrance shall be
glazed with an appropriate material and protected by an
approved security film to prevent fragmentation in the event of a
bomb explosion.
b.
Vulnerable solid external walls are to be treated with an
approved anti graffiti coating up to a height of 3.0m.
c.
A qualitative hierarchy of external wall finishes will be
considered in that a high quality is expected on the main
faade. Appropriate lighting must be provided for security
purposes and possible night-time use of the Facilities.
d.
Adequate provision is to be made to ensure ease of access for
cleaning of all external and internal glazed surfaces throughout
the building.
e.
Landscaping design proposals shall conform to contemporary
public landscape standards. All planting and methods of
installation shall conform to Australian Standards. All planting
shall be able to withstand the local climate and soil conditions.
All irrigation shall be to the BCA and Australian Standards
Codes. Where possible, irrigation heads should be vandal
proof.
ii.
Internal
a.
Glazing
Glazing is to comply with AS 1288 and AS 2208 and to
be clear laminated safety glass unless detailed to a
different specification elsewhere in this Design Brief.
Notwithstanding glazing type shall be a result of privacy
needs/function and location that shall determine use of
clear, obscure or semi-obscure glass.
b.
Floor Finishes
All floor finishes shall be the commercial grade of their
type, suited to their application and the function of their
location. They shall comply with current, relevant fire
indices and require only easy and effective long-term
maintenance needs. Heavy-duty floor finishes shall be
used in areas with heavy traffic flows. Hard and resilient
floor surfaces shall be of a type not requiring regular
refinishing.
c.
Carpet
Generally carpet shall be used as the floor finish to be
applied throughout the Facilities, excluding wet areas
and other special areas as noted in this Design Brief.
Carpet shall be high commercial quality. Carpet in
areas where computers or other electronic equipment is
concentrated shall have appropriate anti-static
treatment.
d.
Wet Area Floor Finishes
All wet areas shall be provided with an impervious floor
finish that runs up to the recess of fitments and form a
skirting to walls. Behind the floor finish shall be a
proprietary waterproof membrane properly detailed,
turned up at walls and sealed at joints forming a
watertight barrier to the structure.
19
SECTION B
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Vinyl Floor Finish

Sheet vinyl shall be weldable and flexible for coving to
wall junctions and fitments. If vinyl is used in wet areas,
it shall be coved 100mm up walls or to the recess of
fitments, whichever is greater. All newly installed sheet
vinyl shall be cleaned and sealed to the manufacturers
specifications prior to commissioning.
Entry Area
Hardwearing and low maintenance finishes shall be
used from the entry to the public counter areas.
Door and Door Frames
Except where noted otherwise in the Design Brief, doors
shall be flush solid core doors with timber edge trims to
all sides or shall exhibit similar performance.
In order to provide a high degree of protection from
noise in the public foyer and courtroom waiting areas,
public entries to courtrooms must be via an
airlock/sound lock arrangement.
Purpose built acoustic doors shall be used to comply
with the requirements of Part E of this Design Brief
(Acoustic and Sound Reinforcement). Architectural door
hardware shall generally be heavy-duty lever type
stainless steel.
All public entry doors to courtrooms shall be fitted with
heavy duty automatic door openers with direct control
activators and locking devices to facilitate easy access
by people with disabilities.
Courtroom entrances (incorporating sound locks and
automatic doors) shall be physically designed and
electronically controlled to negate the potential for noise
transfer directly into the courtroom from adjacent public
areas whilst being accessed (i.e. operation of doors
shall be such that they do not open simultaneously but
have the first door in the path of travel closing prior to
the second opening).
Painting
General areas with paint finishes shall be treated with a
two-coat application of durable acrylic paint. Wet areas
shall be treated with a two-coat application of durable
enamel paint. Both finishes shall be applied over
preparatory undercoats.
Ceiling Systems
Generally, ceilings shall be commercial office standard,
modular, demountable system on non-combustible
materials that shall conform to acoustic performance
requirements.
Courtroom ceiling heights must be suitable to
accommodate the various elements in the room that are
to be raised from the litigation floor, in particular the
judicial bench and jury box. In determining ceiling
heights, consideration must also be afforded to the
number of expected occupants and the air circulation /
ventilation requirements.
Selection and performance of ceiling systems shall be in
accordance with the acoustic requirements set down for
each space or area. If a continuous plasterboard ceiling
is to be used, partitions may not need to extend from
20
SECTION B
floor to slab above. If mineral fibre ceiling tiles are used,
partitions must extend from floor slab through to ceiling
to the slab above to achieve a rating greater than
FSTC35.
Decorative timber veneer ceilings or similar shall define
public waiting areas, reception areas, foyer, courtrooms
and the like.
C.
Furniture
i.
Furniture shall comply with Australian Standards to ensure OH&S of
all employees. Generally ergonomic furniture should be selected to
help prevent RSI, OOS etc. Special consideration shall be given to
courtroom environments as participants will be seated for lengthy
periods.
ii.
All activity spaces within the Facilities are to be furnished and fitted
out in an appropriate quality and have visual appeal that ensures fit
for purpose and function criteria. In addition all furniture and fit-out
shall respond to requirements of longevity and ease of maintenance.
iii.
Furniture generally and workstations in particular shall be provided on
a system basis that is consistent in construction, look and finish
within each of the quality categories detailed in following sections.
Work stations shall be modular and capable of being modified (with
inter-changeable sections) to suit particular functional demands.
iv.
Computers, printers, facsimile machines and photocopiers (unless
otherwise specified) are excluded from this Design Brief.
Judiciary and Support Staff
Courtrooms Built in fittings namely judges bench, judges

associates, counsel, accused dock, jury box and witness box shall be
finished in a material reflecting the formality and status of the
courtroom. All built-in furniture shall accommodate all in-court
technology to achieve ergonomic functionality and maximise aesthetic
appeal as well as optimising sightlines between all participants in the
court process. Lengths of all benches and modesty panels enclosing
seating positions shall be to suit numbers of seating positions within
each courtroom and as identified in the Trials section. Lockable
exhibit storage and equipment storage shall be integrated within the
court built-in joinery. In criminal courtrooms this shall comprise of an
exhibit table and lockable cupboard under, adjacent to or part of the
judges associates bench. In civil courtrooms this storage shall
comprise perimeter wall benching with lockable cupboards under,
subject to the courtroom configuration.
Furniture, fittings and overall fit-out and dcor shall adopt an
integrated interior design approach and encapsulate the objectives
articulated elsewhere in this Design Brief. Decorative acoustic wall
linings to public galleries shall not be located at head height (in the
seat position) thereby avoiding requirement for frequent removal and
cleaning. Obtrusive supports for all built in bench fittings shall be
avoided.
Fully ergonomic gas operated height adjustable chairs with arms and
infinite locking positions shall be provided to the judicial benches and
the associate's benches, with judges chairs being of a high executive
standard. The standardised proprietary selection for judicial chairs
must have a range of varying seat pad sizes and back heights.
Armrests shall be adjustable or retractable to allow the chair to fit
21
SECTION B
under the bench when using a computer keyboard. Associates chairs
shall be to an executive standard. Fully ergonomic, gas adjustable
semi-executive chairs shall be provided to all bar tables and the jury
officer.
Fully ergonomic interconnected fixed seating shall be
provided to jury boxes and witness boxes. Jury seating shall be
provided with individual armrests and writing tablets and spaced to
ensure maximum comfort for jurors with flip-up seats to assist with
access. Fixed seating shall be provided to PIC docks and public
galleries.
Interview Rooms/Special Trial Support Rooms Provide either

rectangular or circular meeting table sized to fit the room with the
number of fixed leg upholstered chairs to suit table size.
Judicial Chambers Furniture and fittings are to be of a high

executive standard and be fully ergonomic. Gas operated height
adjustable chairs with arms and infinite locking positions shall be
provided to chambers. The standardised proprietary selection for
judges chairs must have a range of varying seat pad sizes and back
heights. Armrests shall be adjustable or retractable to allow the chair
to fit under the desk when using a computer keyboard.
Desks with built in drawers (or mobile pedestal alternative) and
integrated returns fitted with adjustable keyboard trays and matching
but moveable monitor stands. Appropriately sized occasional tables
and chairs to accommodate up to four people. An integrated dcor
design approach shall be taken in selection of all furnishings/furniture.
Provide full-length, 1800mm high bookshelves with cupboard space
under one wall (minimum 4m length) to accommodate each judicial
officers personal library and documents.
Wardrobe space
accommodating judicial gowns and wigs shall be provided and shall
include a full-length vanity mirror. A minimum of two matching three
drawer filing cabinets shall be provided to each chamber for
permanent judicial officers. Provide same for circuiting judicial
officers chambers but only 2m of bookcases and no filing cabinets.
Ante Rooms Accessible only from the judicial bench and secure
corridor and used as a waiting space during adjournment, these
spaces shall be furnished with occasional chairs and a full-length wall
mirror.
Support Staff (Judges Associates and Researchers, Registrars

Associates, Secretaries and Receptionists) Fully ergonomic
furniture of clerical standard must be provided with gas height
adjustable chairs with full lumbar support provided. Desks and or
workstations are to be fitted with adjustable keyboard trays and
matching but moveable monitor stands. Mobile, lockable drawer
pedestals shall be provided to each workstation or desk. Shelving
units shall be integrated with workstation privacy screens and/or
located adjacent as built-in wall units.
Ushers Provide fully ergonomic furniture of clerical standard with

gas height adjustable chairs with full lumbar support. Desks are to be
fitted with adjustable keyboard trays, matching but moveable monitor
stands and lockable drawers.
22
SECTION B
Conference/Meeting Rooms (Judicial and Generally) All facilities

shall be provided with furniture and fittings of a high executive
standard and be fully ergonomic. Size of conference tables and
numbers of chairs to accommodate user numbers as
scheduled/described in this Design Brief. Conference rooms shall be
equipped with a pull down projection screen, whiteboard/pin-up board
and below bench cupboard/drawer units.
Judicial Library Provide furniture and fittings of a high executive

standard and fully ergonomic. One workstation shall be provided for
the research and for the librarian. Provide shelving in modular units
to house current collection with 10% spare capacity. Approximately
20 bays at 1800mm high x 900 wide shall be provided.
Public and Waiting Areas (Outside Courtrooms and Mediation

Pre-Trial Conference Facilities) - Public waiting areas shall have
comfortable interlocked seats, with appropriate durable upholstery
panels capable of being removed for cleaning or replaced. Seating
arrangements shall be in a ratio to suit numbers of persons
accommodated in courtroom galleries, seating shall not be configured
in back-to-back arrangements screens.
CCTV Rooms (Remote Witness Rooms) Provide purpose made

joinery (table and shelving unit) to accommodate two monitors and
cameras with bench mounted fixed microphone point. The shelving
unit shall be as unobtrusive as possible in respect to scale given that
children largely use these facilities. Provide two fixed ergonomic
chairs and occasional table.
Mediation Rooms Mediation rooms shall be furnished with modular

tables of 800mm depth capable of being arranged in a number of
formats (e.g. T configuration) accommodating up to 15 people
maximum. Provide a wall unit to accommodate videoconference
equipment in all rooms with one fitted out with equipment. Fixed
height semi-executive chairs shall be provided for participants and a
fully ergonomic gas operated height adjustable chair shall be
provided for the Registrar.
Meeting Rooms Meeting rooms shall be furnished with a meeting

table and chairs appropriate to the size of the room as scheduled in
Section C.13 Schedule of Accommodation. Generally, furniture in
large rooms shall accommodate up to 8 people, in medium rooms
shall accommodate up to 6 people and in small rooms shall
accommodate up to 4 people.
Courts Administration Accommodation
Registry Counters Counters shall be designed to afford staff a

degree of physical protection whilst at the same time creating an
approachable image. An equal number of public sit down desk height
counters and stand up height counters shall be provided. Wheelchair
access shall be provided to one counter position. Staff shall be in
seated positions not withstanding the alternative seating/standing
positions for the public. Chairs to the public side of the counter shall
be upholstered with arms and legs (i.e. non-swivel). Staff counter
chairs will be fully adjustable and ergonomic. Counters shall be fitted
23
SECTION B
with security features including duress alarms to ensure staff safety is
monitored and appropriately responded to.
Counters shall
accommodate stationery storage and built-in provision for IT
equipment (including CPU, monitor, keyboard, receipt printer and bar
code reader) and lockable cash drawer.
Open Planned Offices Provide each staff member as scheduled a

workstation configuration providing capability to operate a computer,
adequate bench space to prepare files, storage capacity above
benches for case files, a mobile pedestal for storage of personal
effects, stationery etc and space adjacent to the workstation for
parking of a file trolley. Refer to Furniture Generally for workstations
screen/pin up requirements. Ergonomic chairs for each staff member
will be of a Semi-executive standard.
General Storage: Open Offices Allow for concealed general wall

unit storage capability to accommodate staff personal effects (coats,
raincoats, umbrellas etc), miscellaneous files and reports. This
requirement is seen as design specific with utilisation being made of
circulation space.
Enclosed offices Each enclosed office shall be fitted out with the
following matching Executive standard furniture.
Workstation with integral or separate meeting table and credenza
(cupboard/drawer) return.
Bookshelf unit (1800w). The bookshelf component shall have
cupboards below desk height and open shelves above.
2 no. four drawer filing cabinets.
1 fully ergonomic executive chair and four matching visitors chairs.
File Storage Areas Shall be provided with a standing height work

bench, 1.5m long and 16 no. pigeonhole storage units for A4 sized
documents. Note: Filing requirements are specified in Section C.3.5
Records and Stores.
Lunch Room Provide Meeting Room tables and chairs to suit

space size and a wall unit accommodating sink, bench space with
cupboards/drawers, under and overhead cupboards. The wall unit
shall provide space and include a free standing (integrated)
refrigerator, dishwasher and microwave oven.
Utility Room Located within designated work areas shall be

equipped with perimeter storage units with adjustable shelving and a
collation worktable or bench sized to suit room configuration. Bench
space shall also be provided to accommodate printers and facsimile
machines. Recessed space for a photocopier shall also be included.
Communications Room Workstation (including data outlets and

power) for one technician shall be provided.
Custodial Facilities
The fit-out shall generally comply with the following criteria:

To meet OH&S standards;
Western Australian Police Building Code;
To provide a fit for purpose selection of furniture and building
fittings capable of withstanding rigorous wear and tear;
24
SECTION B
Recognise through a range and quality of provisions the diversity
of users of the Facilities (i.e. staff, legal counsel, support groups
and PIC);
Adopt a sensitive integrated design approach aimed at material
selection and colour that will assist in having a positive outcome in
reducing stress levels encountered within these facilities;
Doorways providing access between Custodial Areas and other
circulation spaces shall be designed to open inwards or outwards
such that the door, frame and locking mechanism combine to
afford the greatest level of protection and delay against the most
likely direction of attack in the event of an attempted escape or riot.
Jury Facilities
Jury Reception Counter Provide an L shaped counter/work

station area for up to 2 people that allows the following functionality:
Jury/court staff to check public into the dedicated jury pool area or
other multipurpose area designated for that purpose to enable
register of attendance;
Presentation of jury duty information and balloting of jurors; and
Dealing with enquiries.
One side of the counter shall face the formal seating in the assembly
area with the other side addressing the entrance to the assembly
room.
Jury Assembly Area Provide fixed seating to accommodate 70

persons in rows and casual lounge seating for a further 15 people.
Row seating shall be interlockable and stackable without arms and
provided with appropriate durable upholstery panels capable of being
removed for cleaning or replaced. Seating shall be orientated
towards a 2.5 metre staff bench workstation with storage underneath.
Provide a beverage counter nominally 2.5 metres long with below
bench cupboards. Build in a refrigerator, sink and boiling and
refrigerated water dispenser.
Tea Preparation Area Contiguous with the jury assembly area

shall be provided with storage and tea and coffee making facilities,
refrigerator and overhead cupboards.
Juror Personal Effects Storage Provide discrete linear four tier

laminate fronted keyed lockers to circulation areas within jury
deliberation. Provide 18 lockers.
Jury Deliberation Rooms The shape of the table to be profiled to

fit the shape of the room with a strong preference for an oval
configuration to facilitate each juror being able to equally interact with
all other jurors at the table. Jurors chairs shall be fully ergonomic
gas height adjustable chairs with lumbar support. Table to be sized
to accommodate up to 18 jurors. Provide also 2 club chairs and
coffee table. Provide a wall unit accommodating sink, boiling water
unit, bench space with cupboards/drawers under, overhead
cupboards and pantry space. The wall unit shall include a free
standing (integrated) refrigerator, microwave, video player and
monitor.
Counsel Facilities
Lawyers, Legal Aid and ALS, DPP: No special provisions are made
for Legal Counsel as they have access to interview rooms adjacent to
courtrooms as required.
25
SECTION B
Furniture Generally
Workstations - The design of office accommodation and the

workstation systems must take into account the type of work being
performed and conform to all OH&S and relevant government
accommodation guidelines.
D.
Each workstation is to be fully equipped with telephone/data and

power facilities to allow for the operation of PCs and other required
equipment and shall be fitted with adjustable keyboard trays and
matching but moveable monitor stands.
Workstation privacy screens shall be acoustically lined and provided

with shelving units and pin-up boards.
Utility Room Provisions Utility rooms throughout the court

complex shall be provided with bench space to accommodate
photocopiers, printers, facsimile machines etc, with storage
cupboards under (including adjustable shelving). Provide overhead
cupboards to the full extent of benches below. Storage capacity shall
be maximised within room configuration, including allowance for large
recycle bins.
Signage - A fully integrated signage system shall be provided with

signage to all rooms, and as required by the BCA. (Refer to Section
E. Information Services and Directional Signage specification of this
Design Brief).
Noticeboards, Whiteboards and Pin-up Boards - The requirement

for functional allocation of noticeboards, whiteboards and pin-up
boards shall generally be in accordance with the following guidelines:
Noticeboards shall be provided in areas where staff are located
and accommodated in workstation environments, staff amenities
areas, offices and conference/meeting rooms.
Whiteboards and Pin-up Boards - shall generally be provided in
courtrooms, office environments, conference/meeting rooms,
counsel work areas and staff work areas.
Art
i.
ii.
iii.
In accordance with the States Percent for Art Scheme the

consultant shall implement the DHW guidelines in respect to the
provision of artworks for the project. DHW will engage an art
consultant whose scope of service will include coordinating,
commissioning and administering the selected artists as nominated
by the artwork selection committee formed under direction of the
DHW.
The artworks may comprise significant sculptural pieces that maybe
required to be integrated within the building fabric in addition to a
more traditional response in the provision of selected
paintings/murals etc. In both cases the consultant shall allow for the
liaison with and the provision of all necessary attendance and
backgrounds and structural requirements facilitating installation.
Indigenous art is to be included as part of the public art and is to be
tendered separately. This component is to comprise of not less than
50% of the total art budget.
26
SECTION B
2.4.
Security Philosophy
A.
Court Security
Court processes, and therefore, the Court environment, should reflect a
respect for the rights, dignity and concerns of all participants.
The security environment of a court is complex and multi-faceted. The
significant variety and number of users, agencies and tenants of a court
building along with the need for different circulation patterns incorporate to
the environment the need for varying degrees of security across functions,
processes and physical locations. This issue is complicated further by the
need to ensure that court processes and the court environment reflect a
respect for the rights, dignity and concerns of all participants.
The potential for unexpected behaviours and deliberate actions that
threaten the safety of judicial officers, staff and the public, as well as
proceedings, is real in court buildings. Through effective policies and
procedures, and effective and supportive technology, the potential for
incidents needs to be reduced and the consequences of incidents
minimised.
Courts should communicate accessibility and assure that users safety,
security and privacy are respected. Contributions to the process should be
encouraged. Consequently security must be a key factor in the basic
design of court buildings to ensure that the underlying principles of justice
are attained whilst achieving effective security for the court.
Design features that fail to contribute to effective security at a court will not
be overcome by security technology and people. Court facilities should be
characterised by the maximum and effective use of technology to meet and
integrate the Courts functional requirements and security arrangements
must be integrated into the design and operation.
Commencing in the design phase, court security is achieved through the
security in depth principle where layers of tangible and overt measures
supported by other discreet and covert measures are implemented.
Security-in-depth adopts the concept of using sound architectural and
design principles with a series of people, procedural, physical features, fitout, spatial relationships, and landscaping features that provide multiple
layers of protection to the exterior and interior of the building and its
workings.
The principle is applied in every work area, with every asset and resource,
with each functional area of the building, each circulation area, and each
process inside and outside the building so that no feature is reliant upon a
single security measure.
27
SECTION B
B.
Common Features
i.
Access Control
The ability to control access to all parts of the building underpins
much of court security and the security-in-depth principle. All
movement into, through and out of any part of the building must be
controlled. The degree of access control required is determined
through an assessment of the functions undertaken in each area, and
the level of protection required for that function.
Public access should be through a single access point or area
wherever possible. All external components of the court building or
complex should be designed to facilitate this through a combination of
obvious and visible means and subtle more covert means. The
proximity of heavy traffic areas such as parking, gardens and
landscaping, cafeterias, registry and service areas to the entrance
influence the achievement of this aim.
ii.
Landscaping
The landscape design must consider how the location of plants,
garden beds, planters and other features outside the building
contribute to maintaining the building set-back through the control of
vehicle and people access to the building.
There should be strategically placed features that contribute to the
control of vehicle encroachment on the building.
The choice of plants must not impede vision of the approaches to the
building or provide places of concealment.
The layout of the landscaping should contribute to the channelling of
people to the appropriate entrance of the building.
iii.
Parking
Parking for judicial officers should be internal to the building wherever
possible and be fitted with electronic access control. Where this is
not possible such parking must be in a secure garage or other
parking area that is fenced and fitted with electronic access control.
Judicial officers must be provided with separate secured access to
the building from the secure parking area. Access to the building
must be separate to that provided for judicial officers if other court
staff or users have access to the secure parking area.
Parking for staff should be adjacent to or outside the building. The
area should be fenced and fitted with electronic access control.
Public parking should be adjacent to the building.
Service vehicle access to the site should be through a single security
access control point that utilises electronic access control, personnel
security or hydraulic vehicle barriers.
Vehicles should not be able to be parked against the side of the
building without having passed through a security control point.
28
SECTION B
iv.
Doors and Locks

Every door contributes to the security of the building. The location
and use of the door determines its degree of hardening and the type
of lock required to secure it.
All access and egress doorways in the building must be assessed for
purpose and fitted with an appropriately rated door and locking
mechanism. The higher the level of security and access control
required for an area or location the higher the security rating of the
door and lock must be.
Secured and restricted areas should be secured with an electronic
access control.
All doorways should be able to be retrospectively fitted with electronic
access control devices and infrastructure.
v.
Building Faade and Fittings

All service points and fittings on the faade of the building must be
situated in ways that do not permit them to be used as access or
egress points. Drain pipes must be secured in such a way as to deny
their use as a climbing device or to otherwise facilitate access to the
building. Air conditioning and other service units and vents must be
secured to deny the introduction of contaminants.
Fittings and furnishings should contribute to the safety and security of
people and the facility. All fittings should be of a design and
robustness so as to support the safe movement and handling of PICs.
Fittings and furniture used in a PIC custody or circulation area must
be secured in ways that deny their removal through deliberate action,
vandalism or as a result of collateral damage caused by a security or
safety incident.
vi.
Lighting
Lighting must support the deployment of surveillance devices.
Lighting must provide adequate illumination of judicial and staff
parking areas along with pedestrian access paths. It must deny
concealment in the vicinity of the building or other vulnerable places.
Higher levels of illumination are required at all entrances.
C.
CIRCULATION CONTROL
A critical element of the court design is the separation of public, secure and
restricted circulation patterns. People participating in a court room process
should not intersect at any point before entering the court and in most
circumstances that separation must be retained inside the court room as
well.
i.
Judicial Circulation
The judicial circulation must permit judicial officers to move from, to
and between car parking, chambers, the court room and other
restricted spaces under secure conditions. All access and egress
29
SECTION B
between spaces and locations must be secured with an electronic
access control.
2.5.
ii.
Juror Circulation
Juror circulation must permit jurors to move between floors and
spaces of the building without intersecting with public or secure
areas. All access and egress in the juror circulation must be secured
with an electronic access control.
iii.
PIC Circulation
PICs transport must be able to be moved into the sally port under
controlled conditions. PICs must be able to be moved from the sally
port to the central holding facilities, and to and from holding cells
adjacent to courtrooms without passing or entering public or restricted
spaces.
iv.
Restricted Circulation
Staff usually access the building through the same access point as
the public. Staff work locations anywhere in the building are
restricted areas. Access to staff work areas and locations must be by
electronic access control. Staff movement between work areas and
locations can be through the public circulation.
v.
Public Circulation
Public entry should be through the main entrance, regardless of the
number of additional access points on the exterior of the building.
Movement of the public to and from public areas of the building such
as court rooms, registry and juror reception must not intersect with
judicial, PIC or juror circulation.
Access For People with a Disability

Courthouse designs are to comply with the Disability Discrimination Act.
Courthouses must be accessible buildings that provide for people with a range of
disabilities. People with a disability must be able to gain independent access into
and within the building so that they can fulfil their role in the function of that
building. This includes visiting public, witnesses, jury, judiciary, professionals,
persons-in-custody and court staff.
The Building Code of Australia outlines that certain Australian Standards
covering accessibility are mandatory. However these are minimum requirements
and may not be sufficient to meet the requirements of the Disability
Discrimination Act.
Consultants must design for people with a variety of impairments including
limited ability to walk, use of wheelchairs, limited hearing or sight, or physical,
intellectual or psychological states that cause limited functioning. Building design
must ensure the users of the facility are treated with equity.
Consultants are to provide parking facilities within reasonable distance of
entrances, well detailed steps and stairs, support at stairways, doorways, toilets,
frequent seating within and outside the building, readily operated controls,
barrier-free routes to and between buildings, level or ramped approaches to
entrances, wider doorways, lobbies and circulation routes, well detailed toilet
facilities, counters, and telephones.
30
SECTION B
People with impaired hearing require good quality lighting, good acoustic
environments, finishes and backgrounds which assist lip reading, backup visual
information (for example: lifts, alarms, communications) and good signage. Infrared assisted hearing amplifiers with total courtroom coverage are to be installed
in courtrooms.
People with impaired sight require good quality controllable lighting appropriate
to the environment and function, including transitional lighting at entrances from
outside and avoidance of glare from any source, good acoustic environments,
avoidance of hazards along routes both inside and outside, clear layout, built-in
information and clues, such as texture, orientation and way finding, sound
absorbent qualities, significant features to assist, good contrast of critical
elements such as doorways, stairs and handrails, good signage with letters,
numbers and symbols in relief where appropriate, consistency in location of
controls and supports, and backup aural information (for example: lifts, alarms,
communications).
Public Telephone
All public telephones must be suitable for use by disabled persons and
wheelchair users.
Toilet Provision
Accessible toilets must be provided in accordance with the BCA for staff,
judiciary, public, the jurors in both jury assembly and deliberation room. Unisex
toilets are preferred for public use as they enable a disabled person to be helped
by someone of the other sex.
Lifts
If courthouses extend over two or more levels then lifts are required. Consultants
must consider egress for people with a disability in the event of a fire from all
levels of the courtroom, jury rooms, chambers, cells and other areas. Vertical
access to smaller but essential areas could be achieved by the use of wheelchair
stair lifts or short rise platform lifts.
Car Parking
Accessible parking must be provided close to the building entrance in both the
secure judicial/staff car park and the public car park.
Automatic Doors
Public entrance doors are automatic sliding doors. Both doors to courtroom
sound lock should be automatically assisted. Occasionally there will be a
requirement for other automated doors.
Floor Level Changes within Courtrooms
A member of the public must be able to enter the courtroom and have access to
public seating areas at the rear of the court, the witness box and all jury areas.
Staff, those in custody, judiciary, judicial staff and legal practitioners must also be
able to access relevant spaces within the courtroom. The necessity for floor level
changes will mean that ramps have to be incorporated. Allow space for
temporary removable ramps. Adequate circulation space around joinery in the
courtroom is necessary.
The floor level from the custody lift to the dock floor level within the courtroom
must be unimpeded by any steps. Similarly, the floor level from any judicial lifts or
from judicial chambers should ideally match the judicial bench floor level in the
courtroom. If this is not possible then ramped access is permitted. The floor
level from the Jury lift (may not be applicable in a circuit court) to the Jury
31
SECTION B
retirement rooms and from the Jury retirement rooms to the front row of the Jury
box must be uniform. Any ramped areas in corridors to achieve such access
must comply with the BCA.
Custody Areas
Persons-in-custody with a disability must be able to enter the custody area and
access the custody facilities. Such access may be assisted to the extent that
security arrangements require. Provide ramps where floor level changes occur.
Hearing Aid Loops
Infra-red assisted hearing amplifiers with total courtroom coverage are to be
provided to all courtrooms.
Alarm Systems
EWIS alarms must be both audible and visual.
3.
Western Australian State Sustainability Strategy

A.
The Western Australian Government has released Hope for the Future:
The Western Australian State Sustainability Strategy 2003 ("Government's
Sustainability Strategy"). The Government's Sustainability Strategy aims to
deliver developments that improve the total quality of life, both now and in
the future in a way that maintains the ecological process on which life
depends.
Refer http://www.sustainability.dpc.wa.gov.au/
B.
The consultant is required to take account of the Governments

Sustainability Strategy. There are eight Government wide commitments on
sustainability that impact on how developments are undertaken relating to:
C.
3.1.
Building design
Waste reduction and recycling
Energy use
Water use
Reduced travel and vehicle use for sustainability
OH&S
Public engagement
Social responsibility.
As a minimum, the consultant shall comply with the requirements detailed

below in sections B.3.1 to B.3.8.
Building Design for Sustainability

A.
The project is to be designed in a manner consistent with the principles of

sustainable development. The Project must incorporate the principles of
solar orientation, natural lighting, energy efficiency, accessible design, and
other sustainability innovations.
The project is to recognise sustainability issues in the assessment of value
for money and ensure that the projects procurement is consistent with the
State sustainability strategy. The DHW has endorsed the Australian
Institute of Quantity Surveyors publication Evaluation of Sustainable
Development Australian Cost Management Manual Volume 4, and
32
SECTION B
supports the use of The Royal Australian Institute of Architects
Environment Design Guide by consultants.
3.2.
i.
Designing to Minimise Lifecycle Costs.
ii.
Wilful and Accidental Damage to Public Buildings.

The booklet titled Designing Buildings to Reduce Damage is
intended for use by designers of public buildings and provides
information to assist designers incorporate features that are likely to
minimise damage.
iii.
Maintenance Minimisation
The State wishes to minimise recurrent expenditure on all projects,
and life cycle costing must be considered with development design
proposals.
iv.
Solar Control
Solar control shall be provided to all facades to ensure comfort of
building occupants and conservation of energy. This is to be
provided via means of external shading, high performance glazing,
window treatments or a combination of these means to mitigate
radiant heat and glare.
Waste Reduction and Recycling

A.
Designing to Maximise Recycling Opportunities

The consultant is required to design to maximise the opportunities to recycle
materials in future and consider inherent opportunities to recycle materials
such as green waste and landfill on site within the works. The consultant
shall only use recycled materials that achieve the required technical
performance while at the same time providing reasonable comfort for the
occupants.
B.
Waste Management and Recycling

i.
Prior to the commencement of the work on Site the consultant shall
ensure that the Builder prepares and implements a Waste
Management Plan relevant to the works under the Contract. The
Waste Management Plan shall be maintained, and where necessary
updated, throughout the Contract. The Waste Management Plan
shall be appropriate to the volume of waste associated with the work
under the Contract and shall contain provision for, but not be limited
to, the following elements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Evaluation of demolition materials for reuse on site;

Induction for all employees;
Information and education given to sub-contractors to ensure
understanding of waste minimisation plan;
Liaison with waste contractor to ensure effective recycling;
Details of proposed waste disposal and recycling certification;
Job planning to ensure appropriate separation/bins are
available for concrete, steel, timber and other materials as
volumes dictate;
Arrangements for packaging reuse/return to suppliers such as
pallets, tins, crates, etc;
Arrangements for on site reuse of material such as
grinding/mulching of materials;
33
SECTION B
i.
j.
ii.
3.3.
Arrangements to monitor bins to ensure material separation

conformity;
Provide evidence of the destination of materials taken off site.
Each element of the Waste Management Plan shall specifically

address:
a.
The person on the Site who shall take responsibility for the
successful implementation of each element;
b.
The hierarchal structure by which the responsibility is
performed; and
c.
The specific manner by which the element is performed.
B.
Induction Training
The consultant shall ensure that the Builder does not permit its employees,
the employees of other parties or other persons to commence work on the
Site until they have been inducted. Such induction shall include but not
necessarily be limited to familiarisation with the Waste Management Plan.
C.
Waste Management Plan Proforma

The Waste Management Plan shall cover the following issues:
i.
Site staff induction;
ii.
Storage facilities;
iii.
Materials decision sheets for:
a.
Demolition
b.
Construction
c.
Other Waste
iv.
Monitoring and Evaluation;
v.
Method of demolition and equipment to be used;
vi.
Method of containment and progressive clean up of dirt, dust, mud,
water;
vii. Method and extent of final site clean up and repair of damaged items
(such as roads, kerbs, fences, storm water sumps and the like; and)
viii. Written confirmation of final destination of materials taken off site
(recycling, land fill and the like).
D.
Use of Timber
The project shall rely on Natspec Guide number 3 Timber in Context A
Guide to Sustainable Use in their selection and application of timber. The
Consultant shall not specify CCA treated timber without the consent of the
Project Director.
Energy Use for Sustainability

A.
Designing to Minimise Energy Operating Costs

i.
The Project is to be designed to minimise energy operating costs
while at the same time providing reasonable comfort for the
occupants (as further specified in the Mechanical Services Brief.)
Refer to:
http://www.greenhouse.gov.au/buildings/publications/emissions.html
ii.
It is intended that the Building be designed to achieve at least an
AGBR rating equivalent to a 3.5 star office building (base building
plus fit-out) taking into account the differences in equipment,
occupancy and hours of operation between the Building and an office
building.
34
SECTION B
iii.
3.4.
All office equipment installed in the building shall comply with the
Energy Star standard and shall have all Energy Star features
enabled.
Refer to:
http://www1.sedo.energy.wa.gov.au/pages/energy_smart_gov.asp
Water Use for Sustainability

The consultant will demonstrate responsible practise in water use through the
use of efficient plant, equipment, fixtures, appliances and water wise
landscaping.
3.5.
3.6.
Reduced Travel and Vehicle Use for Sustainability

A.
TravelSmart
i.
State government agencies are required to reduce vehicle use by
promoting travel alternatives, improving workplace end of trip facilities
and managing car parking.
ii.
The co-location of custodial facilities and the provision of audiovisual
conferencing facilities on the site will deliver operational travel
savings.
iii.
The consultant should be aware of the Government endorsed
"TravelSmart Workplace" program that promotes a green transport
plan.
Refer to:
http://www.dpi.wa.gov.au/travelsmart/
B.
Bicycle End of Trip Facilities in Government Buildings

i.
The project is to incorporate long-term bicycle end of trip facilities for
staff. This is in accordance with the government endorsed cycle plan
Bike Ahead: Bicycle Strategy for the 21st Century.
ii.
The appropriate bicycle end of trip facilities will be in accordance with
the standards set out in Bikewests End of trip facilities in
Government Buildings.
iii.
Additionally, the consultant shall make provision for short term bicycle
parking adjacent to the main building entry. This shall be discretely
located and cater for couriers and the general public.
Refer to:
http://www.dpi.wa.gov.au/cycling/documents/end_of_trip.pdf
Occupational Health and Safety

A.
Health and safety in the workplace improves environment, economic and

social outcomes in government agencies. Statutory requirements in
respect of OH&S must be met.
Refer to: http://www.safetyline.wa.gov.au/
B.
A sustainable building must provide appropriate indoor environmental

quality throughout its serviceable life. Research has demonstrated that
high quality indoor environments are associated with reduced absenteeism
rates.
Indoor Air Quality
Off Gassing of Materials - No solvent-based paint systems shall be

used without the approval of the Project Director. Buildings are
required to be adequately vented prior to occupation, furniture must
35
SECTION B
be allowed to off gas and be naturally or mechanically air circulated
prior to occupation.
Design for Minimum Dust Generation and Easy Cleaning
The Building is to be designed to maximise the use of self-cleaning

coatings and air filter quality required to ensure a high quality internal
air quality. The Building shall include appropriate dust trapping
mats.ances.
3.7.
Public Engagement
The Department of the Attorney General will undertake the process of public
engagement for the Project through extensive stakeholder consultations.
3.8.
4.
Social Responsibility
A.
Government agencies are required to examine strategies for community

building and social responsibility involving their own employees. This will
include cross-cultural awareness training, gender assessments, a
community focus through employee-adopted community programs and
place-based integration of services across government. The consultant
shall embrace these strategies wherever practicable.
B.
The Project shall be designed to meet government office accommodation

standards and should provide an appropriate setting for diverse sections of
the community to meet.
Architectural Psychology Brief

4.1.
Introduction
Origins of the Requirement to Consider the Architectural Psychology of the
Court Environment
A.
The Law Reform Commission of Western Australia's Review of Criminal
and Civil Justice System in Western Australia: Final Report, 1999, includes
a section on the court environment. In that section, the court environment,
described as the physical and social environment, was stated to affect the
users of the court system in various ways.
B.
The authors of the special study for the Commission, Louise St. Kennedy,
architect, and David Tait, PhD, academic, discussed how traditional court
architecture communicates an ambience of authority and exclusiveness.
They recommended that new and renovated courts should communicate
accessibility and assure that users safety and privacy are respected and all
contributions to the process are welcome.
C.
As part of the project planning process there has been considerable effort
expended by DotAG in reviewing its processes and policies with the aim to
make the experience in all courthouses, for all participants, to be as user
friendly as possible. New staff training programs are in train to provide staff
with skills and sensitivities to assist them in their dealing with the public and
the professions.
D.
The consultant study concentrated on the public realm of the Court
environment. The study took as its fundamental aim the Western
Australian Department of the Attorney Generals wish to operate userfriendly CBD Courthouse in Perth.
36
SECTION B
4.2.
Architectural Psychology and Courts Environments

The term Architectural Psychology is wide ranging and has become a field that can
involve:
A.
Ergonomics (including comfort studies, how the senses work,
anthropometrics and human physiology and human movement);
B.
Psychology proper (where perception studies, psycholinguistics, cognitive
mapping, individual motivation, memory and so on can be relevant);
C.
Sociology (especially micro sociology and other studies of small group
interaction, sociolinguistics, issues of class and so on); and
D.
Anthropology (particularly, here, ethnography, symbolism and ritual).
E.
Some specialists would include, additionally, aesthetics, studies of power
relations and frames of reference (involving linguistics, the history and
philosophy of science, perhaps political science and moral philosophy).
4.3.
Architectural Requirements
Before individual requirements are listed, five recurrent principles are set out.
Some of the requirements are clearly not requirements concerning the court
environment, itself. However, they have been included here because were they not to
be followed, then the burden of trying to achieve user-friendliness in the court
environment falls unworkably heavily on the Facilities. Asking the architecture of the
Courthouses to do what is often both less costly and more precise when done by
other means is foolish.
Further, the most fundamental principle of architectural psychology is that a working
facility works as a whole and that the effects of the physical environment cannot be
dissociated from the social and cultural environments within which it is situated.
A.
Recurrent Principles for User-Friendliness
i.
The recurrent principles for user-friendliness that follow should be
regarded as requirements that apply to all issues in the design of the
court environment. Some of them (such as 4.3 d: Psychological
Relief) are discussed as detailed requirements, also.
ii.
Text in italics either amplifies a recommendation being made or
explains its intent.
a.
User-friendliness of the court environment will be very much
enhanced if any person not usually involved with the court is
comfortable being there and the need to deal with matters
important to them outside the court environment is respected;
b.
It is imperative that there can be separation of accused and
their supporters (family, friends, colleagues and legal counsel)
from victims and their supporters (partners, family, friends,
colleagues and legal counsel) in criminal matters; and, similarly,
separation of Consultant and applicant groups in civil matters.
This can be accomplished subtly through design of waiting
areas, circulation systems and the entries to Courts
c.
Similarly it is imperative that vulnerable persons required to give
evidence are protected from additional stress by being able to
avoid undesirable contact when moving through the building
and when waiting outside courtrooms. This applies regardless
of the reasons for being vulnerable, whether by reason of age
(children), intelligence (intellectually disabled), or relationship
with accused (partners) [practical and psychological issue].
At all times, people should have confidence that they are
in a safe place.
37
SECTION B
The potential for unexpected behaviours and deliberate
d.
e.
B.
actions that threaten the safety of staff and all

participants, as well as proceedings, is real in
Courthouses.
Through effective policies and procedures, and effective,
supportive technology, the potential for incidents needs to
be reduced and results of incidents minimised.
Psychological relief is required for victims (including secondary
victims), witnesses and jurors. This is both for calming down
and for letting off steam after being dismissed, after seeing
forensic evidence and/or after verdicts and sentencing, and in
order to be left alone as they leave the court environment (by
the public, by supporters of the opposition, by the media).
In Court matters, personal emotions can be quite close
to the surface and break out at times when litigants,
juries, witnesses, the accused, staff, legal personnel
and judicial officers all have to concentrate and remain
focused and attentive.
The need for relief from these complex conditions, be it
momentarily by focusing on something beyond the
immediate, or symbolically, by getting outside the area
is central to producing good order and less stress.
Our legal system is adversarial. Presently, criminal courts
proceedings are regarded as being matters between accused
and the State. The general public, however, is more likely to
take the view that, like civil matters, criminal matters, too, are
more symmetrical being between victims and accused. Yet,
unless they are witnesses or deceased, victims are not
recognised by the justice system. A user-friendly justice system
would give greater recognition to victims, direct and indirect,
before, after and during trials.
It is not assumed, nor implied, that there will be a
change to our adversarial system of criminal justice.
The concepts of a just society, however, do suggest that
all participants should feel that Court processes, and
therefore, the Courts' built environments, should reflect
a respect for the rights, dignity and concerns of all
participants in matters before the Courts.
Architectural Requirements for a User Friendly Environment

i.
Requirement 1: ADDRESS & ENTRY
Courthouses should be clearly visible within the street as public
buildings.
It should be obvious where the main/front entry is. It should be
perceived as a single entry.
There should be two or more places to wait outside the Facilities for
small groups. At least one should cater for up to fifteen people for a
short time. At least one such area should be under cover from
adverse weather (wind, sun, and rain).
ii.
Requirement 2: GROUND FLOOR/ENTRY LEVEL
Locate a single main reception point in a very obvious, centrally
located, clearly signposted position indicating that it is staffed by
reception or information personnel, rather than security guards or
similar.
38
SECTION B
a.
iii.
Visibility
The entry level/ground level of the building ought to appear as
open and transparent from outside as possible.
b.
Visibility of Support Services
All support services should be visible from the main foyer.
This may not be practically possible. But, the existence of
a Support Service and what it offers must be clear in the
main foyer and how to access it should also be clear.
c.
Waiting Areas
All waiting areas ought to allow people to separate
themselves from others if they wish.
Careful articulation of the waiting area, its seating and the
use of columns assists with this. Back to back seating is
not desirable, without a low screen separating the two
sides.
There ought to be televisions in waiting areas. However,
unsuitable, stressing programs on televisions ought to be
avoided.
At least the capability should be possible on all floors and
close to all courts, like at airports, done in ways in which
the presence and sound is not all pervasive. The actual
installations should be at least where there can be large
numbers of people waiting for protracted times, usually
high turnover courtrooms.
Where possible, waiting areas should have a view to the
world exterior to the court environment.
The design standards and standards of finishes and
furnishes of waiting areas as of all areas in the public
realm, ought to be similar to those provided in all other
areas of the Courthouse.
This is an issue of equity and of appearances. Being
equally valued can be expressed through equality of
accommodations.
d.
Caf
There should be a caf at main foyer level, clearly visible on
entry. It should be outside the Primary Security Checkpoint or,
accessible from both sides of the Primary Security Checkpoint.
An alternative is two cafs one either side of the Security
Checkpoint. A caf-cart might suffice inside the Facilities.
Vending machines might suffice in smaller Courts where a
caf would not be financially viable.
e.
Sick Room
There should be a room that can be used for emergencies as a
sick room near the main foyer.
Requirement 3: INFORMATION
a.
Notifications
Before attending court, persons called to the Court should
be issued with adequate information packs before they
arrive (accompanying hearing notices, summons for
jurors, witnesses). These should contain maps, times,
requirements, directions and instructions, descriptions of
court processes and court etiquette, estimates of time
commitment, help available (especially including childcare
and languages other than English).
Normal notifications/information packs should include a
CD with spoken information on it (in a number of
39
SECTION B
iv.
v.
languages) particularly who to contact for further

information, how to do so, and how people can recognise
that they have reached where they are expected to go.
Within the court environment/facility, notifications such as
calls for witnesses to appear or for the start of cases
should be both auditory and visual.
b.
Signage
There ought to be signage at the point of arrival on every
floor that indicates what Courts, services and/or facilities
are available on that floor. Maps showing their location
should be included. Descriptions of the functions of main
items ought to be included.
Fire exits should be noted on the maps.
Court and hearing listings and other schedules should be
available in the same place.
The scale of the lettering should be the equivalent of that
for schedules at airports.
Information on how to behave in Court, on what is
expected of people, ought to be provided in the same
place.
In the same places, where similar information can be
found in languages other than English should be declared
in at least the following languages:
Arabic
Greek
Indonesian/Malay
Italian
Mandarin
Polish
Spanish
Vietnamese.
Touch-screens (with animation capabilities) would be one
way to solve many of these problems.
Televisions in waiting areas could provide similar
information. They are particularly suited to providing
schedule information as at airports.
Requirement 4: WAYFINDING
In designing circulation areas, close attention should be paid to
their legibility. Landmarks, paths, nodes, districts and edges in
the court environment should be obvious.
On accessing a floor, it should be obvious where the facilities
sought are located.
The form, arrangement and layout of the Facilities should
enable unfamiliar users to anticipate and locate themselves and
lead them to their destinations, making operations plain to see
for all participants.
Requirement 5: COURTS
a.
Some Courts should be readily accessible without the use of
lifts.
b.
Proceedings in Courts should be amplified so that all in the
court can hear clearly all that is said.
c.
Courts should preferably have two doors for general entry
purposes.
d.
At least one of the courts continually in use for family-related
(e.g. domestic violence) matters should be equipped with a
40
SECTION B
vi.
vii.
glazed-off area at the back where mothers may look after

children or breast feed without risk to the proper functioning of
the Court.
Requirement 6: PSYCHOLOGICAL RELIEF
a.
The opportunity to smoke outside should be made available to
witnesses, jurors, litigants and victims; and
b.
The same groups should have a view of the world outside the
court environment. This view need not be constantly available.
A view is NOT the same thing as fresh air.
The primary source of psychological relief from the
stress of being there when in the courts environment is
knowledge of what is going on, where to go and how to
behave. If the information recommended to be provided
under Requirement 3, above, is provided, much of that
stress will be alleviated or, at least, minimised.
However, more specific relief is required at specific
times particularly for victims, witnesses, jurors and
some litigants. People will want to gather their thoughts
and wits before continuing, they may wish to cry, they
may wish to vent their anger or they may need to let
their anger subside. This should be possible away from
the scrutiny of others. If it is not possible, people may
be unnecessarily further stressed, they may not be able
to continue (and thus threaten the smooth operation of
proceedings) or they may upset others who observe
their distress with similar possible consequences for
personal psychological trauma and disruption of the
operation of the courts.
In some cases, psychological relief may entail
counselling.
Witnesses/Victims
There should be provision for discreet (unmarked) witness
areas each with views of the exterior and their own rest
room (unisex would suffice) at regular intervals in the
court environment.
Though witnesses, victims and others should be aware of
their existence (through their notifications/information
packages and or other sources), access to these facilities
should be controlled by Courts staff.
Jurors
Jury deliberation rooms should have a view to the exterior
of the court environment.
Jurors need psychological relief both from Court
proceedings and during deliberations. If there is a secure
Jury circulation system, then outdoor relief somewhere off
that system might well be adequate.
Requirement 7: EXITING THE BUILDING
a.
There should be a secure, discreet exit system for witnesses,
jury members and victims that avoids public areas of the
Facilities.
b.
At their discretion, Court staff should be able to offer that facility
to some litigants.
41
SECTION B
5.
Aboriginal Cultural Brief

5.1.
Introduction
A.
B.
C.
5.2.
The importance of undertaking consultation with Aboriginal and NonAboriginal stakeholders is pivotal to the ultimate design outcome of a courts
complex. Consultation with Aboriginal stakeholders ensures that there is
active Aboriginal involvement and interpretation in the design process.
Active involvement will have a positive impact upon all users of the
facilities.
The successful communication between the Consultants and Aboriginal
people in the cross-cultural design process needs to start with the
acceptance and recognition of cultural protocols for complying with customs
and cultural value systems. Note: Because cultural protocols can vary
across communities and or regions, consultation is essential to ensuring
that the protocols are consistent with the area. These protocols can then
be translated into design through interpretation, which can form a
communication link between a place and its visitors. Whatever the link; it
creates for the visitor an intellectual and emotional connection or identity to
the place, engendering feelings about a place, prompts ideas and reveals
meanings.
It is incumbent on the Consultants to embrace the Aboriginal Cultural Brief
in order to understand the indigenous concepts of design and landscape.
Understanding of indigenous concepts need to be incorporated with
activities, design and contributions that are appropriate and respectful of
the Aboriginal people specific and non-specific to the area and other
cultures generally.
Objective
The primary OBJECTIVE of the Aboriginal Cultural Brief is to achieve a userfriendly environment (i.e. An environment that is less threatening to Aboriginal
people) satisfying the following requirements:
Respectful of the diverse users;
Conducive to equitable participation;
Appropriate to users needs; and
Comfortable in the full sense physical, emotional, social, cultural

[spiritual] and psychological.
Design flexibility to cater for the diverse users and ongoing and
continual development and refinement of court processes to meet
cultural and practical circumstances
5.3.
Cultural Brief
A.
There are three essential areas of compliance for Consultants to cover in

their Design Proposals:
i.
Integration of cultural fabric with the urban or regional location
including the existing building, and the new development - building,
landscape and artistic contributions;
ii.
Range, location and quality of spaces; and
iii.
Adaptation of the physical environment to accommodate cultural
precepts.
42
SECTION B
B.
C.
D.
It is recommended that the development be approached as an Aboriginal

design-collaborative process. 1
Integration of cultural fabric with the development setting
i.
Essential Considerations:
Ensure access and entry to the Facilities considers specific cultural
requirements of visitors from remote areas.
Recognise convenient location of entry points in relation to public
and private transport routes.
Incorporate appropriate gathering and waiting areas external to the
building.
Incorporate cultural symbols into the development external
spaces and structures, landscaping, building form and finish.
Undertake a percent for art project that brings together Aboriginal
and non-Aboriginal artists from the beginning of the project.
Recognise the importance of local Aboriginal concepts of seasons
(Aboriginal society recognises six seasons) when considering the
design landscape.
ii.
Opportunities:
Research the proposed building site to determine if there is any
heritage listing which can provide an opportunity for interpretation
of Aboriginal views. That is, is there any colonial significance to
the history of the area that can be translated in functional design
that embraces Aboriginal involvement through shared space and
activity.
Range, Location, and Quality of Services and Spaces
i.
Ensure all Aboriginal service organisations are catered for in an
appropriate location with access to external gathering areas and
withdrawal [private] areas.
Ensure provision for utility spaces to support family support
services, is allowed for, in the development proposal. This might
include a caf and/or elder's support area.
Ensure that spaces and facilities are functional, prominent and
appropriate for the service to be provided, by engaging relevant
agencies in the cross-cultural design process.
Include facilities for mothers with babies e.g. change room, and
quiet room for feeding and caring.
Ensure way finding and signage is clear, and appropriately
incorporates symbols with wording for all the spaces, places,
access ways and facilities.
Ensure appropriate visual links between related activities and
spaces is designed for.
Provide for access to fresh air wherever possible (e.g. adjacent to
waiting areas outside courtrooms).
ii.
Opportunities:
Cater for a range of indigenous groups coming together at the
courthouse.
Waiting spaces should enable groups in feuding relationships to be
able to avoid each other while waiting for court.
Provision of facilities to cater for the security and safety of victims
from the risk of intimidation, harassment and re-traumatisation.
Withdrawal and gathering places at all levels of the building.
An Aboriginal Design-Collaborative process is one where parties come together as equal partners [collaborators]
contributing in an interactive way to the development and implementation of a project from inception to completion.
43
SECTION B
E.
5.4.
Adaptation of Physical Environment to Accommodate Cultural Precepts

i.
Ensure the environment is user friendly, appropriate and
comfortable.
Incorporate Familiarity2 elements that will enable favourable
associations to be created between people and place through
colour, light, plants, artworks, materials, sounds, and images.
Ensure the sustainability of the environment by respecting the
country [for example minimising waste] and having a sustainability
policy for the project.
Ensure the safety and security of participants and visitors are
maintained. This includes the provision of spaces for different
cultural groups, so that there is choice for different groups to
interact or come in contact with each other. This also includes a
sense of security in knowing that children will be looked after when
they go to the Facilities.
Ensure Functionality, through spaces and places
performing as required. The following refers to some of the
important design and layout issues to be considered in the
development of the new Facilities.
ii.
Opportunities:
Incorporate features that are innovative and different to the
conventional.
Notes About People and Place

Making and creating a new facility is about recognising special requirements, and
ensuring that these are incorporated into the finished product, in such a way as
to be seamless and intentional. In other words, the cultural input is an integral
part of the landscape not something added into it.
2. Familiarity Elements refers to those physical, visual, aural, and tactile, elements, which enable people to make a connection to something
familiar to them in their life or home environment.
44
SECTION B
Table 12 - Design Issues to be Considered
No Item
Requirement
Notes
1
Approach
Raised podiums with steps provide Incorporate slopes in the landscape
barriers that inhibit ease of access. surrounding the building to facilitate
ease of access. This could also
include ramps for disabled access.
2
Gathering
Provide places for people to gather The sitting/waiting/gathering space
Places
in private or collectively. At the could be partly enclosed, partly
same time it is important that semi-enclosed, and partly an open
people have pleasant outlooks and deck to cater for different climatic
stimuli that prompt a familiar conditions.
connection to home or an
appealing/calming
place
or
situation.
3
Reception
It is essential that the arrival and It is important that there be a
and
Way- orientation process is understood reception as part of the information
finding
and
facilitated
through
the counter whether dedicated or
provision of an obvious reception integral with the registry counter.
point and clarity of the complex
layout to ensure ease of wayfinding throughout the building.
4
Courtrooms To make the courtrooms more Consider high level glazing panels
user friendly and accessible to the from about 2000 (high sill level) to
various participants, optimise the ceiling and reflective ceilings in the
provision of natural light within the adjacent corridors etc so as to
reflect light into the courtroom.
courtroom.
Aboriginal court shall have both
direct access to outdoor light and
wherever possible provide direct
access to the outdoors without
compromising security.
5
organisations
and
of Support
& associated services need to be
located in places where people
can easily find their way, access is
not tortuous and the potential for
gathering and having access to
external fresh air access is
available
Other
Cater for the special needs of
Services
families, groups and people with
specific needs. i.e. disabled
access, family support services to
provide for those participants that
need special care providers, a
child feeding and changing, and
availability of refreshments within
the restricted zone.
Ablutions
Privacy associated with amenities
and
is critical especially for women.
Amenities
The separation of mens and
womens entrances to toilets is
also required, as opposed to co-
Provide an entrance with a

recessed door and sidelight, which
allows people in the corridor to see
who is present in the public sitting
area of the court.
Location
Service
Support
Groups
Entrances to toilets in court areas to

be more deeply embedded within
semi-concealed entry passageways
to make them less conspicuous.
45
SECTION B
No
Item
External
Vistas
10
11
12
13
14
Requirement
Notes
joining in the same vicinity.
Having visual connections to the
external world are important.
This enables connectedness to be

a positive influence on the
demeanour of participants while
they are in the building/facilities.
Fresh
Air Access
to
the
external
Options
environment is mentioned above in
terms of accessing vistas.
In
addition it is considered critical that
there are opportunities for people
to breathe fresh air without having
to exit the complex.
Familiarity
Having connections to familiar
landscapes
colours
etc.
is
important for people to feel more
comfortable with their location.
This might include strategically

positioned small balconies or
courtyards that extend outside the
existing skin of the building.
Public Art initiatives may include a

collection of landscape photographs
of WA, representative of the region
or all regions as appropriate (for
metropolitan courthouses), and
distributed
across
walls
of
nominated courts and public
spaces.
Some of the strategies could include

the following:
Art
works,
murals,
fabric,
photographs, DVDs.
Vistas
Long and short distance vistas can Opportunities to connect with vistas
provide stimulation and interest, from inside areas and outside
potentially averting the focus away spaces are essential.
from internal spaces and activities.
Distractions Distractions are important, they Provide for more wall-mounted
provide alternate avenues for televisions in public waiting areas.
peoples attention span and
increase their comfort zone.
Signage
Good signage for all courts is Symbols and sign language have an
essential. Signage displaying the important place in indigenous
Some
specific
listings should clearly indicate in communication.
large letters, the different courts, to requirements include:
prevent missed appearances and
to ensure smooth operations.
Provide large and clear layout

maps of each floor opposite lift
Signage may be in both written
egress;
and symbolic form that has
significance
to
indigenous
communities. Reliance on signage
for way-finding however will not be
acceptable.
Relieving
Minimising the sense of being Opportunities to exit and withdraw
Stress
enclosed and shut-in is important into private areas, such as outside
in order to alleviate stress. decks and spaces with vistas and
Reducing
stress
raises
the fresh air are seen as essential
potential to induce some sense of requirements.
confidence in the facilities.
46
SECTION B
No
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Item
Colour
Requirement
Use of colour in different sections
to engage interest and provide a
calming effect is seen as critical in
maintaining connections between
people and place. Some colours
are not conducive to internal
spaces.
Colour blindness may also be an

issue if relying upon coloured
images for direction finding.
Texture
Application of variable texture to
indicate transitions from spaces of
different function are useful,
especially for people with sensual
deprivation. It can also have an
aesthetic value.
Lifts
When it is a requirement to
transfer between levels the use of
stairs offers a more open and
accessible mode than a lift.
Traditional people have in the past
expressed a particular aversion to
lifts.
Floor
Floors can be enhanced with
Surfaces
different treatments to enhance
transition between places/spaces,
as well as define different use for
spaces or areas.
The use of mosaics and pathways
to follow are two examples where
the floor finish can be useful as a
way-finding tool.
Wall
Wall surfaces are ideal for
Surfaces
appropriate enhancement with
colour,
images,
murals,
photographs, symbols etc.
Awareness If technology is introduced there
of
Users must be people around to explain
about
how it is to be used and accessed.
Technology
Cold Wind Wind
protection
is
highly
Protection in recommended especially in public
Winter
spaces and gathering points.
5.5.
Notes
Colours, scenes and materials that
enable a connection to country to be
made, are useful.
These stimuli can result in
connections being made that foster
a sense of familiarity and ease with
the facilities.
This can also include materials that

come
from
different
regions
[approved
under
appropriate
protocols] and therefore also
provide
connections
between
people and place.
Lifts are tightly enclosed spaces that
are not desirable for all people.
The use of indigenous artists and

craftspeople
would
ensure
authenticity
and
possible
recognition.
The use of indigenous artists and

craftspeople
would
ensure
authenticity
and
possible
recognition.
A system of mounds in yards

planted out with trees and bushes,
as well as solid barriers could be
used.
Physical Aspects of an Aboriginal Court

A.
Background
Flexibility is an important consideration when designing and creating an
Aboriginal Court. Currently, there are two different models that have been
applied in South Australia (SA) and New South Wales (NSW).
47
SECTION B
i.
ii.
B.
In SA, the court room designed to accommodate an Aboriginal court

is based on non-hierarchical principles, evidenced by a round table
that is fixed and chairs that are not fixed and can be moved around.
In NSW Aboriginal courts are held in the community in open spaces
under a tree or in community buildings.
Design Principles
In designing the physical aspects of an Aboriginal Court, the following must
be noted:
i.
Court Structure.
Where possible, the court room should be on the ground floor or
lower floors.
If possible an alternative to lifts should be considered, as some
Aboriginal people find them problematic and avoid using them.
Access to the outside should be provided through doors,
windows or walls that can be moved to enable access and
provide a connection to the external environment.
Entry and exit to a separate room that can be utilised by Elders
for deliberation.
In consultation with the Aboriginal community determine fixed
and non fixed furniture.
Allow for accommodation of Aboriginal people in avoidance
relationships in order to enable their participation in the court
process; without transgressing this relationship.
Design of room should enable usage by multiple users.
Technology should allow for Aboriginal people with hearing
problems to be able to follow court proceedings without difficulty.
Cultural themes should be considered when communicating the
authority and importance of the justice process.
Corridors adjacent to court should avoid bottleneck of people
attending court.
Multi entrances to court room should be considered.
5.6. References
The following reports are referenced as a source of supplementary information
only and do not form part of the Design Brief. The purpose of these reports is to
inform Consultants on some of the relevant cultural considerations, and they
should be read as supplemental information to the Design Brief (which has
primacy).
A.
CBD Court Complex Cultural Briefing Report; Barker and Spring, 2003.
B.
Wha tchew reckon, I reckon?! Paper by Grant Revell and Jill Milroy to the
CBD Courts Cultural Workshop, 25 August 2003.
C.
The Third Space Indigenous Communities Teaching Landscape, Revell
& Milroy 2001. In: Kerb Journal Issue 10. RMIT University, pp. 14-19.
D.
Nidja Goordandalup! Noonnookurt Nyinning Nyungar Boodjar: A Nyungar
Interpretive History of the Use of Boodjar (Country) in the Vicinity of the
University of Western Australia); Collard L. and Palmer D, 1998.
48
SECTION B
6.
Multicultural or Culturally and Linguistically Diverse (CALD) Brief

6.1
Introduction
Issues of diversity are never simple. Diversity is often defined by a broader set of
concerns that encompass areas such as ethnicity, gender, sexual orientation,
religious beliefs and experiences. Recent literature on multicultural issues and
architectural design suggest that while significant strides are being made to
include the needs of diverse ethnic groups the challenge is how to do this in
spaces and environments which are designed to cater for the needs of many.
6.2
Issues to be considered when designing and developing spaces for

multicultural or CALD customer groups:
A. Gender Within a public waiting area such as courts, are there break out spaces
which women or men can access if they wish to be separate.
B. Experiences For many CALD groups or individuals the law is synonymous with
oppression as they may have suffered under the auspices of the law in their country
of origin. Consequently people may view western courts with suspicion. CALD
groups or individuals attending courts may come from countries where they have
experienced torture, oppression and severe trauma. For these groups or individuals
having access to spaces that are non threatening, non-confining or closed in and
that have easy exits to the outside environment is essential.
C. Religious beliefs for groups that adhere to the Muslim faith which pray five times
throughout the day, having access to a private space where they can practice their
faith is important. This is particularly significant if the individual and their family who
are waiting to attend court have to wait all day before seeing the magistrate.
6.3
Objective of the Multi-cultural or CALD brief
The primary objective of the multi-cultural and CALD brief is the same as the Aboriginal
cultural brief which is, to ensure that multi-cultural or CALD groups feel safe, comfortable
and non-threatened when accessing the court environment.
49
SECTION C
C.
1.
Operational Needs of a Courthouse

Introduction
1.1.
Facilities Design Brief

This design brief specifies the generic requirements of a Courthouse. Depending
upon the demand for court services that is to be accommodated in the
Courthouse it could comprise of one the following models:
Type A
Court
Type B
Court
Type C
Court
i) Magistrates Court and Higher Court facilities;

ii) Magistrates Court and Higher Court facilities co-located with
a police station
Magistrates Court facilities only; or
Magistrates Court courtroom and related facilities as part of a
Police station.
For the purposes of this briefing document the Type A Court shall only refer
to a two courtroom courthouse (higher courtroom and magistrates
courtroom), a three courtroom courthouse (one higher courtroom and two
magistrates courtrooms), or a four courtroom courthouse (one or two higher
courtrooms and two or three magistrates courtrooms).
A Type A or B Court could also incorporate facilities for related criminal
justice services (e.g. Department of Corrective Services and/or Police
Department) such as exists in some metropolitan and regional centre
Courthouses.
Each of these models reflects differing operational
requirements, particularly in light of segregation of parties (e.g. judiciary, jury,
police, offenders etc) and core functions. In a Type B facility the jury function
is not applicable.
Subject to the location and purpose of the facility, there are additional
functional requirements that may need to be considered during planning in
order to accommodate future expansion. Such additions may include
courtroom accommodation for criminal jury trials and related functions, court
custodial facilities, mediation facilities and specialist courtroom attributes to
accommodate alternative court processes.
The project Brief shall address the current and future strategic planning
requirements in the overall master plan.
Type C Court is fully described under Section C 13.0.
1.2.
Conceptual Model of a Courthouse

A.
The following affinity model of a courthouse graphically illustrates the

organisational structure proposed within a Courthouse.
B.
The model divides vertically into a set of activities to which there should be
a check on the people and the effects they carry - a restricted zone.
Access into this restricted zone is via a primary security check point for
people, goods and materials. The checkpoint is strategically located at the
entrance of the courthouse.
50
SECTION C
The majority of future courthouses proposed in Western Australia,
particularly in metropolitan and larger regional centres anticipates this
future model. However, smaller complexes are unlikely to provide with this
level of security, with access control only being provided to nominated
areas as indicated on the affinity model diagram. Refer also section B.2.4
Security Philosophy.
C.
The model also divides horizontally between activities which are primarily
people accessed and the places where vehicle access is the predominate
mode of entry to the complex.
51
SECTION C
52
SECTION C
1.3.
Circulation Systems
Subject to the size and scope of the facility there may be a requirement for up to
six circulation systems in terms of the areas they serve and the principal
connections they are to make to the outside and within the building.
A.
Restricted Zone: General Circulation

i.
Beyond the Primary Security Checkpoint is the first system, the

Restricted Zone that contains all accommodation and separate
circulation pertaining to the discrete functional requirements of each
court user. Subject to the prescribed scope of the facility, the
Restricted Zone may contain:
ii.
B.
Registry and Courts Administration

Courtrooms
Mediation Facilities
Chambers
Judicial Library
Jury facilities
Court custody facilities (including secure loading/unloading)
Court security control facility
Secure judicial parking
Support service accommodation
Secure goods vehicle delivery/loading bay.
At the Primary Security Checkpoint, Court Users will be directed and

supervised as they enter the various parts of the restricted circulation
zone. In some cases, visitors may need to wait at the Primary
Security Checkpoint for an escort to their final destination.
Jury Panel and Member Circulation

The separation of empanelled jury members needs to be maintained at
all times from other participants of the court proceedings.
This includes entry to and exit from the Courthouse by a discrete means
to avoid the possibility of jury influence, intimidation or contamination.
This circulation system (Juries) needs to be a direct and secure system
capable of accommodating the number of jury panel members and
support staff prescribed in the particular facility. This circulation system
must connect the jury assembly area, with the jury lounge, courtrooms
and jury deliberation rooms.
C. Persons in Custody (PIC) Circulation

In the Magistrates Court, accused persons attending the court whilst on
bail will appear before the court directly from the public gallery or
adjacent public waiting space.
In a Higher Court (Supreme or District Court), accused persons
attending for court whilst on bail may be required to surrender into the
53
SECTION C
custody centre via the public realm prior to court commencing and
thereafter appear before the court directly from the court custody centre.
Whilst in custody they will move at all times in a separate, direct and
secure circulation system. During the trial when momentarily excused
from the courtroom, they need to be held adjacent to the courtroom in
secure areas during longer adjournments they will be returned to the
custody centre. The circulation system used for moving the PIC needs
to be separate from all others, with no intersections. Support staff and
goods and materials, necessary for the effective operation of the
service, such as food for PIC, will move within this system.
D. Judicial Circulation (Justices, Judges and Registrars)
This fourth circulation system should connect the secure parking to the
chambers and support functions of the Judiciary with the courtrooms
and the pre-trial conference and mediation rooms as well as the registry.
Only authorised administration staff will have access to this system in
addition to the judiciary. This system is also used to move case files
between the registry, the chambers area and the courtrooms.
E. Protected Witnesses
The fifth circulation system is necessitated out of the need at times to
move, with a high degree of secrecy, protected witnesses, into the
Courthouse and then to a particular courtroom. At these times, the
escorts will determine with the court manager and/or security staff, the
route to be used, and by temporal separation ensure that there is no
contact made with others. The witnesses will need to be held in a
segregated area while waiting to give evidence and throughout all
adjournments.
F. Victim Support Service (Child Witness and Adult Vulnerable Witness
Services)
The sixth circulation system is for child witnesses and adult witnesses
requiring special support. This system is to connect a discrete external
entry/exit point to the remote witness and related support
accommodation in the Courthouse. The circulation shall also have a
conveniently located internal entry/exit point from the public waiting
space outside the courtrooms.
G. Emergency Escape Stairs
It is preferred that the Judiciary, jurors and PIC circulation systems have
their own escape stairs and routes. It is acceptable for the Judiciary to
share escape stairs with jurors but not the public or PIC. Victims and
witnesses in the care of VSS can use public escape routes on a
managed basis.
H. Janitorial and Maintenance Circulation
The integrity of the various circulation systems is to be assured at all
times if used for janitorial and maintenance services.
54
SECTION C
1.4.
2.
Access Controls
A.
In addition to the need to separate the movement of various parties to trials

and hearings the security systems will require some degree of control on
entry into various parts of the Courthouse. The controls will range from
hard key locks to proximity card access control and people access control.
For each of these, technology can be used in support of the people aspects
of entry control. The first level by control on who has keys, and use of nonreproducible keys; the second level by cards which can be easily reassigned, and the third level by some form of ensuring that the person
seeking entry or release from an area is the person purported to be. The
Court Security Directorate is presently working towards achieving a
standard biometric control (via iris scan) to achieve this. This latter
requirement is particularly relevant to after-hours access and also to highsecurity areas. Provision of an access control system that is compatible
with systems in other courthouses is highly desirable as would be the
capability to link locations into one access control network.
B.
On occasions there will be the need to introduce additional access control

to some parts of an operational area, say a particular courtroom. At all
times there will be the need to not only allow Authorised Persons access
out of hours but to also account for where they go within the Courthouse.
Public Realm
2.1.
Overview
Within a Courthouse there are particular requirements of the general

circulation systems, by which people should be able to move easily.
This has been called the public realm and extends to the entrances
and reception points of the various components, and contains all the
support services and spaces available to people involved in cases
and hearings, except those who are in custody or part of a jury.
Within its limits, should be located all the general public amenities
such as vending machine areas.
It is important that, despite the need for a Primary Security
Checkpoint, people passing through maintain a sense of open
access to most of the building within this realm.
This includes access to amenities and beverages/snacks near a
courtroom or hearing rooms, and possibly to a courtyard(s) or
balcony(ies) in the Restricted Zone.
The public realm includes the circulation area, serving the courtrooms
and mediation facilities, and will be used as meeting and waiting
places by case participants, in addition to the actual rooms provided
for this purpose.
2.2. Design Criteria (Operational & Planning Principles)

A.
Ambience
The perceived ambience of the Courthouse relates to the need to
ensure that the occasional users are not intimidated or daunted by the
prospect of their involvement in a case.
i.
This user-friendly ambience should start during the approach to the
Courthouse, at entry and during the security checking process, as
well as while within all publicly accessible parts of it.
55
SECTION C
ii.
2.3.
A high degree of visual transparency from outside to inside shall be

provided with natural controlled daylight to be optimised. External
view opportunities shall be maximised.
B.
Orientation
At a central place, or foyer, it should be possible for one to gain a
sense of the order and organisation of the Courthouse. This includes a
sense of the presence and location of the courtrooms. It should be
quite clear where the registry is located, and the route to take to the
courtrooms and mediation rooms. Similarly, the location of support
services and amenities should be quite clear, or easily perceived. This
is required to be a generous space in terms of volume and the interior
design shall respond to the requirement of reflecting the distinction and
formality of the Court.
C.
Persons with Disabilities

It is mandatory that persons with permanent and temporary physical
disabilities are able to approach, enter, orient and proceed from the
same direction as the able users participating in any role or
circumstance applicable in the court process.
D.
Tour Groups
Tour groups, which could be up to a school class size of 30-40
including teachers and other escorts will use this area. These groups
will tend to move more in a line, which could extend some distance.
They will also cluster around the guide during information giving
moments. This latter characteristic should be especially designed so
that it does not interrupt the flow of people through the area.
Accommodation Requirements
A.
Security and Safety Provisions

i.
A Primary Security Checkpoint (which may be required to include
scanning systems) shall be able to be provided at either the main
entrance of the building or at a point after the registry hall. A second
layer of security provision shall be able to be provided at the entrance
of the courtroom(s) if required. Notwithstanding the capability to
locate security at either the front entrance or after the registries, given
the requirement for openness and accessibility the preferred location
for security control is after the registries.
ii.
Given the requirement to maintain a sense of openness and
accessibility within the public realm it is required that maximum
innovation in respect to incorporating passive, engineered and manpower solutions which reduce the overt presence of security
measures incorporated at the entrance of the building. The location
and integration of scanning equipment etc shall be well resolved
within the overall scope of interior design proposals.
iii.
Safety and/or security incidents (including self-harm) have the
potential to close down all or part of a Courthouse. The appropriate
treatment of all edges (internal and external) such as balconies and
open stairs is necessary to ensure that safety for all Court Users is
maintained throughout the public realm.
56
SECTION C
B.
Information Counter
An information counter shall be provided to facilitate way-finding and
general enquiry service and may in some circumstances be
incorporated into the planning and design of the court registry. This
counter shall be sized to accommodate assessed demand.
C.
Announcements
Within the foyer there should be display of the trials and hearings for the
day and the courtrooms and mediation rooms in which they will occur.
The location of the display(s) should be easy to find, able to be seen by
a number of people, and not located where its use would interrupt the
flows of people moving in and out. (Refer to Section E. Information
Services and Directional Signage).
D.
Waiting and Meeting

A regular pattern of use will be that people involved in the same matter
will agree to meet at the Courthouse. The foyer area is one place where
this will occur. The location of this arrivals/orientation area shall be after
the Primary Security Checkpoint. The layout of the area should be such
that there are places in which people can wait, be seen by others, but
not interrupt the flow of people moving directly to and from their
destinations. Many find it easier to wait and greet outside the entrance,
this is particularly so for indigenous people.
E.
Media
i.
Requirements for the media shall be restricted to secure storage for
camera gear.
ii.
The tradition of courthouse steps interviews will certainly continue
and the design of the Courthouse entry needs to be such that a group
of journalists and camera crews cannot block the main entry to the
Courthouse.
F.
Public Amenities
i.
Public support facilities include food and drink vending machines,
coffee cart, cold water drinking fountains, toilets, parenting room, play
space for children and access to the outdoors, possibly in a number
of places, or if in a single place, in a way that it is seen as readily
available from all parts of the public realm.
ii.
Toilets shall be provided for the public having regard to peak demand
prior to and at the conclusion of court sittings, and shall be located
such that they are reasonably accessible to the public in terms of
travel distances.
G.
Beverage Facilities
A coffee cart or automatic vending facilities shall be provided to service
both Court Users and general public as long as security provisions are
not compromised. The provision of this facility is encouraged as a
meeting place and relaxing environment prior to entering the secure
court environment as well as servicing the needs of the buildings users
and public generally. The spatial and servicing requirements shall be
met only with equipment to be provided by the courts.
57
SECTION C
H.
Parenting / First Aid Room

i.
The parenting / first aid room should be located within the Courthouse
foyer and be accessible for ambulance staff with a stretcher. It is to
service staff, jurors and public and shall also be co-located with an
accessible toilet facility which shall include baby change facilities.
ii.
The room itself is to accommodate a sink and two lounge chairs.
iii.
As most users of this room will only be there for short duration (one
hour maximum), natural light is not required, but preferred.
I.
Childrens Area
i.
The childrens area is for Court Users who have young children. It is
designed for short-stay duration and as such, facilities are simple.
Supervision will be by parents.
ii.
This area could be best located as a discrete area with casual
observation off the main public waiting area outside the courtrooms.
A parenting room and a set of public toilets should be located nearby.
J.
Outdoor Areas
i.
An outdoor area shall be provided for building users with fixed
seating.
ii.
This area would be best located adjacent to the main entry.
iii.
The area should preferably incorporate some natural landscaping and
be large enough to cater for a high volume of building users especially at peak times such as lunch.
iv.
The design must allow for seasonal change so as to be inviting all
year round. A degree of sun, rain and wind shelter will be required.
v.
In addition access to the outdoors shall be provided within the
Restricted Zone to satisfy the need for participants in the court
process to experience natural ventilation and have access and the
opportunity to relieve stress. Any use of a balcony or terrace, to
satisfy the requirements for access to the outdoors is to ensure that
all users are safe, and that contraband and unauthorised persons
cannot enter the building via this space.
vi.
An outdoor area for staff and judiciary shall also be provided in such a
location as to afford privacy and security with direct access to the
area from an immediately adjacent internal amenity area.
58
SECTION C
3.
Administration
3.1.
Functional Group
C.3.2
C.3.3
C.3.4
Registries and Courts

Administration
Sheriffs Office
Courts Recording Service
C.3.5
C.3.6
C.3.7
Records and Stores

Exhibits)
Training and Education
Staff Amenities
(incl.
3.2. Registries and Courts Administration

A.
Overview
i.
The court registry has traditionally been the main point of contact
between the court and the community, the legal profession and
persons directly and indirectly involved in matters before the court.
ii.
The Clerk of the Court and court officers manage and coordinate the
non-judicial functions of the court, and provides administrative and
secretarial support to the judiciary.
iii.
The responsibilities of court officers include the administration and
management
of
human
resources,
financial
services,
accommodation, information technology, court recording, security and
safety, the registries and support for all participants involved in
matters before the court. The Clerk of the Court also manages the
work of other Government agencies and assists volunteer groups
providing services in the Courthouse, and manages work and
performance of contractors.
iv.
The court provides internet based, hard copy and telephone enquiry
information and advisory services, through kiosk facilities. The
59
SECTION C
v.
number of facilities will be dependant upon the size of the Courthouse

and generally are located in the court registry.
Magistrates Court Registry.
Functional Description
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
The registry will provide administrative support to the

Magistrates Court and circuiting courts (e.g. District and
Supreme Court) where the building provides for Higher Court
facilities. The administrative support to the Courts includes
provision of information, documentation preparation and
lodgement, storage and retrieval of materials before the Courts,
scheduling of cases into mediation rooms and courtrooms,
preparation of case files, storage of records and exhibits and
collection of fees and charges.
The registry will continue to be the place of most frequent
contact by the community, and therefore function as a major
information centre and be a guide to the use of the Courthouse.
The registry will be based primarily around Magistrates Court
operations but needs to incorporate where necessary the
additional support functions associated with the Higher Courts
(e.g. jury management).
Larger Magistrates Court registries are organised into two
service components these being customer services and listings
and judicial support.
Court administration and business
administration related functions are primarily performed by the
Clerk of the Court and/or the Registry Manager depending upon
the staffing structure. These service components administer
civil and criminal registry and listings functions, liquor licensing
court functions and administrative/corporate support. Some
locations will also provide jury services, coroners court services
and other Government agency services.
Generally, growth in staff numbers is not directly proportional to
case load increases. However, provision for growth over time is
essential to ensure the longevity of the facility and provide
flexibility for potential changes in use. Allow 15% for growth in
workstations.
Design Criteria (Operational & Planning Principles)

i.
Generally
a.
b.
c.
Spatial qualities and views out are to produce a relaxing

environment in the waiting, counter and work areas for staff and
customers. This amenity shall be consistently provided in all
office environments throughout the Courthouse.
Staff amenities such as toilets and tearooms within staff work
areas shall be provided to a level that satisfies the local
population demand.
Administration, including court management, staff training
(possible reciprocal use of jury empanelling area) and
amenities, and the central core of registry to be on the one
level.
60
SECTION C
d.
e.
ii.
The registry location is to allow access by court staff in the

evenings and on weekends as and when required to meet work
demands and extended court sittings.
As a place where some customers will be uncertain, anxious
and at times shocked and even angry, the ambience and
atmosphere should be friendly, business-like, but not
oppressive, nor restrictive.
Registry Hall
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
The registry will be accessed from the Courthouses public

foyer and able to be separately secured. The registry will
comprise a public counter area with customer services staff
work areas behind, contiguous or in proximity with other staff
and functions of the court registry, including records and
storage spaces.
Growth space in all aspects of administration is best located
with the functional area.
The registry will include the interview and support spaces for
the interface between the community and the courts, as well as
waiting and file/material preparation counters.
A queuing system is to be installed.
The court registry must be identified as a distinct space with
public counters. Back office work areas shall be screened from
the counter area. The counters should be readily accessible
from the waiting area, and have their own queuing lines at busy
times.
The waiting area to the counters and required adjacent
interview room is to be generous, with more than standing room
in a queue. There should be self-help electronic information
kiosks, pamphlet racks and display boards, as well as
counter/table space for completing forms and other materials as
well as places for e-lodgement and touch screen inquiries.
The counter area shall include ergonomic workstations at the
counter planned for all interface functions, including payment of
money.
All workstations shall be stand-up type for customers with the
exception of a disabled access position. Workstations from the
public side shall be wide enough for more than one person, and
for people with children.
At the counter is to be provision for the temporary holding of
lodged materials pending moving to the work areas for filing,
and for the storage of supplies and handout materials.
Staff safety shall be ensured by a variety of means, but
principally by the design of counters, the provision of duress
alarms and strict control of who is allowed to enter the work
areas, beyond waiting areas and the reception counter. The
design shall incorporate the Departments current standard
applicable to counter security screening (detailed separately).
There shall be controlled access between the public and staff
areas of the court registry.
A resource alcove within the registry waiting area providing
computer based access to court documents, court process
information, internet, document production/word processing,
predominantly used by self-represented-litigants but available to
61
SECTION C
m.
iii.
Staff Office Work Areas

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
iv.
the general public and counsel. Within the resource alcove

users shall also have the ability to listen to and read court
transcripts and access photocopy services. An aspect from this
space to the registry counter is required for supervision by
counter staff.
Interview Room: An Interview Room shall be provided adjacent
to the registry counter with secure access into both the
Administration area and public waiting area. This space shall
be multipurpose fulfilling also the requirement for document
inspection albeit its primary function is for confidential
interviews. Accordingly surveillance into this area will be
required at times dictating the need for discrete observation by
court staff from the Administration area.
While the function of exhibit management will be undertaken in

the general work area of registries, the actual storage of
exhibits need not be. (see Storage below).
Court management is a function that can expect to change in its
processes and workload patterns over time. Therefore, the
spaces allocated to administration and registries should be
capable of ready re-configuration and expansion or contraction.
Functional area provided for staff (refer C.11. Schedule of
Accommodation) is nett space exclusive of circulation and
general storage area.
The general staff work area is to ensure adequate provisions for
paper waste management; storage of stationary and filing
materials; preparation of case files for trials and hearings
including photocopying/printing and collation; trolleys and push
carts for moving files to judicial and courtroom areas, and,
space for the annual file-culling processes.
The open planned area must be appropriately laid out and
furnished to provide a pleasant atmosphere and must permit
frequent and therefore direct movement of staff between desk
and counter positions.
The Courts staff work areas within the registry shall consist of
clusters of workstations in an open plan environment, clearly
visible and accessible to the relevant managers office (Clerk of
Courts). Accommodation provision should be in accordance
with Department standards refer Schedule of Accommodation
C.11.
A private room shall be provided adjacent to the work area in
the registry to allow for telephone calls to be made or interviews
to be conducted with staff in privacy. This functionality is
overseen within the registry interview room and therefore shall
be adjacent to the staff area.
Storage
a.
Courts are required by statute to keep court documentation for

lengthy periods of time. Every day business of the courts
requires access to a considerable number of forms and notices
for which suitable storage must be provided.
62
SECTION C
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
The registry will be a major generator of hard copy material

needed to be stored.
To maximise the use of space for storing current records in
offices and to eliminate the need for large short-term storage
areas compactus units shall be supplied and installed to fit the
nominated areas specified in the Schedule of Accommodation
(C.11).
Cash and monetary forms resulting from fines, fees or bail
processing, require appropriate security, in addition to data
generated by administration staff on caseloads, scheduling
information, budgeting, accounting and statistical analysis.
Storage of these items should all be contained within a secure
environment. Storage for cash and monetary forms shall be
provided by way of a safe located within a larger secure
storage/strong room the remainder of which may be used for
storing the other items mentioned.
The registry has overall responsibility for the safe custody of
exhibits and subpoenaed documents from trial or hearing until
disposal. The accommodation for exhibits storage need not be
planned as part of the registry space. It must however have
controlled access and contain a safe in addition to shelving and
lockable cupboards.
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location & Relationships)

The staff estimates scheduled in C.11. Schedule of Accommodation
shall be used for accommodation planning purposes.
The figures do not include any security presence that may be provided
by way of contracted services. This needs to be considered in light of
the circumstances that are likely to vary between locations.
i.
Provisions
Registry Hall:
a.
A common registry hall catering for the court registry
(incorporating other functions such as jury enquiries, interface
with the public and legal profession).
b.
These places are to be equally accessible for the disabled and
those with young children and perambulators/strollers.
ii.
Registry/Office Areas
a.
Enclosed office Clerk of the Court.
b.
Open planned offices Staff work stations.
c.
Public counter Permanent workstation/positions that provide
an ergonomic workplace using standard office furniture. A
raised floor is required to achieve the best outcome for staff
customer relations and ergonomics. Counter detail shall be as
per Section B 2.3 Furniture.
d.
Utility room To accommodate networked printers, facsimile,
photocopier, stationery storage, recycling bins and shredders.
e.
Strong room and safe storage Used to secure valuables and
daily cash takings shall be located directly adjacent to registry
counters but visually discrete from the public area. Safe
storage for cash and lockable cupboard storage for accountable
forms shall be provided in this location.
63
SECTION C
iii.
Location
a.
The Court registry should be easily identifiable and accessible
from both inside and outside the Restricted Zone.
b.
The Courts administration should be readily accessible to and
from the judicial and courtroom areas, by the restricted Judicial
Officer's circulation system. Access into this system is to be
controlled and limited to authorised persons.
iv.
3.3.
Potential for Change

The activities contained within the administrative component are
likely to change substantially in the future. It is important,
therefore, that the design of the administrative facilities provide a
high degree of adaptability to change.
Jury Management
A.
Overview
i.
B.
The administrative functions of jury management are incorporated

into the general registry functions in regional Court locations where
Higher Courts circuit to conduct jury trials. Such functions include
jury summons management, preparation and planning, responding to
local juror enquiries including claims for reimbursement of loss of
wages and excusal from jury service.

i.
ii.
Generally
a.
The jury management function is principally an office and

administrative environment that supports the jury process and
requires public interface for dealing with public that have been
summoned to attend for jury duty.
b.
There is a requirement for access between the court registry

and the area that is designated for the purpose of jury
assembly. It would also be desirable for this entire area to be
co-located with or adjacent to the Court registry in order to
share common requirements relating to storage, office support,
amenities, meeting rooms, video conference and training
facilities should that be achievable.
Registry
The public interface for jury management will occur at the entry point
to the jury assembly area and/or the court registry, depending upon
the reason for attending the court (enquiry or actual jury service).
The Schedule of Accommodation assumes a Magistrates Court
officer, located in the registry, performs the jury enquiry function. A
casual jury officer is employed as required to directly manage the jury
and shall work out of the court registry when not in court.
iii.
Storage
64
SECTION C
Storage of jury related documentation will be stored with the Court
records and general stores.
iv.

Refer to C.11 Schedule of Accommodation for provisions and related
comments.
v.

Provision will need to be made within the initial space allocation or
adjacent space reconfigured to accommodate growth in the number
of judges or courts predicted for future incorporation within the
proposed courthouse.
3.4.
Court Recording Service Areas

A.
Overview
The recording and transcription of all trials and hearings held within the
courthouse is necessary, including those court proceedings that are
conducted in mediation/conference rooms where these are provided.
B.

i.
ii.
3.5.
Provision of accommodation within the Courthouse is necessary to

house all systems/equipment to record and provide access to the
court to all court recordings.
As for other IT networks, the floor cupboards (as required) cannot
be cupboards opening onto corridors and other spaces. They shall
be rooms, large enough so that the normal and regular maintenance,
operating and repair work can be conducted inside. The rooms shall
be secured from unauthorised entry.
Records and Stores (Including Exhibits)

A.
Overview
i.
The court registry is a major generator of case records and files, is a
major consumer of stationery, a large user of technology, and, a
major producer of hard copy files. In addition, the registry receives
payments for fines and is responsible for the holding of exhibits and in
some cases they are held for lengthy periods of time.
ii.
The case files and records making and keeping generate three types
of needs. The primary or current files and records need to be on the
floor associated with the office staff. The secondary files and records,
are in effect semi-active, and need to be readily retrievable but can be
somewhat remote from the registry.
Tertiary files and records are
those retained for the statutory holding period and are occasionally
retrieved and therefore located off site. Tertiary storage is therefore
excluded from this Design Brief. It is preferable that Secondary
Storage and the Clerk of the Court are located close to the Registry.
However, where floor space in Registry is not available, storage
areas can be located on an adjacent floor.
65
SECTION C
B.
iii.
Where primary and secondary storage is physically separated

(vertically or horizontally) there shall be minimal travel distance
between the two. The movement of files by trolley must be possible
and vertical transportation systems shall ensure minimum loading and
unloading of trolleys between locations. Use of stairs to facilitate file
movement is not acceptable.
iv.
Hard copy records and case files will continue to be a pattern of work
practice in the Courts. Old records, not electronically stored, will be
part of case files. Therefore, the judiciary will continue to need hard
copy files. These can be considerable in number and may need
trolleys to move them between chambers and courtrooms.
v.
Exhibits for trials and hearings are the responsibility of respective

counsel until entered into the trial or hearing and then they become
the responsibility of the Court.
Additionally exhibits may be
subpoenaed directly by the court prior to trial. During the trial the
responsibility for their safekeeping is with the associate or judicial
support officer, and after the trial pending lodgement of an appeal,
and if lodged until the appeal process is complete, they remain the
responsibility of the registry. If an appeal is not lodged they are
returned to counsel or the relevant party.
Design Criteria (Operational Planning & Principles)

i.
Security of records and documents is to be provided on a localised,
as needs basis for physically held materials.
ii.
Separate storage is required for financial records, exhibits, stationery,
forms and records.
iii.
The primary and secondary files areas will be divided into criminal
and civil to match the criminal/civil split in registry and listing functions
as well as court processes.
iv.
All case files and records space needs are in addition to the registry
office space planning needs briefed within this section.
v.
All court documents are extremely valuable and need to be held
secure from unauthorised access and tampering and protected from
damage, while in use, in transit within the Courthouse, and while
stored.
vi.
Storage needs of the courtrooms need to be given special attention
e.g. the number of magistrate/judge chairs needed for a tribunal panel
(usually three) or justice of the peace (usually two) sittings. Extra
demands arising from multiple accused persons (including dock
guards), as well as the accommodation for counsel (prosecution and
defence), media etc.
vii. Storage for parties involved in civil cases should be available within
the courtroom areas for the duration of the trial and generally is
greater than the need within criminal courtrooms. For extent refer to
Furniture provisions Section B 2.3.
viii. On each court level of the building, there shall be a storage area for
equipment and furniture, such as additional chairs for
magistrates/judges, translators and security officers. It is to be readily
accessible by court staff when needed.
66
SECTION C
C.
Accommodation Requirements
i.
Provisions - Records
The full extent of the floor area of the registry staff work area is to be
capable of accommodating compactus file cabinets to allow for reconfiguration of layouts.
In addition to the area for records and files, and adjacent to them,
there is to be space for working on and maintaining the files, including
during culling periods, and space for holding files trolleys. The work
space shall be an alcove, or permanent bench or pull out workstation
surface with the shelving system.
There is to be a reproduction centre for preparing case files for trials,
and to answer customer requests for hardcopy. Reproduction will be
done by photocopying, printing from e-files, and involve collating and
binding. Allow for recycling bins. This reproduction centre could
provide the photocopying needed for primary storage and shall be
collocated within the utility area.
The reproduction centre should be in the primary files area and be
equally accessible from both the counter and staff open office areas.
Stationery and equipment stores could be with either the primary or
secondary records file areas.
All records and case files, as well as the major reproduction centre
should be in areas where access can be limited to only authorised
persons.
The records and files storage areas connected to the registry shall be
accessible to the judicial officers support staff and to the courtrooms
using the judicial officers secure circulation.
ii.
Provisions - Exhibits
a.
There will be no provisions for counsel to store exhibits before
entering them into a trial (except by prior arrangement in
exceptional circumstances, in which case the Courts secure
storage room would be utilised). On the trial day they can be
stored in the respective counsels day space (allocated
interview room).
b.
After entry into the trial the exhibits shall be stored in either the
courtroom, within special storage cupboards in the judicial
circulation system, or in a shared special storage area in the
judiciarys chambers areas. See section C.4. Trials and C.9.
Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences for provisions in the
courtrooms.
c.
A central secure storage area will hold exhibits associated with
hearings and trials. Exhibits will also be held during the time
involved in lodging an appeal as well as items too large to be
held in the other places during a trial.
d.
The exhibits are to be protected from deterioration & damage
while being stored.
e.
The central exhibit storage area is to be fitted out with a range
of storage modes.
f.
Within the exhibits storage area there needs to be a place for
staff to assemble exhibits whilst storing them or retrieving them
67
SECTION C
ii.
iii.
3.6.
3.7.
from storage. The area should also include space for trolleys
used to move the items to and from courtrooms.
Provisions - Exhibits
Growth in files and records will be accommodated in a number
of ways including increased electronic file storage and
progressive introduction of compactus and conversion of
existing space.
Training and Education

A.
Overview
i.
Staff training is a growing and continuing aspect of providing
improved justice services to the State of Western Australia. The
reform agendas will require new skills and awareness and court
support services (not accommodated within) will increase its offerings
to consumers and the general public in justice matters. These
offerings are likely to include regular sessions for self represented
accused and litigants, counselling and advisory programs for victims
and their families, briefing sessions with community agencies and
generally adding a pro-active stance to the delivery of justice
services.
ii.
Training programs will be offered to all DOJ staff, including people
from other associated agencies. New technologies and information
systems will require up-skilling, new programs and services will need
to be integrated into day to day practice and new Judicial Officers and
staff will need to be introduced to systems and operations.
B.

i.
Videoconference equipment connections shall be provided as
detailed elsewhere in this Design Brief.
ii.
Generally, all meeting type spaces, including courtrooms and jury
accommodation, are to be available for use for training and education
offerings, when available and if compatible with the primary use of the
subject space and its immediate surroundings.
iii.
The jury assembly area need extended hours accessibility in the
event of after hour access for training and education purposes.
iv.
All areas nominated for and equipped for training and education shall
have adjoining access to toilets and beverage points.
Staff Amenities
A.
Overview
i.
When court staff or contracted service staff are required to be in
secure or separate zones, (e.g. with a sequestered jury or during
meal times) they will have the opportunity to have the same meals as
their charges, and/or managed access to the kitchenette/meals area
(lunchroom), and toilets.
ii.
All staff shall have access to unisex shower and change facilities.
iii.
A staff amenity centre or lunch room/lounge is to be part of the court
staff area, and to have access to the outdoors, via a safe and secure
balcony or courtyard.
iv.
Bicycle end-of-trip storage shall be provided within the building
within a secure enclosure at ground level and have a capacity to store
the appropriate number of bicycles for the number of occupants.
68
SECTION C
v.
B.
C.
The provision of staff amenities does not reduce the need for tea
points in work areas and in support of meeting and conference
rooms, and for volunteer groups providing participant support
services (refer C.11. Schedule of Accommodation).
i.
The lunchroom shall have basic kitchen facilities to heat and
refrigerate food, sink and dishwasher and bench tops and cupboards
to prepare lunches and store supplies, respectively.
ii.
Adequate space and capacity is needed for honour-based systems of
storage of personal supplies.
i.
Provisions
a.
Ablutions
1. Judicial Areas
Refer C.6
2. Court Staff
Toilet provisions shall be separate to public amenities
and be co-located with staff amenities and work
areas. Numbers of facilities shall be calculated in
accordance to the BCA, relative to population
numbers.
A unisex shower and change space shall be colocated with the staff toilets and where possible the
bicycle storage area and provision shall be one unisex
shower. Provide half height lockers, clothes hooks
and wall bench seating within change space.
Numbers of lockers are as identified in C.11.
Schedule of Accommodation.
ii.
Lunch Room
a.
Judicial areas
Judicial officers use a common kitchenette provided in
the chambers area.
Associates, secretaries and ushers use staff area
provided for court staff generally.
b.
Other Areas
Shared accommodation for jury management and
court staff.
c.
Custody Centre
Separate facilities within the Restricted Zone.
d.
Jury assembly area
Use provisions for jury pool in the assembly area.
Sequestered jurors have lunch in the jury deliberation
room(s).
e.
Jury Officers
Use shared court staff facilities.
69
SECTION C
4.
Trials
4.1.
Overview of the Component

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.2.
The scope of trial work and hearings to be accommodated in the

courtrooms is primarily designed to suit the requirements of:
District Court criminal and civil proceedings
Magistrates Court criminal and civil proceedings (including
childrens, coroners and wardens)
Supreme Court criminal trials
Family Court proceedings
State Administrative Tribunal
Courtrooms may also be used by the State for special purposes such as
royal commissions.
Higher Courtrooms are required to be fitted out for criminal trial work with
Juries. Civil trial work can be conducted in both Higher Courts or
Magistrates Courts. Higher Courts can be utilised for Magistrate Court
proceedings. Pre-trial matters will be dealt with in pre-trial conference and
meeting room accommodation.
A high risk courtroom suite shall be available to all courts, including the
Supreme Court of Appeal (Criminal).

A.
Courtrooms
i.
Principles of Courtroom Layouts
a.
Not all courtrooms need to be laid out the same way; at a
minimum satisfy the following criteria/ principles. Magistrates
Courts have no requirement however for Jury facilities which
apply only to the Higher Court layout.
70
SECTION C
Courtroom layouts shall reflect the appropriate level of respect for the
law and courts representatives, the dignity of all participants and
processes, and the degree of architectural formality appropriate to the
formality of the proceedings (including courtroom crests, fixtures and
fittings).
The courtrooms shall be planned to allow for clear lines of sight for all
court participants, between each other, and screens and display
boards.
The judge/magistrate should have good sightlines to all courtroom
participants. Preferably within the 60o cone of vision from the centre,
with the ability to observe the demeanour of the witness and person
in the dock.
The sightlines should allow primary participants to overview the
proceedings within a 600 cone of vision from centre. If a public
seating gallery is provided, the upper seating needs to see the bench,
the jury, the witness and the prosecutors.
The eye levels of all participants, including the standing, are to be
below those of the seated judiciary.
Participants should be adequately separated, physically and
psychologically while still allowing for visual and audible connections.
The jury box is to one side of the courtroom with good sightlines to
the witness and custody dock. The jury must see both the witness
and PICs face even when counsel is standing to address the court.
The proximity of the jury box to the public gallery must minimise
silent intimidation.
Separation of jury box from counsel bar tables to ensure discrete
conversations between defence and prosecution counsel is not
overheard, nor notes be read.
The custody dock can be opposite the jury box or at the rear of
counsel, but must be in front of the public gallery.
The prosecuting counsel sit on the jury side of the court and the
defence counsel on the custody dock side.
The proximity of the dock to the defence counsel should allow low
whisper communication and the discrete passing of notes.
The witness box is to be between the judicial bench and jury box. It
cannot be on the same side of the court as the custody dock.
The path to the witness box must not pass the custody dock, nor
across the front of the counsel table.
Both Jury and accused to have a clear view of the witness.
It is preferable that the witness enters the courtroom in front of the
public gallery.
The associate and usher may sit at the same bench in front of a
judge. The judicial support officer will generally be the only court
officer to sit in front of the magistrate
The counsel tables will retain WA practice of all counsel facing the
bench. The counsel support table may be divided into two.
Papers held by counsel and jurors should not be visible by others,
including the press and public.
An area should be allowed adjacent to counsel tables for trolley
storage.
Press seating tablet arms on chairs and tables in lieu of fixed
benches behind the rear counsel table are acceptable.
Courtrooms should be capable of completely separate waiting areas
and public entrances to separate the parties associated with the
71
SECTION C
ii.
different sides of the matter before the court. Consideration to be

given to larger courtrooms having two entrances.
Technologies and equipment required in courtrooms shall be visually
integrated and not obstruct sightlines.
The courtroom layout shall include in-court storage and distribution of
services cabling cupboards. All cupboards shall be lockable to
ensure that no unauthorised access is available. The spaces shall
provide for the concealment of whiteboards, pin-up boards, projector /
slide screens etc., that may be used during a specific trial.
The above principles can be manifested in a variety of courtroom
models. Note that circular or in-the-round courtrooms are not
acceptable in Higher Courts.
Additional Functional Requirements
a.
Adjustment to higher courtroom layouts to increase numbers of
various participants shall be possible on a temporary basis
without the need for sophisticated equipment, skills or trades.
b.
Waiting space for adjournments for all participants is permitted

to be shared with other courtrooms, however, they must be
near the courtroom the participant is using.
c.
Secure, fire rated storage for the judiciary and court staff is
required for exhibits and materials being used in a trial or
hearing. The system is to include provision in each courtroom
and in the judicial circulation, near to courtrooms. For long
adjournments storage provisions are to be such that the
courtroom can be used for other matters.
d.
Access to and from, and movement within the courtroom needs

to meet the intent of anti-discrimination laws, in that, ready
access shall be provided for able-bodied people and those with
disabilities alike. The precedence exists for the use of mobile
step ramps for the access to the witness box and custody dock,
if these elements are one step above the litigation floor. The
use of such mobile ramps is acceptable.
e.
In criminal courtrooms public galleries should be capable of

holding the jury panels (refer to Table 1 below), the press and
some general public. Some perimeter benching shall be
allowed to accommodate panels.
f.
In at least one higher courtroom it shall be possible to isolate

physically, some or all accused persons in the dock while still
allowing visual and audible connections. This ability is not to
interrupt the normal workings of the courtroom at all other times
and shall be achieved with readily fitted screens or similar.
g.
The furniture for all participants in courtrooms should be

ergonomically designed and of a quality that appropriately
reflects the dignity of the court. It shall provide a high level of
comfort and functionality as participants may be involved in
protracted proceedings.
Note: Refer to Appendix 2 Courtroom Analysis Report for further

elaboration on courtroom layout principles.
72
SECTION C
4.3.
Accommodation Requirements (Provision, Location & Relationship)

A.
Provisions
Table 1 - Courtroom Numbers and Types

Courtroom
No. Bench Jury Counsel P.I.C
Public
Press
(min)
Comments
CRIMINAL
Higher Courtroom
Magistrates Large
Courtroom
18
10
55**
38
**paired pool + 12
public
Notes: 1. Custody docks to include 2 nos. seating positions for guard, extra
over numbers specified above.
B.
Location
i.
All courtrooms are to be located beyond the Primary Security
Checkpoint and be capable of having a temporary secondary security
check carried out prior to entering the courtroom.
ii.
The critical mass of courtrooms shall be on the ground floor of the
building connected to the entrance foyer by stairs as well as lifts.
Circulation systems and routes shall be designed to meet peak
demand in the early morning and around lunch adjournments.
iii.
Consideration shall be given to ease of accessibility to public waiting,
interview rooms and public amenities when a court is at peak demand
or access is restricted due to security and/or safety precautions.
iv.
Access to an outdoor area within the secure area shall be provided.
This area shall be located to enable easy access from most
courtrooms and not allow the security regime within the building to be
compromised (e.g. avoids the possibility of weapons transfer from
street or non-secure area).
v.
The close proximity of courtrooms to the office, interview and remote
witness room spaces used by support programs is required. Refer to
Trials and Hearings Support under Section C.7.
C.
Relationships
The following courtroom relationship diagrams indicate support functions
and facilities that directly influence planning issues.
73
SECTION C
Figure 1 Typical Higher Court Courtroom
Functional and Relationship Diagram
74
SECTION C
Figure 2 Typical Magistrates Courtroom
Functional and Relationship Diagram
75
SECTION C
D.

i.
Layouts, fittings and furnishings within courtrooms are to facilitate
easy upgrading and change in technology. Such upgrading is to be
achieved with the minimum amount of lost courtroom time.
ii.
4.4.
The effecting of any internal courtroom changes will need to be done

with no interruptions, acoustically and operationally to adjacent
courtrooms and their support functions.
Specific Courtroom Elements

The design of joinery elements in the courtroom must achieve the appropriate
ambience and functional requirements necessary for the administration of justice
as well as reflect the equality of all participants
A.
B.
Judges/Magistrates Bench
i.
The judge/magistrate is the communitys symbol of the justice
system. The position must therefore impart an appropriate sense of
dignity and symbolism of the state and the people of Western
Australia.
ii.
The judge/magistrate position is the focal point of the courtroom and
its design should reflect the status of the judicial role in the chosen
setting.
iii.
The judge/magistrate bench shall have a solid front face to court
participants, and screening of papers and materials on the bench.
iv.
The judge/magistrate bench shall be designed to provide a set of
drawers for stationery, forms, files etc. The bench is to allow for the
temporary storage and layout of reference books, documents etc.
The bench layout should allow for a case file and records trolley(ies)
to be positioned to one side of the judge/magistrate. Note: For
tribunal hearings each member may have papers and references that
need to be accommodated.
v.
Each judge/magistrate will use a computer and its location and
screen should not interfere with their view of the courtroom
proceedings, nor of fellow tribunal members on a hearing bench. The
placement and integration of other technology shall also meet this
criterion.
Associates/Judicial Support Officers Bench
i.
Traditionally in Western Australian courts, only the associate or
judicial support officer sits at the bench in front of the judge or
magistrate respectively, with the usher or court orderly located
elsewhere. The usher generally in proximity to the bench and witness
stand and the court orderly generally closer to the courtroom
entrance. The judges have expressed a preference for the usher to
be located at the bench with the associate.
ii.
Associates/judicial support officers ensure that all court and hearing
proceedings run smoothly and efficiently. In addition, they pass and
receive documents from the judicial officer for reference and / or issue
to the court usher/court orderly.
iii.
Court ushers/court orderlies assist both the judges and the associates
in the day-to-day operations of a courtroom.
They are not
responsible for the integrity of exhibits, the associates or judicial
support officers are.
iv.
Storage for religious texts such as the Bible, Koran, etc. must be
culturally appropriate.
76
SECTION C
In traditional arrangements, the associate is to be elevated above the
litigation floor to enable the easy transfer of documents to and from
the judicial officer.
The associate/judicial support officer or usher/orderly will be
responsible for monitoring lighting levels, acoustic levels, (not
recording levels) and security issues. The associate/judicial support
officer bench should have a solid front and vertically extended face to
obscure papers etc on the desktop.
The associate/judicial support officer should have full sightline
coverage of the court participants, in addition to the judicial officer.
The associates/judicial support officer and ushers bench needs to be
large enough for all technology requirements, papers and files, a
printer, telephone and any associated equipment specified.
The usher should have adequate bench space for laying down
exhibits during court proceedings.
C.
The Jury Box

i.
Jurors should be extended the comfort and courtesies appropriate to
people who must concentrate and remain alert for what can in some
cases be for extended periods of time.
ii.
The front row of seating in the box shall be provided with a modesty
panel.
iii.
The primary entrance to the jury box is to be away from the public
seating area and the custody dock however a secondary entrance at
the public entrance to facilitate access for larger jury panels is
desirable.
iv.
Storage for notes, books and pens, etc. should be included.
v.
In the event that there is a juror in a wheelchair, it is acceptable to
have the last chair in the first row removable to achieve the area
required for access and mobility.
vi.
Seating provision for the Jury Officer shall be provided adjacent to the
jury box and positioned to allow convenient viewing of jury members
and also the public gallery in order to respond to potential
interference of the jury by members of the public. A chair with a
tablet arm shall be provided.
D.
Accused Dock
i.
The entry/exit location to the courtroom holding cell(s) should be
located away from the public seating area thus reducing the risk of
public intimidation or communication with accused during trial
proceedings.
ii.
The dock area is to accommodate a disabled person in a wheel chair,
and security attendants, and an interpreter.
iii.
Seating shall be ergonomic, of a robust design and fixed securely,
and allow PIC to be handcuffed to the seating, if required. Writing
tablets should be provided for each seated position, should the
accused be defending themselves.
iv.
The dock design should include a modesty panel, but also allow
observation of the demeanour (body language) of the accused.
77
SECTION C
v.
vi.
The dock and the seating arrangements shall be located to ensure

that all of the accused can see and hear all participants.
The dock and its surrounds shall be designed and located to minimise
possibility of escape by PIC.
E.
Witness Box
i.
Access to the witness box is to be via the litigation floor or from the
rear of the witness stand to accommodate distressed / protected
witnesses.
ii.
The witness area is to be designed to facilitate easy access, including
for the disabled, as well as accommodating language interpreters
adjacent to it.
iii.
The witness stand must include a bench of sufficient depth to allow
for placement and examination of exhibits, files etc. and water glass.
iv.
The bench area is to be capable of accommodating IT equipment
such as computer screens, VDUs etc without compromising the
witnesses or other court participants sightlines.
v.
The witness stand design should include a modesty panel, but also
allow the observation of witness demeanour.
vi.
The height of the shroud to the witness stand should allow a witness
to stand or sit (in an ergonomic chair or wheelchair).
vii. A multi-purpose display panel shall be provided adjacent to the
witness box to allow the display of hard copy maps/plans/diagrams
referred to during evidence. The display panel shall consist of a
magnetic whiteboard and hanging space positioned to allow
maximum observation by jury members, the judge and counsel. It
shall be capable of being hidden when not in use.
F.
Counsel Table(s)
i.
The capacity of counsel tables varies depending on court size and is
detailed in Table 1. A minimum width of 3.5 metres shall be provided
for counsel tables in higher courtrooms. In all larger courtrooms a
minimum of 900 millimetres width per counsel shall be provided.
ii.
The front table of each courtroom shall be provided with a movable
lectern / bookstand at the outer extremities of the table. An additional
movable lectern shall be provided per courtroom to accommodate
more than one addressing counsel. It should be stored out of view
when not in use and may be shared between courtrooms.
iii.
The counsel table shall be of a depth to accommodate extensive files
and trial material and be a minimum of 800 millimetres.
iv.
The use of full height modesty screens to bar tables is discretionary
and dependent upon courtroom aesthetics, computer installations etc.
v.
In all courtrooms, include shelves for files between the bar and the
public seating.
vi.
The design of counsel tables should include the provision for
connection of laptop computers.
vii. All courtrooms shall be provided with at least two (2) bar tables for
use by legal counsel, with the table layout enabling senior counsel
(prosecution and defence) to be accommodated at the front table and
junior counsel or support staff at the rear table.
G.
Miscellaneous Joinery
i.
An exhibit table shall be provided adjacent to the court ushers
location. It may be mobile or integrated by way of extension to a
bench.
78
SECTION C
ii.
iii.
iv.
5.
5.1.
Lockable and fire-rated storage for exhibits is required. If located in

the courtroom, this may be a fire-rated safe within joinery.
Book shelving and/or storage for trolleys adjacent to the counsel table
are desirable.
Equipment racks required for accommodation of In Court Technology
may be housed in joinery within the courtroom, with access from the
litigation or associates/judicial support officers level.
Jury
Overview
A.
B.
C.
D.
This component deals with jury activities outside of the courtroom. Jury
activities inside of the courtroom will be dealt with under the preceding
Section C.4. Trials.
The jury functions of the courts are the responsibility of the Summoning
Officer appointed at the court when not under the direction of the judge.
There are three main functions:
i. Jury Pool Assembly
ii. Jury empanelling
iii. Jury adjournments and deliberations.
These functions result in two sets of facilities: a jury assembly area
including access to the outside and deliberation rooms. Jury management
and Jury Officers facilities shall be integrated within Court Administration
under Section C.3. Administration.
The number of potential jurors needed on a peak day has been forecasted
at a maximum of 70 persons for a court complex with two Higher Courts
and 55 persons for a single Higher Court complex. In the event that there
is demand that exceeds this number it is proposed that the court will
79
SECTION C
E.
F.
5.2.
change its management procedures for jury pool selection. This will avoid
future increases in space requirements.
The size of the jury pool at 55 reflects the following conditions:
i. Continued use of pairing of two jury pools as normal procedure
An activity flow diagram and a detailed explanation of the
functionality/process within the jury area is included under Section C12.1.
Section C.5 - Jury.

A.
B.
C.
Generally
i.
The design cannot put at risk the integrity of the jury through
contamination from improper contacts once the jury has been
selected.
ii.
Jury pools will move to the courtrooms via public circulation, but jury
panels will move by a dedicated jury circulation system.
iii.
There is the possibility of the occasional high risk trial using
anonymous jurors. The high risk courtroom, and its jury box, needs
to be designed to allow this to happen, in one or more ways. These
ways may include:
a.
Provision of CCTV; plus
b.
The use of one-way glass screening to restrict accused or
public gallery views into the jury box area (or around the jury
box area) as a temporary fit-out.
Jury Assembly Area
i.
The jury assembly area is to be located and planned so that after
normal first day of circuit morning peaks, some of the area could be
used by others, without violating the integrity of the jury system, nor
compromising the overall effectiveness of courts operations.
ii.
Possible other uses include:
a.
Briefing of school and other tour groups
b.
Counselling and advisory services for self litigants, victims, and
other groups being provided with support and advice
c.
Staff training
d.
Courts services management meetings
e.
Community purposes
f.
Staff functions.
iii.
The jury assembly area should have direct access to the outdoors
wherever possible. The outdoor area(s) should be safe and secured
from oversighting and penetration of contraband. The outdoor area
should include smoking and smoke free areas.
The seating
arrangement within the jury assembly area shall enable presentation
to the entire jury pool from a singular point.
iv.
Supervision of assembly area will not involve technology, so the
layouts should facilitate easy supervision from the reception area and
by roving staff.
Deliberation Rooms
i.
Deliberation rooms shall be attached and contiguous to each
courtroom.
ii.
The deliberation rooms are to allow for more than sitting at a table.
The setting is to be conducive to reducing the stress and anxieties
that jury duty can generate. There needs also to be a sense of
spaciousness, and some informal seating.
iii.
Light meals will be provided only to those juries deliberating over a
mealtime, or sequestered. The State will provide the meals, which
80
SECTION C
D.
5.3.
will mostly be lunches, but on rare occasions could also be dinner.

Jurors will eat in the deliberation room or in the assembly area.
Adjournment Spaces
i.
The ability to stretch the legs during short adjournments is to be
encouraged.
ii.
Access to the outdoors from adjournment spaces for stress relief and
smoking (if permitted by legislation), should not be into areas where
contraband and items of intimidation can be lodged.
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location and Relationships)

A.
Provisions
i.
Jury Assembly Area
a.
Entrance, reception and cloak/personal effects hanging
provision (lockers are not envisaged).
b.
A sub-dividable jury assembly area with row seating for 55
persons in Courthouses with one Higher Court and 70 persons
where two Higher Courts are provided.
c.
The area shall include capability for jurors or potential jurors to
operate laptops through the provision of dial up connection and
be accessible to convenient photocopying and fax services by
arrangement with the court administration, for use before or
after court sittings and during adjournments.
d.
Separate toilet and amenities shall be available for use by staff
within the administration area and jury pool members within the
assembly area. Toilet provisions shall meet the requirements of
peak demand.
e.
A kitchenette with storage, refrigeration (including storage for
jury members lunches) and re-heating facilities.
f.
Accessible safe and secure outdoor area to enable jurors to
gain temporary stress relief shall be provided adjacent to both
deliberation and assembly areas.
g.
Storage areas for furniture and equipment, supplies and
janitorial supplies.
h.
Staff area for Jury Officers (included in courts administration).
ii.
Deliberation Rooms
a.
Jury deliberation rooms shall accommodate a range of jury
panels from 14 to 18 persons in accordance with the schedule
in Section C.4 Trials.
b.
Each deliberation room shall be provided with two toilets with
proper airlocks from the deliberation room, a beverage making
counter unit with refrigerator, sink and hot and cold water, and
TV monitor and VCR for replay of recordings.
Toilet
accommodation shall be one unisex WC and one unisex
disabled as a minimum. Provide vanities in each cubicle.
c.
Opportunities for external views are to be optimised but views in
(to the room) be discouraged.
d.
Comfortable waiting area outside each deliberation room for
attending Jury Officers.
B.
Location
i.
Jury assembly
a.
The jury assembly area should be readily accessible from the
foyer/lobby and it must be contiguous with the public circulation
81
SECTION C
ii.
system for jury pools going to court for empanelling, and to the
dedicated jury circulation system.
b.
The assembly area may be used by tour groups and the
community. It needs to be close to the Courthouse entrance
and after the Primary Security Checkpoint.
c.
It is preferred that the jury assembly area be adjacent or in
close proximity to one or more trial courts for empanelling of
juries for large trials.
Deliberation Rooms
Location contiguous with courtrooms.
B.
Relationships
i.
Within the jury assembly, the way to lifts, toilets, and the kitchenette
should be clear by the design and layouts. The area should feel light
and airy, and have good views out so that the sense of enclosure and
confinement is negated.
ii.
The jury pools will be moved to the courtrooms for empanelling
through the public domain, using the public lifts and the front door of
the courtrooms.
Once empanelled, all juries will circulate to
courtrooms via a stair and a lift within the jury circulation system.
iii.
There needs to be the ability to occasionally move juries discretely in
and out of the Courthouse in vehicles from a point close to or part of
the jury circulation system.
iv.
There needs to be the ability for jurors, who have finished a
controversial case, to leave the Courthouse in a discreet way.
C.
Technology
i.
The jury assembly area is to have TV entertainment for pool
members waiting for duty, CCTV/video monitors for information and
announcements and IT data connections.
ii.
Deliberation rooms need a call light and buzzer connected to the
courtroom to seek the assistance of the Jury Officer during
deliberation for a variety of reasons (e.g. to review evidence and
other information presented during the trial).
iii.
The viewing of evidence via electronic means from a network shall be
provided in all deliberation rooms.
82
SECTION C
6. Judiciary
6.1.
Overview
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
6.2.
This component covers the accommodation for the judicial officers which
may vary according to intended use from judges, primarily on a visiting
basis to magistrates on a permanent basis.
The judiciary component shall be considered as an overall judicial suite
with common support facilities.
It is in the judicial suite that judicial officers will prepare, research, discuss,
reflect and resolve cases before them.
For the Higher Courts there is need for circuiting judges on criminal trial
assignment and for tribunal maters heard by the State Administrative
Tribunal on occasions.
The Magistrates Court will be a resident court and may circuit to outer
suburbs or country locations. The registrar(s) involved in mediation and
pre-trial hearings usually do not circuit.
Courtrooms may be used by other jurisdictions subject to its availability.
Activity flow diagrams and detailed explanation demonstrating the
functionality and process within the judicial area are included in Section
C.12 Activity Flow Diagrams.

A.
Generally
i.
The atmosphere and surroundings in the judicial suite must accord
judicial officers the dignity of their office.
ii.
Judicial officers will normally arrive at the Courthouse through a
controlled entry to the secure car park and from there, access directly
into the restricted and secure judicial circulation system.
83
SECTION C
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Dedicated secure parking will not be provided for court staff however
site parking may be made available to staff when not in use for other
higher priority circumstances.
Other than the Judicial Officers the only other users of the judicial
circulation system will be judges personal staff, court staff and court
security staff as required.
Invitees will access the judicial suite via the public circulation system
to a reception point.
Within the judicial suite, the staff of the court will escort visitors.
Emergency egress for judicial officers and their staff should be
dedicated and away from other court users circulation (with the
exception of jurors should design solutions necessitate shared
egress).
One dedicated and discreet entry / egress point shall be provided for
use by judicial officers on the ground floor. The egress point shall be
secure, located away from entry / egress points for other court users
and directly off the secure judicial circulation system.
B.
Chambers
i.
Chambers share areas which include beverage making, office
equipment, storage, recycling bins, storage of case file trolleys and
file carry boxes, and secure storage of exhibits.
ii.
The chambers require a high level of privacy and security.
iii.
Acoustic privacy is a requirement of each separate chamber.
iv.
The judges associate and usher are to be located adjacent to the
judges they serve whilst on circuit. Provision should be made for
secretaries/reception subject to the size of the facility. Where
provided these provisions shall be located together and positioned
such that they can perform a reception role for visitors to the
chambers area.
C.
Judicial Adjournment Areas

i.
Associated with the restricted judicial circulation system there may be
a requirement to include places where the judiciary can wait for short
periods before, during and after a trial. A number of courtrooms can,
normally, share these adjournment areas.
ii.
The size/number of adjournment areas should be determined by the
number of judiciary that could be involved in matters in the courts
served by the area.
iii.
The adjournment areas can be alcoves off the judicial circulation, and
are to provide a telephone with minimal comfortable seating. A fulllength mirror for judges to check their appearance shall be provided
in this space if readily accessible to all courtrooms or alternatively
adjacent to the entry of each courtroom.
iv.
All waiting and adjournment spaces are available for all courtrooms
and not dedicated to anyone, except for times when there is a need
for it to be isolated to provide enhanced levels of security and safety.
6.3. Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location & Relationships)

A.
Provisions
i.
In the judicial accommodation there is to be on-floor storage for
equipment and material needed for circuiting to other courts, and files
for active cases. Also, there is to be adequate secure storage for
evidence not held in a courtroom or the judicial adjournment areas.
84
SECTION C
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
B.
Passage ways shall be sufficient to allow for easy movement of case

file trolleys including the passing of people and other trolleys in the
same passage way.
Office space for support staff including associates will be open
planned.
Shared but gender separate toilet facilities (including shower) are to
be provided for judicial officers with all other staff having access to
shared but gender separate toilet facilities.
Judicial support spaces to include:
Judicial chambers with open planned associates and
ushers workstations subject to requirement.
Judicial library (including 20 bays shelving at 2100h x
900w, 1 x reading table,1 x research work station).
Judicial kitchenette.
Central utility area.
Storage and file areas.
Male and female toilets and a shower.
Judicial Adjournment Provisions

i.
Depending on the size of the courthouse, it may be necessary to
provide access to an adjournment area, a workbench and robe
hooks.
7. Trials and Hearings Support Including Witness Services
85
SECTION C
7.1.
Overview
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
7.2.
It is required that all the provisions for participants, support groups and
storage spaces are adequately provided and well distributed amongst the
courtrooms to minimise delays and maintain the ability to achieve the high
rates of courtroom usage.
The required provisions to support trial and hearing processes are:
i.
Waiting and adjournment spaces for witnesses, counsel, support
groups/persons, and public attending the trial/hearing;
ii.
Secure storage of exhibits and other storage. (Refer C3.5 Records
and Stores);
iii.
Participant support services, including remote witnesses;
iv.
Community justice services;
v.
Support space made available to counsel (Refer C.10 Legal and
Support Agencies External).
The support given to participants, excluding the legal profession, but
including the self represented litigant, victims, witnesses, those on bail,
those from non-English speaking cultural groups and Aboriginals, is from
both DotAG and community groups and individuals.
The support can be as part of the sentence, or on an organised basis
beginning with counselling and advice during the lead-up to the trial and
continue well after the trial is finished, such as in VSS. It can also be adhoc and immediate when grieving, trauma or distress takes over during a
trial or at its completion.
The current areas of support programs are:
i.
Victim and Child Witness Service (incorporating Victim Support
Service, Child Witness Service and Family Violence Service.)
ii.
Court welfare association (predominantly for accused in Magistrates
Courts access to interview rooms is required.);
iii.
Volunteer support groups (eg. Salvation Army) - access to interview
rooms is required.);
iv.
Legal service providers;
v.
Self represented litigants.
vi.
Victim mediation service access to interview rooms is required.
An activity flow diagram demonstrating the functionality and process for
vulnerable witnesses is included in Section C.12 Activity Flow Diagrams.

A.
B.
C.
On trial days participants in support programs should be able to find their

own way to the location of the support programs through good Courthouse
layout planning and clear way-finding.
All the activities involved in the functions of participant support services can
involve people who are quite anxious and stressed and many can be
waiting for some time. The interiors of all spaces need to be restful. All
interview rooms and waiting areas are to be provided with either natural
daylight or borrowed daylight. They are to have views out, and these are
preferably direct to the outside.
The support services facilities should be located away from the normal
Court Users movement and waiting patterns, and have meaningful views
out. A preferred location would be close to courtrooms and on the same
floor providing easy access for briefing the witnesses on the processes
ahead, and what is involved in giving evidence.
86
SECTION C
D.
E.
F.
All support programs are to have access to interview/waiting rooms on the

courtroom floors.
If the trial judge allows, victims, vulnerable witnesses, and their supporters,
will be able to follow the events of a trial from outside the courtroom
through CCTV in the company of a VSS staff member/volunteer, within the
provisions of remote CCTV rooms.
A discreet exit / entry from the VSS facilities to an external dedicated exit
from the Courthouse is required.
Waiting and Adjournments

A.
B.
Protected Witnesses
i.
There is to be provision for accommodation at the Higher Courtroom /
courtrooms, for protected witness, to be held outside the courtroom.
The protected witnesses will need to arrive and leave the courtroom
discreetly, access through public circulation routes shall be
minimised.
ii.
There also needs to be the ability for protected witnesses to give
evidence remote from the courtroom by CCTV, but discretely located
within the Courthouse.
iii.
Protected witnesses can include both people who are in and not in
custody.
iv.
Generally protected witnesses shall be assured of anonymity and
safety by time and people separation management.
Witnesses and Observers
i.
Each courtroom requires use of witness waiting rooms and seating
areas located off the public circulation area, within the public realm,
with ready access into the adjacent court. Allocation of rooms for this
purpose has been factored into the allowance for interview rooms
generally at court floors.
ii.
Open public waiting areas shall seat 30% of the public gallery within
the courtrooms and provide for 20% of the public gallery via standing
room. The seating in the open waiting areas shall be provided for in a
variety of configurations and types. Generous passageways /
circulation paths are needed between the open waiting areas so that
at peak times, large numbers of waiting people do not block access to
the courtrooms.
Participant Support Service

A.
Victims Support Services (VSS)
i.
VSS are not limited to just the victim, it extends to the family and
support networks of the victim and assists adult vulnerable witnesses.
ii.
VSS workers assist victims with any aspect of being a direct or
indirect victim of a crime, including counselling, providing information,
referral to other support agencies, support at court, witness
preparation, and assistance with filing statements and complaints.
iii.
VSS is available before and after the trial and appeals as well as
during the trial.
B.
Child Witness Service
i.
The service is provided to meet the need of child victim/witnesses
who give evidence in court.
ii.
The service is to reduce to the lowest levels possible the trauma and
distress associated with being involved in a trial. Facility planning
and design should support this role of the service through provision of
87
SECTION C
C.
7.3.
ample daylight and external views. Colours need to be bright,

welcoming and calming.
iii.
Parents and siblings, with approval, are able to stay with the witness
in the facilities.
iv.
It should be possible for CWS and VSS staff to discretely escort
witnesses and victims into, out of the Courthouse, and at least one
Higher Courtroom.
It is important to note that as this is being adopted as a model for all
courts that the VSS, CWS and FVS will be integrated with remote
witness facilities and other victim witness support facilities having
common utilisation.
Court Welfare Services and Volunteer Support Groups
i.
At all times there should be the capability to accommodate volunteer
groups who add value to the overall justice service available to the
community within the courthouse.

A.
Provisions
i.
Waiting and Adjournments
a.
Protected Witnesses
The Higher Courtroom shall have contiguous with it, a small
sitting room including a unisex toilet for a witness and
accompanying protection officer(s).
b.
ii.
Witnesses and Observers

1. Open waiting areas shall be adequately separated from each
other so that the following activities can take place
concurrently:
discreet conversation between parties to a matter with
adequate separation from other users;
enable the viewing of television without disruption to
others; and
enable quiet reflection/meditation by individuals.
2. Open waiting areas shall accommodate 50% of the public
gallery capacity (30% seated, 20% standing) within the
courtrooms and be arranged in two seating groups.
Generous passageways/ circulation paths are needed
between the open waiting areas so that at peak times, large
numbers of waiting people do not block access to the
courtrooms.
3. A refrigerated drinking water unit shall be provided for each
courtroom floor.
4. Toilets, general use and disabled use, are to be sized for
peak demand periods usually at starting and recessing
times.
Participant Support Services

a.
Remote Witness Facilities
1. A minimum of two remote witness facilities including
waiting areas are to be provided and capable of being used
by adult and child witnesses in circumstances where it is
appropriate that their evidence is taken by the court without
them appearing in the courtroom in-person. Facilities shall
be located to ensure that child and adult vulnerable
88
SECTION C
b.
B.
witnesses can be separated when matters are being heard

simultaneously.
2. Proximity of the Remote Witness/CCTV rooms to the
courtrooms is essential due to a requirement for physical
evidence being transferred readily from the courtroom to the
witness within the Remote/CCTV rooms via the public
circulation system.
Child Witness Service (CWS)
1. Access to a minimum of two (2) remote witness CCTV rooms
for use by child witnesses and vulnerable adult witnesses
shall be provided and be in close proximity to Higher
Courtrooms. Access to dedicated toilet provisions shall be
provided on this same level. Adult and child witnesses can
share these toilet facilities.
2. In addition to and co-located with the remote witness rooms
for children and toilet provisions, a suite of accommodation
shall be provided to include the following:
Access and security into the accommodation
controlled by staff.
Waiting area to accommodate separate groups of
children and adults.
Separate individual offices for child witness
preparation officers/victim support workers/family
violence officers are required with desk and table
capable of accommodating up to 6 persons around a
table. Floor space to work with children and toy
storage shall be provided in child witness preparation
offices.
Toilet facilities.
Tea/coffee/drinks facilities.
3. Additional Accommodation Required for CWS and VSS shall
be provided as follows:
Hotdesk office space for volunteers
Victim unisex toilet and for family court counsellors.
Technology
i.
In all parts of the public domain, including witness waiting rooms and
lounges, it should be possible to use mobile phones and laptop
computers. Power is to be available for laptop computers in each
waiting room and at places in the public domain.
ii.
TV monitors for free to air and cable TV programs are required in
waiting areas for all high turnover courtrooms, waiting areas and
mediation/hearing room suites, and near beverage points/coffee
carts. The location of these and the seating arrangements related
thereto should ensure that sound does not impact adjacent areas.
iii.
Clocks are to be located in all public areas and accommodation for
support groups, so that users can easily monitor time.
89
SECTION C
8. Custody
8.1.
Overview
A.
This component covers the accommodation requirements for the accused,

whether on bail or in custody, and witnesses who are in custody who are
received and processed through to the Court. It also covers the needs for
those witnesses (in custody) who are vulnerable witnesses or in a witness
protection program.
B.
The purpose of this component of the Design Brief is to provide the

minimum requirements to enable the development of the optimum custodial
areas. These areas must incorporate the necessary accommodation, plant,
equipment, security and technology required to provide the Custodial
Services efficiently, safely, economically and in accordance with States
requirements. Reference is made to the Aboriginal Cultural Brief and the
specific requirements therein that relate to the design of custodial areas for
indigenous people, particularly in relation to the need for exercise areas,
natural light and ventilation.
C.
Custody accommodation will be located in either the courthouse or colocated Police lock-up.
i.
The custody related accommodation facilities include the sally port, a
Custody Centre for persons in custody, Bail Holding Facilities,
circulation to and from courtrooms and if necessary, holding areas at
courtrooms. There is also to be a central control room to control
movement and supervise all custodial areas including outdoor area
for PIC and holding cells. A search room, decontamination facilities
and non-contact interview facilities are also required.
90
SECTION C
ii.
D.
8.2.
The planning, design, operation and management of the custodial

areas and the service are to meet the design capacities stipulated in
section C.8.3 Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Locations &
Relationships).
Activity flow diagrams and detailed explanation demonstrating the

functionality and process within the Custodial Area are included in Section
C.12 Activity Flow Diagrams.

A.
Generally
i.
The consultant is advised to review the report in Appendix 1 that
relates to custody.
ii.
Design and construction of the custodial centre will be subject to
assessment and commissioning tests at designated stages.
Commissioning tests will include 'actual' performance testing by the
State of any materials, fixtures, fittings and construction methods
including simulated attempts by the State to escape from the
Custodial Areas to ensure fitness for purpose.
B.
Principles
i.
The design of the Custody Centre will need to respond to the
following:
a.
Segregation for the various PIC categories to minimise risk and
maximise safety.
b.
The accommodation should be flexible to meet varying degrees
of security risk. Notwithstanding this, an emphasis shall be
placed on innovative accommodation solutions that support
active management strategies in dealing with PIC risk status
and behaviour.
c.
The cell designs shall:
1. Comply with WA Police Building Code (Version 3.0) with
amendments identified in this document.
2. Make provision for high risk PIC.
3. Have electronic surveillance (CCTV) and where possible
direct line of sight from operations desk into the cells.
4. In cell CCTV should not provide a full view of any person
using the in cell toilet. This is to be achieved through
placement of the camera in the opposite corner of the cell to
the toilet or through pixel algorithm changes.
5. Provide excellent visibility in and out of the cells using clear
front cells, viewing panels or similar.
6. Have AV screen for viewing proceedings of the Court from at
least one cell.
7. Have drinking water facilities.
8. Have a toilet pan with privacy screening.
9. Have television provided with capacity to play pre-recorded
videotapes to all cells from a central unit.
10. Where necessary, secure temporary holding areas are to
be provided from the sally port for the effective loading/
unloading and management of PIC from the transport
vehicles.
91
SECTION C
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
8.3.
The custodial control room accommodating the operations

console shall be separately secure from but have direct access
to all cells and holding areas within the Custody Centre.
Windows of custody centre control rooms to be treated to
prevent PIC observation of seated custody officers, CCTV
monitors and other equipment and processes, while allowing
officers to look out. Tinting to be such that light levels in
custody centre areas conform to code.
Design provisions and physical security systems must allow
effective operational responses to duress alarms, emergencies
or incidents in all parts of the Custody Centre. The Custody
Centre shall be designed to provide maximum delay to any
break-out or break-in attempt through physical layering/zoning
of custodial holding, circulation and related adjacent areas.
Fire isolation provisions and a safe and secure means of
holding and evacuating PIC during an emergency. A secure
fire isolated refuge zone shall be identified. From the refuge,
there should be safe exits from which PIC can be loaded into
vehicles and moved off site. Fire exit doors shall be designed
and operated in such a manner that they do not compromise
the perimeter security of Custodial Areas. Fire doors should fail
secure.
The public entry for the legal profession and authorised visitors
must be physically separated for security purposes, requiring
separated access and movement zones at all times. The entry
point must be CCTV monitored, have a physical security
system and a personalised identification process. Design
provisions and physical security systems must allow effective
operational responses to duress alarms, emergencies, or
incidents at the lawyers side.
Natural light, access to ventilation (fresh air) and
circulation/exercise space is desirable in the Custody Centre.
Provide visual relief from within the Custody Centre and natural
light into cells and holding areas.
Custody facilities are to be free from risk of contraband
incursion.
All areas occupied by PIC are to be vandal proof.
Provisions for PIC with disabilities.
Provision of short-term food handling and storage.
Acoustic isolation shall be provided to segregate the Custody
Centre from all surrounding activities of the Courts locations,
adjoining neighbours and Court Users.
Have access hatches to enable passing of articles between the
cell and the adjacent circulation space and to allow the fitting of
restraints to PIC prior to releasing into adjacent spaces when
necessary.
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Locations & Relationships)

A.
Custody Centre Capacity

i.
The provision of a custody facility that can manage the receipt,
holding, welfare and movement of PIC/Bailees and custodial staff
securely and safely.
ii.
Planning flexibility within the cells and Bail Holding room will allow for
a future increase in PIC holding numbers.
92
SECTION C
B.
Accommodation Specification
i.
C.
The accommodation shall be designed to include:

a.
Secure vehicle entrance (sallyport);
b.
An arrival / assembly area;
c.
Areas for PICs to be searched (including strip searching). In
particular;
1. The search area/room is not to be fitted with seating.
2. The area used to strip search is not to be fitted with a hand
basin.
d.
Areas for PICs to be processed into and out of the custody
centre;
e.
Areas (separate from the cells) for PICs to be held until required
to appear before a court;
f.
An area to undertake decontamination procedures.
In
particular;
1. The decontamination area/room is not to be fitted with
seating.
2. Taps servicing the decontamination area/room are to be
fitted externally to the area/room.
3. The door is to open out only, be lockable only from outside
the area/room, and be fitted with a covered viewing hole.
g.
Separate facilities for male, female and juvenile PIC allowing
each category to be held and managed separately from one
another. In addition there is a requirement for separate
accommodation for segregated PIC.
Similarly, separate
facilities are to be provided for juveniles appearing as
witnesses, protected witnesses, PIC from secure mental health
hospitals, and defendants on bail having surrendered to the
Court;
h.
A minimum of five (5) cells is required;
i.
Separate accommodation for legal counsel and authorised
visitors to enter, be received and then interview the PIC. Noncontact interview facilities are to be provided; and
j.
Self contained staff facilities to negate the need to move out of
secure custody area eg toilets, tea preparation.
Security Precautions in Custody Centre

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Maximum security is to be afforded to the Custody Centre perimeter

and internal or external breaches of the perimeter are not permitted.
Built facilities shall be designed and layered so that a single failure
shall not result in an escape.
Surveillance capability (visual, and/or CCTV) shall be available to all
custody circulation areas.
Physical security and circulation control systems should enhance the
movement, containment and separation of PIC groups and allow for
ease of supervision. Custodial circulation systems should not mix or
cross over with other court user circulation systems.
The entry design of the sally port and Custody Centre should provide
search and short-term holding capability.
a.
The Custody Centre holding cells should be designed as
maximum security cells with high surveillance.
93
SECTION C
b.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
Observation There must be at least one (1) cell with high

supervision to prevent any self harm. The Control Room should
have direct observation to at least one (1) cell.
c.
Bailee holding Minimum Security Bail Holding room with
appropriate furniture.
The design should recognise the need for the flexible management of
the various PIC classifications.
The design of the PIC holding areas should provide physical security
complimented with electronic surveillance and management systems,
to allow effective operational supervision.
Cell furniture to be secure and comfortable. It must be robust with
vandal proof padding.
A separately secured centralised operations centre is preferred to
maximise sight lines.
Secure staff amenities area.
D.
Electronic Security
i.
Electronic security requirements are listed throughout this section.
ii.
Refer to Section D.1.4 Electronic Security within this volume for
technical requirements.
E.
Bailee Accommodation
i.
There is to be a place for security searches of bailees proceeding to
courtrooms via custody.
F.
Holding Cells
i.
Courtrooms
a.
To avoid any delays in the operation of the courts and maximise
the management of PIC, holding cells should be provided at
each court. These holding cells are to provide minimum safety,
security and welfare amenity:
1. Allow holding of PIC:
Before and during trials, during short trial adjournments;
Where the PIC has been disruptive in court;
2. Allow segregation of PIC and facilitate efficient transfer from
holding cell to court/ Custody Centre.
G.
Interview / Visit Facilities

i.
To facilitate confidential discussions during interviews/visits with PIC
from legal representatives, welfare and other authorised visitors noncontact visit facilities are to be provided. Legal representatives and
others are not to enter the custody side of the custody centre in order
to conduct non-contact visits.
ii.
The rooms should have CCTV monitoring, duress alarm on the legal
representative side of the interview room, and fixed furniture.
iii.
There must be provision to pass documents through a monitored
lockable hatch controlled by the Custody Staff, with the hatch located
in a position adjacent to the interview room but not in the room.
H.
Sally Port and PIC Loading Area

i.
The function of the sally port is to provide an area to check PIC and
escort vehicles entering and leaving the custody building.
ii.
The loading area is to allow safe and secure loading and unloading of
PIC.
94
SECTION C
iii.
The sally port and PIC loading area shall be of sufficient size to
accommodate the current and future vehicle types.
Table 2 Vehicle Access to Custodial Facilities

Vehicle
Width
Length
Actual
Vehicle
Height
Recommended
Clearance
Height
Turning
circle
(Dimensions in metres)
Future
Rigid Truck
Omni bus
2.50
2.50
12.50
14.50
4.30
4.30
4.40
4.40
17.00
Width dimensions do not include any clearances for mirrors.

Vehicle heights includes antennas and air-conditioning units & roof mounted
fittings.
No provision has been made for a property trailer to be added to the vehicle
combination
iv.
v.
vi.
The PIC loading area shall:

a.
Allow for the unloading of PIC from both sides and from the
back of the vehicles. A minimum of 2.5 metres must be allowed
on each side of the vehicle such that there is sufficient space
for the easy loading, unloading and checking of PICs prior to
them entering the Custody Centre.
b.
Be fitted with interlocking doors (all doors) to custody that must
not be capable of being opened whilst the vehicle entry/exit
roller doors/gates are open.
c.
Supervision and control from the Custody Centre, and full
CCTV monitoring.
d.
Be secure from intruders, public and press.
e.
Be impossible for any person or camera to observe into the PIC
loading area.
f.
Be on the same level as the Custody Centre.
The sally port shall be provided to:
a.
Allow a space for the checking of the vehicles, including
undercarriage and roof.
b.
Allow for the unloading and storage of firearms.
The sally port shall incorporate electronic interlocking doors and
electronic surveillance.
I.
Security and Monitoring Control Room

i.
A control room shall be provided inside the Custody Centre within a
secure perimeter that allows:
a.
Optimum visual surveillance within the Custody Centre.
b.
Capacity for storage of security related equipment and other
items.
c.
Flexibility to accommodate future IT requirements.
J.
Staff Amenity Provisions

Provide secure staff amenities that include lunch area, change rooms,
toilets and showers appropriate for the number of staff.
95
SECTION C
K.
People with Disabilities

Facilities for people with disabilities in the Custody Centre that will cater for
their safety, security and special needs are required.
L.
Food Services
The necessary facilities for the handling and distribution of food for PIC in
compliance with the relevant food and hygiene regulations are required.
M.
Cleaning and Hygiene

PIC must have access to:a.
Water in all cells
b.
Minimum of one shower facility within the Custody Centre
c.
Toilet and wash basin facilities in all cells
d.
Sanitary disposal units
96
SECTION C
9.
Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences
9.1.
Overview
In Western Australia there is a highly developed program of mediation and pretrial conferences and in the District Court this results in less than 10% of civil
matters going forward to trial. Most of this mediation work is in personal injury
claims but there is also commercial mediation.
Mediation, hearings and pre-trial conferences take place in conference type
settings.
Mediation hearings usually start with all parties together and if required they will
adjourn to separate conferring (meeting) rooms to consider positions and then
reconvene with the mediator. Sometimes the mediator will move between
mediation rooms. They therefore need access to suites made up of mediation
rooms with access to meeting rooms.
In personal injury mediation the matters tend to follow standard patterns with a
small group of counsel and solicitors handling the bulk of the work for both the
plaintiffs and the accused. Frequently the aim of the mediation is to establish a
fair resolution and to gain its acceptance by the plaintiff who is frequently under
significant stress. While this form of mediation is termed a pre-trial conference it
has a very high success rate and usually avoids a trial. Frequently the benefit of
the mediation is achieved simply by bringing the parties together and relatively
little active mediation is required.
In addition to the set mediation program there are numerous forms of hearings
and conferences that are associated with matters before a Court, before and
after the trial. There will be more in the future. These hearings include
alternative dispute resolution, preliminary hearings on evidence and negotiation
97
SECTION C
of numbers of witnesses and length of submissions, pre-trial conferences
including the signing of orders, taxing of costs, presiding over procedural matters
pre-hearing and case management determinations. These various hearings and
pre-trial conferences will need access to the same rooms described above. The
civil courtrooms shall be used for those matters that require more formal settings.
Any mediation, hearing or conference involving a PIC will be conducted in a
courtroom.
Participants in mediation and hearings usually will be the registrar and
sometimes an associate (clerical officer) plus the parties to the matter. In case
management hearings the participants will be a registrar and a case
management clerk, plus the parties to the matter. Sometimes a judge will sit in
place of the registrar.
Personal injury mediation can involve physically disabled people. Provisions
should allow the occurrence of a number of disabled persons and their carers
within the Facilities at the same time. Access to and within space provision shall
therefore allow for ease of negotiation of wheelchairs.
Activity flow diagrams and detailed explanation demonstrating the functionality
and process within the pre-trial conference area in respect to the movement/
activity of Judicial Officers and counsel and litigants are included in Section C.12
Activity Flow Diagrams.
9.2.

A.
The judiciary, other Judicial Officers and administrators are to have access
to videoconference facilities in mediation rooms.
The videoconference capability within mediation rooms is to be available for
scheduled use and may on occasions be booked for the use of other
functions of the Court.
On arrival for mediation, parties and counsel will report to a courts
administration counter and be assigned to a meeting room. They will then
go to the appropriate waiting area, where they should be able to sit and talk
with other counsel, read, work and make phone calls. From the waiting
area, access must be available to toilets.
All mediation and meeting rooms are to have views out. Some can have
borrowed views into passageways or across other spaces, as long as the
activities of neither are compromised.
Acoustical isolation of all the meeting and mediation rooms is of paramount
importance (refer to Acoustic & Sound Reinforcement Specification under
Section F).
9.3.
Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location and Relationships)

Refer to section C.11 Schedule of Accommodation for the facility provision within
the mediation and pre trial conference suite.
A.
Provisions
Waiting area at courts registry counter.
Waiting area outside meeting and mediation rooms.
Mediation rooms with video-conference capability.
98
SECTION C
Meeting rooms.
Access to public toilets.
Mediation room layout shall provide for the accommodation
requirements of 3 to 4 document trolleys.
B.
Location
Readily accessed from the Courthouse entrance lobby and
registry.
To be accessible off the public realm for meeting and mediation
rooms.
Registrars are to have the ability to leave mediation rooms by
immediate access to a private staff circulation system, connecting
via the Judicial Officers circulation system to their chambers.
C.
Technology
Technology could increase in diversity and usefulness in both
recording and viewing, including participation by CCTV.
Concealed duress alarms shall be provided in all meeting and
mediation rooms for the use of the Judicial Officer if he or she is
under threat.
99
SECTION C
10.
Legal and Support Agencies (External)
10.1.
Overview
This section includes:
Legal counsel
Legal Aid WA
Aboriginal Legal Service (ALS)
DPP
Self- represented litigants

Accused persons appearing in the Magistrates, District and Supreme Courts are
largely represented by lawyers. All lawyers require access to interviewing rooms
adjacent to courtrooms as well as access to the non-contact interview rooms.
Legal Aid is funded jointly by the Federal and State governments and will
continue to have its operations off site. Legal Aid provides services to accused in
all criminal jurisdictions. Presently some 80% of defence legal representation in
trials in the District Court is funded by Legal Aid.
The ALS is funded by the Federal government and will continue to have its
operations off site. The ALS provides services to Aboriginal and Torres Strait
Islander accused in all criminal jurisdictions.
The role of the DPP prosecutor is to represent State in criminal matters. At
present the DPP initiate and conduct trials in the Superior Criminal Courts.
Self represented litigation is a growing phenomenon and the State is committed
to providing appropriate support as part of its commitment to making justice more
accessible to the community.
100
SECTION C
Activity flow diagrams and detailed explanation demonstrating the functionality
and process relating to legal counsel are included in Section C.12 Activity Flow
Diagrams.
10.2.

A.
Counsel
The interview rooms should be easily accessible in the public realm and
readily identifiable for public needing to make contact with their counsel.
Interview rooms are to be made available at the courtrooms, hearing
rooms, and mediation rooms and at the Custody Centre.
Cabling to provide for the connection of telephone, facsimile, modem and
other office facilities shall be provided to all counsel work areas and
activated as required on a pay as use basis.
Self Represented Litigants
Self represented litigants will have equal rights to members of the legal
profession and book interview rooms.
10.3.

A.
Provisions
Shared interview rooms shall be distributed on courtroom floors. Provide
two interview rooms per courtroom.
Although all interview rooms are shared, there needs to be one interview
room that is designed specifically for Legal Aid and one for the DPP.
These two rooms for Legal Aid and the DPP are to include a desk, task
chair, two visitors chairs, a 900 high lockable cupboard behind the desk for
printer and three full length lockers.
The location of the lockers needs to take into account the future possibility
of robes being dispensed with and hence the space shall be capable of
being re-used.
All other interview rooms are to be furnished with a round table and four
visitors chairs. These rooms will be used by ALS, self represented litigants,
Community Justice Services, Police Prosecutions and social workers.
All interview rooms are available for the above on a booking basis through
Courts Administration.
Locks, telephone and data points are to be provided for all rooms.
B.
Technology
Generally, work areas for counsel are short duration office space
necessitating use of lap top computers via telephone / data line. Access to
videoconference capability if required shall be booked through the court
administration.
101
SECTION C
11.
Schedule of Accommodation
11.1.
Space Planning Criteria and Standards

A.
Schedule of Area
i.
The following Schedule describes and groups the Facilities
accommodation spaces.
ii.
The m unit area is not to be viewed as being restrictive or absolute
but is to be used as a guide only to the expected size and/ or
standard of required accommodation.
iii.
Areas scheduled are nett areas or functional floor area. Functional
floor areas do not include any allowance for:
Circulation and standard facilities provided for the common use of
occupiers and/ or the public such as corridors, passages, lobbies,
foyers, etc.;
Areas set aside for building plant such as mechanical plant,
electrical equipment rooms, telecommunication switch rooms etc.;
Non-habitable building space such at that occupied by internal
columns and other structural supports, internal and permanent
partitions, lift shafts, service ducts etc.;
iv.
v.
In open office spaces (e.g. general office) the functional floor area
does not include any allowance for circulation space.
A toilet amenity - The schedule of accommodation designates toilet
provisions in specific areas but does not schedule the requirements
for public use. Consultants are to calculate their own requirements in
this regard and distribute provisions throughout the Courthouse in
accordance with population demand.
Table 3 Schedule of Accommodation

Functional Space
No.
Of
Items
Floor
Area
Total
Nett
Area
Comments
Higher Courtroom
160
Magistrates Large
Courtroom
120
Magistrates Standard
Courtroom
Subtotals
Mediation & Pre-Trial
Conf Rooms
Mediation / Pre Trial
Conference Room
90
35
35
To include AV
equipment.
18
As breakout space
adjacent to pre-trial
conference room.
Trials
Meeting Room
Subtotals
Trials and Hearings
Support
18 Jurors. Area of
courtroom is inclusive of
sound lobbies.
Also for Childrens Court

hearings.
Discrete access must be

provided for Witnesses
102
SECTION C
Functional Space
No.
Of
Items
Floor
Area
Total
Nett
Area
Comments
entering and leaving this

zone.
Child & Adult Witness
Services
Waiting area/lounge
15
15
Remote Witness Rooms

(CCTV rooms)
16
Volunteers Office /
Protected Witness
waiting
Child Witness
Preparation / VSS Office
Unisex Disabled Toilet
12
12
Dedicated within child

and adult witness area.
Tea Prep
Courtroom Support
Waiting areas at each
courtroom
Locate in alcove.
Interview rooms at
Courtrooms
0.75
Jury
Reception/Enquiry
Workstation
Jury Pool Assembly Area
2 staff positions.
65
65
Jury Deliberation Room
50
50
1 sqm per person plus

presentation space (55
jury panel).
Includes juror personal
effects storage lockers 12
off (stacked 4 high),tea
prep and Unisex
Disabled WC and Unisex
WC.
Judicial Support
Exhibit Storage
Shall be segregated into

two areas, 1 for adults &
1 for children.
2 CCTV Rooms colocated in witness area.
A CCTV room shall be
located directly off each
waiting area.
Co-located with adult
waiting area.
Waiting areas must have

access to toilets. To
accommodate 50% of
public gallery of each
courtroom with 30%
seated and 20%
standing.
2 interview rooms per
courtroom plus 1
additional for allocation
as day space for support
agencies e.g. Family
Violence.
Located in Judicial
circulation area.
Does not include VSS
& CWS
Subtotals
103
SECTION C
Functional Space
No.
Of
Items
Floor
Area
Total
Nett
Area
Comments
Subtotals
Judicial Officers
Chambers
24
Judicial Officers Toilets
Unisex / disabled WC
with shower and basin
plus 1 unisex WC and
basin.
Includes small desk for
usher.
Associates
11
Library/Research
24
24
1
1
4
5
4
5
Includes workstation for

Research/Personal Staff.
Shared by Judicial
Officers and support staff.
Adjacent to library.
Associates trolley and file
storage.
Tea Prep
Utility Alcove
Storage
Number assumes pairs of

Court rooms with
combined holding cells.
All cells to include WC &
Basin.
Custody Admission
/Reception
12
12
Custody Control Room

Duty Office
Property Alcove
Search Room
1
1
1
1
24
12
4
6
24
12
4
6
Provide counter with

support workspace
adjacent.
To accommodate 3 staff.
Non Contact Interview

Rooms
Bail Holding Room
Multiple Cells Medium (2
to 3 PICS)
1
3
8
10
8
30
Multiple Cells Large (5 to

6 PICS)
PIC Meals Preparation
Staff Shower and WC
Detainee Shower
Vehicle loading/
unloading facilities
Sally Port
12.5
25
1
1
1
7
6
3
7
6
3
150
150
Subtotals
Custody Provisions
Holding Cells at the
Courtrooms
Custody Centre
Includes allowance for

WC and basin. 1 cell to
include CCTV.
Includes allowance for
WC and basin.
Unisex.
To accommodate
maximum vehicle size of
14.5m length and 2.5m
width plus minimum
104
SECTION C
Functional Space
Exercise Yard
No.
Of
Items
Floor
Area
Total
Nett
Area
12
12
50
50
Interview Room
Service Counters /
Registry
25
25
Clerk of Courts
Supervising Courts
Officer
Open plan work stations
(General Office)
1
1
15
9
15
9
Utility Room
12
12
Subtotals
Staff Amenities
Lunchroom
20
20
Shower/change space
Staff Toilets
10
Subtotals
Administration
Registries
Registry Counter /
Waiting (Public side)
Strong Room
Comments
clearances of 2.5m all

round.
Configuration to suit
ultimate design layout.
To include Counters/
Carrels for document
preparation, waiting &
brochure displays.
Seating capacity for 4
minimum. Include
disabled access to
counter.
Adjacent to counter. Use
for document inspection
and confidential
discussion.
Includes 4 counter
positions including 1 for
disabled.
Included within Exhibit
Store.
Large open plan
workstation.
X staff in total including 4
permanent counter
positions.
Accessed from Counter
Positions and Staff/
Admin area. To include
space for fax /
photocopier / shredder /
printers / recycling bins
and paper storage.
Shall include facilities to

heat & refrigerate food,
sink & dishwasher, bench
tops, cupboards and
store supplies. Include
TV.
Associated with bicycle
storage. Include 1 unisex
shower.
1 male WC urinal and
hand basin. 1 female
105
SECTION C
Functional Space
No.
Of
Items
Floor
Area
Total
Nett
Area
Comments
Staff Disabled Toilet

Subtotals
Courts Records &
Stores
Primary Storage File

Storage
Secondary Storage
Archival Storage
Exhibits Storage
Stationary Storage
Subtotals
Public Foyer spaces
Public Foyer
20
20
12
12
1
1
9
4
9
4
Include safe.
50
50
Security Control
50
50
Court Security Office
12
12
Reception/ Information
Childrens Area
10
10
Includes entry orientation

information and listing
screens. Space
allocation to be separate
from Court waiting area.
Including vending
machine space provision.
To accommodate airport
style security and a
security office.
Located in Courts
Administration.
Counter space for 1
person and under bench
storage for media
cameras etc.
To be located off either
public foyer space or
public waiting area
outside courtrooms.
WC and hand basin.

Unisex.
Fire suppressant systems
are needed.
To be located adjacent to
the Registry Counters.
Allow for compactus.
Subtotals
Building Services
Cleaners Storage
Electrical & Mechanical
Plant Rooms
Switch room
On merit.
Main Substation
Mechanical Plant Rooms

Communications
Telecommunications
Equipment Room (third
Party Equipment)
States Main
To be negotiated with
Western Power if
applicable.
On merit.
X
106
SECTION C
Functional Space
No.
Of
Items
Floor
Area
Total
Nett
Area
Comments
Communications Room
Courts IT Room
AV Central Equipment
Room
Court AV Equipment
X
Incorporated within each
court as min of 2 19"
racks.
Building Generally
Audio Visual Support
(Control Room)
Equipment Store
Parenting/First Aid
1
1
20
5
20
5
Vehicles
X parking bays at 28sqm
per bay
28
Bicycle Storage
10
10
For guidance - every 1-4

courtrooms allow space
for 1 Technician (5sqm).
Undercover and secure

parking for all Judicial
Officers including 1
disabled, 1 for Clerk of
Courts, and 1 spare for
authorised use.
Undercover secure
storage for up to 5 bikes.
Subtotals
Total Nett Usable Area
107
SECTION C
12.
Activity Flow Diagrams

12.1.
Section C.5 Jury
108
SECTION C
A.
Activity Description For Activity Flow Jury

i.
Arrival/Orientation
Those summonsed for jury duty (jury pool members) arrive at the
general entry to the courts complex, well in advance of court
proceedings from 8:00 am, and they should be allowed to enter the
Courthouse for shelter.
They may arrive in large numbers and will need clear directions to the
jury assembly area, without clogging the public information desk or
kiosk. Alternatively they may be directed in advance to enter the
Courthouse via a dedicated Jury entry point.
ii.
Security Check
They will have passed through a Primary Security Checkpoint prior to
entering the Courthouse.
iii.
Enter Jury assembly area

This will occur through a dedicated entrance at which jury reception
will manage, check and control movement in and out.
iv.
Book In/Out
Jury pool members are checked in on production of their summons.
On leaving the assembly suite, all jury persons will book out, and may
receive documentation for jury duty payment if no longer required at
the end of the trial. Alternatively this may be managed electronically
directly into personal accounts.
v.
Waiting
Jury members will be encouraged to settle into the assembly area
where they should be able to sit, relax, read, watch television, work
and make phone calls.
The assembly area should therefore be arranged in a formal seating
configuration and have access to tea / coffee and refreshment
facilities.
The assembly area must be self-contained and have access to toilets,
refreshment facilities and secure outdoor space. Adequate toilets
must be provided to cater for peak times.
An outdoor area is required. This space must have dedicated
connection to the assembly area and should not be overlooked by
other court areas. It should be designed to be available for smokers
and non-smokers.
vi.
Instruction / Induction
Instruction is given on courtroom protocol and then jury panels are
selected by ballot.
vii.
Ballot
A digitised ballot system will be used to select groups of pool
members, now called a jury panel, to be taken to a courtroom for the
selection of the jury.
109
SECTION C
viii. Holding (at the courtroom)
There can be need to hold a jury panel before entering the courtroom
if legal discussion is taking place in the courtroom. On occasions, it
will be required to exclude the jury panel from the courtroom for the
same reasons. Under these circumstances there is the need for
temporary holding of the jury panel.
Jury recess/deliberation must accommodate all jurors including
reserves leading up to the deliberation phase. Lengthy adjournments
could see jury free to go to a more comfortable waiting area. Shorter
adjournments/interruptions would require all the jury to stay close by.
On day two onwards there is a need for empanelled juries to gather
and wait prior to recommencement of the trial.
A discreet entry to the jury zone and particularly for empanelled juries
from the public realm needs to be provided away from general public
view.
Jurors, whether empanelled or otherwise, would be required to report
at reception in the assembly room to be registered for the days
proceedings.
ix.
Jury Selection
The jury panel is seated in the public gallery from where they are
challenged by both counsel and the accused. An empanelled jury is
thus formed including alternates (reserve jurors) for lengthy trials,
which could take the number of the jury to 18.
The balance of the jury panel relocates to another courtroom and is
again challenged to form a jury. The movement of this group to the
next courtroom should be through public circulation.
For trials involving multiple accused, the jury panel may be too large
to be accommodated in a particular courtroom. In this case the
selection of the jury can be conducted in any available courtroom,
and then relocate to the listed courtroom after selection. Alternatively
a large courtroom could be located close to the jury assembly room
fitted with CCTV. This would enable the excess jury panel to sit in the
assembly room and maintain contact with the proceedings. It would
also enable jury persons to move efficiently to the courtroom.
A Jury Officer is allocated to each empanelled jury and manages
them to the end of the trial.
The balance of the jury panel returns to the assembly room to wait for
a new ballot or dismissal for the day.
x.
Adjournments
Adjournment will occur for tea breaks, meals or short periods of
exclusion from the proceedings of the trial.
Minimum delay is required for the return of the jury to the
proceedings.
110
SECTION C
The deliberation rooms will need to be located close to the
courtrooms.
There can be between 14 and 18 persons on the jury at this stage. It
is only on deliberation that a maximum of 12 jurors occupies the jury
deliberation room (i.e. at the conclusion of a trial).
xi.
Meals
Generally, empanelled jurors will not be provided with meals. They
will be able to eat outside of the Courthouse, in the jury assembly
area, or bring their own food to the adjournment space or deliberation
room. These arrangements would be subject to order by the Judge.
Facilities for jury persons to store personal food (small fridge) will
need to be provided in the dedicated deliberation rooms, as well as
storage of eating utensils and provision of a small sink.
Jury persons whilst undergoing deliberation will be provided with
quality meals, which will be brought in from outside caterers.
Jury Officers will be served meals separate from the jury at a shared
Jury Officers station adjacent to the courtrooms within the jury
circulation area.
Jury Officers will deliver meals, beverages and snacks to deliberation
rooms.
It must also be possible to provide food service into the assembly
room to cater for other courts activities, when jury activities are not in
session, or juries deliberating in this area.
xii.
Deliberation
Only a jury of 12 retires to consider their verdict in the deliberation
room. At this stage remaining empanelled jurors will be dismissed
and escorted to the assembly room to book out.
Deliberation can be a stressful experience. For this reason a
comfortable environment is needed and space for dining provided.
Each deliberation suite must include two toilets, one designed for use
by the disabled.
An external view to outdoor space is highly desirable. It would also
be desirable to have access into a shared outdoor space (and for use
by smokers) on a time separation basis with other juries, and
managed to keep juries separated if required. This space must be
out of view from surrounding buildings and from the public.
xiii. Sequestering
The jury remain together until a verdict is reached.
At the end of the day the judge monitors the likelihood of the need to
continue deliberation into the next day. If so, the jury and Jury Officer
can be sequestered at a hotel, for overnight accommodation.
Access to the hotel will be through a secure vehicle access zone,
where taxis can enter by special arrangement or, jurors can be
transported by a court arranged bus.
111
SECTION C
xiv. Verdict
Once the jury has reached agreement, they return to the courtroom,
and announce their verdict.
xv. Dismissal
The jury is dismissed by the judge in the courtroom. The Jury Officer
escorts the jury to the assembly room where they book out and exit
discretely.
xvi. Special Requirements
Movement of Jury Persons
In all cases, the jury panels, and in particular sequestered and
empanelled jurors are kept separate from all other trial participants.
For this reason, jury persons must be able to move into and out of the
Facilities via the following alternate routes:
a.
Via a readily accessible access between the jury assembly

room and the general entry area to the Facilities.
b.
Direct access between the jury assembly room and a secure

exit for access to group transport in special circumstances.
c.
Via a dedicated circulation area without having to circulate

through any public space.
All jury persons must be able to return to the assembly room to book
out, and / or receive documentation for payment, and also to retrieve
personal items before leaving the Courthouse.
Lockers for Empanelled Jurors
They will be given access to individual secure lockers to store
personal items if needed. A space for storing personal items such as
umbrellas needs to be provided.
112
SECTION C
12.2.
Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences

Activity Flow: Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences Judicial Officers
(Note: This diagram does not represent a floor plan)
113
SECTION C
A.
Activity Description For Activity Flow Mediation and Pre-Trial

Conferences
i.
Enter the Conference Room

The Judicial Officer enters the conference room through a separate
security controlled door from the judicial restricted circulation system
or court administration area and summons the litigants from the
waiting area into either Pre-Trial conference room or adjacent
meeting room.
ii.
Liaise with Litigants

The Judicial Officer moves between the parties in either room to help
the discussions reach a resolution.
114
SECTION C
B.
Activity Flow: Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences Counsel and Litigants

115
SECTION C
C.
Activity Description For Activity Flow - Mediations

i.
Arrival/Orientation
Litigants and counsel arrive at the general entry to the courts
complex, in advance of proceedings. They may need reference to
Listings information on their appointment. They may also need clear
direction to the conference room area, or attend to the matters at
court registry.
ii.
Security Check
They have passed through the public Primary Security Checkpoint at
the entrance prior to moving to any other part of the Courthouse.
iii.
Waiting
Litigants and counsel arrive at the conference room and settle into a
small waiting area, where they should be able to sit and talk with
counsel, read, work and make phone calls. From the waiting area,
access must be available to toilets and refreshment facilities. Parties
should also have access to a user pay photocopy facility within the
Registry.
The waiting area must be arranged to afford litigants and their
counsel some ability for private discussion and an ability to be seated
away from the opposing party or parties.
iv.
Conference
All parties are called into the conference room to attend the
mediation. Discussion can be heated and stressful, and can continue
for lengthy periods. A view to the outside is highly desirable but if
unachievable a minimum provision is the ability to achieve borrowed
light to help relieve any tension.
Parties may retire back into the waiting area for tea breaks and make
use of other facilities.
v.
Negotiate
If required, the parties will separate, with one party moving to the
adjacent meeting room for discussion amongst themselves. The
parties eventually return to the pre-trial conference room for
finalisation of the matter and then leave as they arrived. During
negotiation the parties may retire back into the general public waiting
area for tea breaks and make use of the facilities.
116
SECTION C
12.3.
Trials and Hearings Support

Activity Flow: Trials and Hearings Support
(Note: The diagram represents a generic circulation for Child and Adult
Vulnerable Witnesses).
A.
Activity Description for Activity Flow Trials and Hearing Support

i.
Reception
Staff within area are responsible for the security of the area and
control access through the door. CWS clients are not to wait outside
the secured CWS area and are to be provided with tea / coffee or
117
SECTION C
cold drinks by the attending staff within the service not outside of the
area.
(The tea prep area within CWS needs to be arranged to ensure no
access is possible by young children).
A security intercom and CCTV system should be provided to allow
CWS administration staff to see and talk to people wishing to enter
the facility, and to unlock the door.
ii.
Waiting
The general waiting area is organised into two small areas that can
accommodate adults and children separately.
It is critical to the success of this service that children feel welcome to
use the space; ample sunlight, a view out, possibly a secured outdoor
area, bright colours and a fun atmosphere will contribute greatly.
It is important that the two (2) co-located CCTV rooms are
acoustically isolated from adjacent waiting area, so that any noise
generated by those waiting cannot transfer into a courtroom via audio
visual links whilst evidence is being given.
iii.
Discussion
This is the primary task of the service, where children are prepared to
give evidence in court. This involves discussions between the child, a
parent or friend, and the CWPO member as well as one on one
preparation between the CWPO and the child. The offices of the
preparation staff must be large enough for the children to play on the
floor and to accommodate family members when information is to be
discussed. The room should afford the children total privacy.
The process of discussion occurs at several sessions of increasing
frequency leading up to the trial. The purpose of this consultation is
to explain the courts processes and to familiarise the child with the
court and CCTV rooms so that the best evidence can be given.
Furniture layout in these spaces is critical - with nothing to be
between the child, the staff member and the CCTV rooms.
The CWPO's offices require seating for six around a table, floor
space to work with the children, and usually office furniture and
equipment, including toy storage. CWPO's see all clients in their
usual office not in a separate discussion room.
iv.
Giving Evidence
Evidence is given in two ways, either in court, with a screen
separating the child-witness from other participants in the trial, or via
a closed circuit television (CCTV) system with a CCTV room as a part
of the CWS. (Note: evidence in open court is rare).
Evidence given in court is covered elsewhere in this document under
section C - Trials and Hearings. Assumes access into the open public
zone and through the security check to the courtroom.
The CCTV facilities are acoustically attenuated rooms with two
television monitors and a video camera that allows live
communication between the child witness and other trial participants
118
SECTION C
in the courtroom. When the child is giving evidence there is a
support person (a relative or friend) and a CWS officer. There
should be only one entry into each CCTV room.
When, or after giving evidence in the CCTV room it is desirable that
the child be debriefed by the CWS officer. This takes place by the
child and worker returning to the CWS office, which will be located
near to the CCTV rooms. These facilities need to be located close to
one another.
v.
12.4.
Debriefing
This takes place after the witness has given evidence and occurs in
the staff offices as does stage 3 - discussion. The same design
principles apply, it is not an additional provision.
Legal and Support Agencies

A.
Activity Description for Activity Flow - Legal and Support Agencies

(External)
i.
Arrival/Orientation/Reception
Lawyers and general public arrive at the general entry to the Facilities
with public being directed by way of clear signage.
ii.
Waiting
Clients who have arranged to meet lawyers will be expected to wait
outside of the respective courtrooms. The lawyers handling the case
will interview their client within interview rooms accessible from the
public waiting areas before making their way to courtrooms.
The interview room will be nominated by Courts Administration and
be lockable, with counsel provided with appropriate keyed access on
the day / days of the trial. Interview rooms will be used for robing and
workspace.
iii.
Interview
Clients having passed through the Primary Security Checkpoint shall
have access to the interview rooms associated with courtrooms.
Clients or witnesses called by lawyers will be interviewed in these
rooms.
iv.
Lawyers Entry Point

Lawyers shall access the Courthouse via the public entry through
security control.
119
SECTION C
12.5.
Judiciary
A.
Activity Description For Activity Flow - Judiciary

i.
Approach by vehicle
The judicial officers will arrive by vehicle and enter the site through a
secure entry. The space through which the vehicle has to move, on
site and wait for entry, must be discrete and remote from public
gathering spaces.
ii.
Parking
The Judicial Officer enters through a controlled access point into the
Judicial Secure Parking Area.
120
SECTION C
iii.
Chambers
The Judicial Officer then moves through the secure circulation to his
or her chambers.
iv.
Support Facilities
In the course of a day, Judicial Officers will move between chambers,
the courtroom suite, library within chambers and meeting or
conference rooms, within the restricted zone.
v.
Trials and Hearings

From the chambers zone, the Judicial Officers will move to and from
the courtrooms and Hearings, including their adjournment spaces
through the secure judicial circulatory system. The associate and
usher will assist in moving file trolleys and exhibits.
121
SECTION C
B.
Activity Description For Activity Flow Judicial Visitors

i.
ii.
iii.
Arrival/Orientation
Visitors arrive at the general entry to the Facilities.
Enquiry and waiting
Visitors will be directed to chambers after they have registered at the
reception desk (within public foyer) or the Registry.
Chambers
The visitor will be escorted to chambers by Courts Administration
staff. Visitors then leave as they arrived, escorted or directed to the
reception area, where they will check out.
122
SECTION C
12.6.
Custody
B.
Activity Description For Activity Flow Persons in Custody

i.
Approach and Vehicle Access

The vehicle must be able to select its route of egress from the site,
irrespective of its route of arrival. The vehicle must enter and leave
the site in a forward direction. The space through which the vehicle
has to move, must be exclusive use and not accessible to or
overlooked by the public.
123
SECTION C
ii.
Arrival
On being positively identified by the courts security staff, the vehicle
enters the vehicle sally port directly.
In the event that the transport is provided by Police or Corrections
officer and they need to proceed further into the Custody Centre, they
must place their firearms in a secure firearms locker to be provided
within the vehicle sally port.
During the PIC management process, a number of actions occur and
are recorded in court systems. These are:
iii.
log PIC in and record, search, property, legal and interview

requirements;
record movements, record events (medication issue, meals,
searches, phone calls, visitors, incidents etc.) and location;
record theme of court results and record receipt of correct
paperwork ex court;
facilitate bail or release and discharge from custody including
log out.
Assemble
The PIC are managed out of the vehicle. During this process the
driving officer remains in the vehicle or the vehicle keys are secured
outside the sally port.
The PIC are stood in line and subjected to a search. A handover
then occurs to court custody with relevant identification and
documentation.
iv.
Processing/Search
Prior to moving into the Custody Centre there may be a requirement
for a more intensive search which is conducted in a search room.
Occasionally, there may be a need for a PIC to shower. (A PIC may
attempt to soil themselves to sabotage a trial). Showers are
conducted in a PIC shower.
Each PIC is recorded as entering the Custody Centre and taken
directly to a cell.
v.
Bailee Holding Facility

Accused on bail who are required to surrender to the Custody Centre
will report to the registry counter and then be escorted to the Custody
Centre and held in the Bail Holding room before proceeding to court.
Depending on current operational policy or direction of the court,
accused could proceed to court via the public circulation, rather than
attend the Custody Centre.
vi.
PIC Interview/Meetings
PIC need to receive visits from officials and their lawyers. Visits will
take place in non-contact interview cubicles.
Provision must be made to transfer documents between parties
during non-contact visits. This must occur through a centralised
security lock within which appropriate and efficient screening for
contraband can take place. Staff will manage the process and the
124
SECTION C
document transfer unit shall be of an open style to allow full visual
surveillance of all transactions.
PIC may require controlled / monitored access to a telephone to call a
lawyer or contact a person to go surety for bail.
Legal counsel or visitors to accused will communicate with the
Custody Centre via intercom at the visitors entry to the Custody
Centre located off the public waiting area and then be directed to the
relevant non-contact interview room.
vii.
Courtroom Holding
It should be possible to move those PIC involved in matters in a high
risk courtroom directly between the sally port and the holding cells of
that courtroom.
These holding rooms are also used for adjournments and need to be
self-contained with access to a toilet and a washbasin. Separate
holding for males and females needs to be provided, and for singles
and groups.
viii. Trial
Accused PIC activities within the courtroom are dealt with under
Section C.4 Trials.
Accused PIC who are found guilty are returned directly to the Custody
Centre and are then managed in reverse flow to the above.
Accused PIC found not guilty (provided that they are not on a "Return
to Prison Order" or subject to other charges that they do not have Bail
on) need be given the opportunity to walk free from the dock into the
courtroom. Currently an officer accompanies them back to the
visitors entry lobby at the Custody Centre area, where they gain
access, and collect personal items before being discharged.
However, most will be taken back to the Custody Centre through the
secure circulation system, and discharged through the Courthouse
entry lobby.
Accused persons from Bail who are found guilty and given an
immediate sentence, or remanded into custody to await sentencing
will return to the Custody Centre, via PIC circulation.
125
SECTION C
C.
Activity Description For Activity Flow PIC on Bail Surrendering to the

Courtroom
126
SECTION C
i.
Arrival/Orientation
Accused may require directions from the courts entry after passing
through security check.
ii.
Support and Check-in

Accused may report to Legal Aid, a welfare support group, or meet
with counsel, prior to checking in at the Registry and then being
accompanied or directed to a court room.
iii.
Waiting
Will wait either in or directly outside the courtroom with their counsel.
When called, will attend to the front of the Court as directed (either
into the dock or at the table with their legal representative).
iv.
Trial
If found not guilty, the accused leaves in reverse order to the above.
v.
Search
If found guilty and a custodial sentence is imposed, or if bail revoked,
the accused is taken from the dock into the secure circulation
corridor, where he or she has a pat-down search prior to accessing
the Custody Centre.
vi.
Holding
As for PIC held in custody.
127
SECTION C
D.
Activity Description For Activity Flow Surrendering from Bail into Custody
Centre
128
SECTION C
i.
Arrival/Orientation
The accused may require directions from the courts entry.
reception point may be after the Security Check point.
The
ii.
Security Check
The accused will then pass through the public Primary Security
Checkpoint.
iii.
Support
The accused may report to Legal Aid, a Welfare support group, or
meet with counsel prior to checking in at the Custody Centre or
courtroom.
iv.
Check in / Reception at Custody Centre

On being identified, the accused will enter the Custody Centre
through the visitors entry and report at the reception desk. Secure
storage needs to be available for the safekeeping of bailees personal
property.
v.
Check in at Courtroom
On being identified by the dock guard, the accused will enter the
courtroom dock. Subject to the trial Judicial Officers direction, there
may be a requirement for the accused to be searched at the
courtroom holding cell prior to the trial commencing. Secure storage
needs to be available for the safekeeping of bailees personal
property within the holding cell area.
vi.
Processing/Search
If surrendering to the Custody Centre (as per paragraph 4), prior to
moving to a courtroom, the accused will be subject to a search.
vii.
Interview
The PIC may need to receive visits from officials and their counsel.
This will take place in non-contact interview rooms.
viii. Courtroom Holding/Adjournment

(As for activity flow for PIC held in custody)
ix.
Trial
(As for activity flow for PIC held in custody)
If found not guilty, the accused leaves in reverse order to the above.
If found guilty, the accused is taken from the dock back to the
Custody Centre.
13.
Police Courts
These are Magistrates Courts integral with police stations.
Type C Court:
The WAPOL shall provide visiting DotAG staff with access to the police
stations amenities room, staff toilets and vehicle parking compound.
Where a dedicated Magistrates room is not provided the Magistrate he/she
shall be given access to a room with a desk and telephone.
129
SECTION C
Visiting Counsel shall have access to the interview rooms.
The WAPOL will ensure that the courtrooms external building fabric and
areas are maintained to a standard consistent with the overall complex.
The following is to be provided:
Dedicated courtroom minimum size 6.5 metres x 10 metres to cater for

up to 24 people.
Conduits for future AV System.
Conduits for transcription equipment cabling. Provide audio recording
equipment including fixed microphones for the bench, witness stand,
accused dock and bar table x 2 together with a telephone line into the
courtroom situated on the JSO bench with speakers for the telephone
on the bench and bar tables.
Separate entries to be provided for the police station and for the
courtroom.
Dedicated Magistrates room that is accessible directly from secure
parking for the Magistrates motor vehicle. Room to include:
Desk and chairs (allow 2 for Justices of the Peace) with a dedicated dial
up line and telephone line.
Sufficient power points, telephone and computer port.
Secure access between Magistrates room and the courtroom.
Private toilet facilities.
Courtroom to have appropriate signage.
Provide weather protection for rain and sun for outdoor courts waiting.
Using an air lock as a covered/protected waiting area in addition to the
seating capacity of the courtroom.
Courtroom to be fitted out with a Magistrates bench on a dais, two
risers high. Two chairs. A fixed long table for Counsel to sit up to four
chairs, a dock for the accused and the witness, possibly made out of
simple MDF balustrade, one riser high. A JSO workstation one riser
high. Provide seating in the gallery for 24 people approximately. State
Crest. Bar top lecterns x 2. Network connections for remote dial up for
the JSO and the Magistrate. Sufficient sound-proofing from outside
noise. A desk and chair for the orderly. The JSO position raised one
step for better view as should each the witness stand and the dock. The
JSO position to be of sufficient size to cater for computer equipment
(including printer). The witness stand to have a bench type top given
the increasing incidents of witnesses referring to statements and
exhibits.
Provide duress alarm under magistrates bench and JSOs desk.
Electrical Engineer to speak to Manager Audio Visual Systems, Courts
Technology Group (DotAG) regarding court recording, audio visual
requirements. Including the provision of TV and Video/DVD recorder to
play records of interview. (All new courts should at least have the basic
polycom system installed from day 1).
Air lock to front entry of courtroom approx. 4 metres X 6 metres. This
may serve as a covered waiting area with say seating for 25 40
persons.
2 x interview rooms adjacent to courtroom 3 metres x 3 metres with
access from the waiting area.
Public access toilet accessible from the waiting area.
130
SECTION C
Police Operations Rooms:
In regional localities with a low court workload, court proceedings shall be
held in the operations room of the local police station. In some locations
the police station has a full courtroom. As these facilities are redeveloped,
and in consultation with the DotAG, these facilities are being replaced with
either a Type C courtroom or a police operations room. The WAPOL is
responsible for the construction, maintenance and operating costs. The
local Officer in Charge is responsible for managing the use of the facility.
The police operations room shall have enough floor area to comfortably
conduct a court sitting and will include the following standard government
issue loose furniture that can be configured as follows:
Judicial desk and chairs (allow for 2 visitors chairs)
Witness table and chair
Dock table and chair
Bar table (for at least 4 people)
Public seating (allow 10 seats)
Judicial Support desk and chair
Table and chairs for Prosecutor and Counsel
Table and chair for Orderly.
The room shall also include:
Sufficient sound proofing from outside noise
Conduits for future cabling of video conferencing facilities
Network connection for remote dial up for Magistrate and Judicial
Support Officer.
The DotAG may at its discretion provide the following items:
State crest
Collapsible witness stand in lieu of table
Collapsible dock in lieu of table
Bar top lecterns (2).
The WAPOL will ensure that the courtrooms are maintained to a standard
consistent with the overall complex.
The WAPOL shall provide visiting DotAG staff with access to the police
stations amenities room, staff toilets and vehicle parking compound. The
Magistrate shall be given access to a room with a desk and telephone.
Visiting Counsel shall have access to interview rooms provided adjacent to
the courtroom (in a Type C circumstance) or interview rooms within the
police station.
131
SECTION D
D.
1.
Building Engineering Services Specification

Introduction
1.1.
General
A.
General
An intelligent BMS that reduces running costs and optimises efficient use of
energy shall be provided. Systems shall be designed to minimise whole of
life cost.
B.
Service Authorities
i.
The Consultant shall be responsible for complying with the
requirements of all statutory authorities and/or private companies
which supply services to the Facilities including water, sewerage,
drainage, gas, electricity and telecommunications.
ii.
Access shall conform with the requirements of AS 1428.1.
Additionally, all external and internal facilities shall have regard to the
provisions of the Disability Discrimination Act 1992.
iii.
The building engineering design principles relating to the Facilities
relate to creating a building that:
a.
is of a high quality;
b.
full of light;
c.
satisfies the spatial requirements for court rooms and Court
Users; and
d.
is able to meet the current and future needs of the State.
Service Authorities
Materials
The types of materials to be used for the construction are to be high quality,
robust and low maintenance and shall contribute to the overall physical
impression and attractiveness of the Facilities.
B.
C.
D.
Finishes
Surface treatments and applied finishes shall be durable, long wearing, low
maintenance and shall also be visually appealing.
E.
Flexibility
The services within the Facilities shall be flexible, adaptable and easily able
to be altered to increase and/or decrease the sizes and layouts of
courtrooms, office areas and the like.
F.
Acoustics
i.
Acoustic conditions should be appropriate to the range of activities
that may be conducted in the various spaces and should take into
account their relation to adjacent spaces and external conditions.
Noise producing areas and mechanisms (such as lifts, lift control
rooms, escalators etc.) and noise sensitive areas (such as
courtrooms, administration areas etc.) should be positioned to
minimise interference. Courtrooms should not be positioned next to
lift wells if it can be avoided.
ii.
The Noise Rating (NR) numbers for ambient noise levels within
spaces specified in this Section are the background noise intensity
criteria for unoccupied rooms and should not be exceeded. Privacy
ratings are to be used as a basis for the selection of construction
materials for walls, floors, ceilings and doors and equipment.
iii.
For further detail on acoustic conditions and requirements refer to
Part F of this Design Brief (Acoustic and Sound Reinforcement
Specification).
132
SECTION D
1.2.
G.
Custodial Areas
The engineering services design in these areas shall comply with the
Western Australian Police Building Code 3.0 - Planning Guidelines as
relevant to Custodial Areas.
H.
Intent
Where a product, item, finish or the like is identified by name, catalogue
number, serial number or the like, that product, item, finish or the like may
be replaced by an alternative. Where an alternative is proposed it shall, so
far as reasonably practical be of equivalent or better quality and design
characteristics to the item being replaced shall otherwise satisfy the
requirements of the Design Brief, and shall in any event be endorsed by the
State.
Communications Services
A.
General
i.
Performance Requirements
a.
The following performance description relates to the provisions
required for the communications systems and the proposed
objectives.
b.
The communications systems included are:
Building Engineering System Backbone;
Building Telephone Cabling System;
Communications Cabling Systems;
MATV System;
Public Address System;
Custodial Area Communications Systems;
Listing display systems cabling; and
Public information kiosk cabling.
ii.
Standards
In addition to the compliance requirements detailed in the general
section of this Design Brief, the works shall comply with the
following:
iii.
Australian Standards
AS/NZS 3000
AS/NZS 3080 and normative references
AS 3084
AS 1367
AS 1417
AS 3007
AS/ACIF S008
AS/ACIF S009
ACA TCPR
ACA CRCPR
Design Life and Durability

The communications cabling systems shall be designed to
minimise requirements for rewiring to suit emerging technologies.
Minimum design life of 15 years shall be provided for backbone
and horizontal cabling systems.
133
SECTION D
iv.
Maintainability
a.
The communications system shall be designed to allow
maintenance activity to all equipment.
b.
Special attention shall be given to ensure the serviceability of all
equipment, particularly access to equipment cupboards and
risers.
c.
The incoming services and system backbone shall be designed
such that in the event of refurbishment / maintenance works an
alternative backbone is available maintaining the system at user
level fully operational.
v.
Flexibility
a.
The communications system shall be constructed to allow
flexibility for future expansion, refurbishment and emerging
cabling technologies.
b.
The communications system shall be designed to allow future
increase in population / equipment density at 50% to each area
provided with communications systems equipment.
c.
All access provisions shall be based on the most advanced
industry standard at the time of installation.
vi.
Sustainability
The cabling systems shall be designed to minimise the number of
cables required eg Category 6 (Cat 6) with individual cable per
service vs Cat 7 with multiple services through a single cable and
minimise frequency of rewiring (eg dark fibre within Cat 7 cable).
The suitability of Category 6 vs Category 7 communications
cabling shall be determined for each project.
B.
Incoming Communications Cabling

i.
Two suitable building entry points for lead in cables shall be provided.
ii.
Cable support systems including conduits and draw wires shall be
provided for lead in cabling.
iii.
Lead in cable access shall be provided for the following
Telecommunications Service Providers:
1 primary service provider;
2 alternative service providers;
minimum of 4 other future service providers.
iv.
All lead in cables shall be run through cable access system and the
conduits / trays shall not be run exposed through public areas such
as car parks. Where cable supports run through a car park or public
areas, they shall be enclosed in secure ducting. Where access is
restricted by cast in conduits, or the security measures, prevent ready
access, cable supports shall utilise conduits with a minimum of 50%
additional spare conduits, complete with draw wires, for future
access.
v.
The conduits shall be provided as a minimum for the primary entry
point:
2 x 100 dia conduits for the primary service provider run through to
the main communications room.
2 x 100 dia conduits for alternative Telecommunications Services
Provider(s) run through to the main communications room.
4 x 32 dia conduits capped at each end through the boundary wall
into the building main communications room for future
Telecommunications Service Providers.
134
SECTION D
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
The following conduit shall be provided as a minimum for the

secondary entry point:
2 x 100 dia conduits for the primary service provider run through to
the main communications room.
2 x 100 dia conduit for alternative Telecommunications Services
Provider(s) run through to the main communications room.
4 x 32 dia conduits, capped at each end, through the boundary
wall into the building main communications room for future
Telecommunications Service Providers.
Similar cable access provision shall be provided from the main
communications room to the AV central equipment room.
The lead in cabling shall be terminated on a BD frame.
The BD frame shall be a Krone type frame and have separate
securable (lockable) sections, with each section provided with a
minimum of 50% spare spaces, for the following:
incoming cabling;
AV communications system cabling to the AV system central
equipment room;
building telephone cabling backbone terminations;
Telecommunications Services Providers.
The BD shall be housed in a 2 hour fire rated main communications
room.
C.
Building Engineering Communications System Backbone

i.
The building engineering communications system backbone cabling
system shall include:
BMS backbone (refer to Section Mechanical Services for further
detail of the system);
lighting control system backbone;
ii.
While the systems listed above use separate head ends, the use of
shared backbone and facility cabling is encouraged.
iii.
The building engineering communications systems shall be separate
from the AV communications backbone cabling systems.
D.
Building Telephone Cabling System

i.
The building telephone backbone cabling shall be separate from the
AV communications system and will service third party items such as
vending machine monitoring systems, public telephones, lift
emergency telephones, electricity network operators scada system,
fire alarms and any other vendor specific monitoring systems. The
cabling is envisaged to utilise Category 3 cables and provide a
minimum of 30% or 20 spare pairs per level, which ever is greater,
over and above identified equipment requirements.
ii.
100% space riser space and termination frame space shall be
provided for future.
E.
Voice and Data Communications Cabling System

i.
General
The LAN shall be separate from the AV LAN and include the
following:
fibre backbone;
redundant fibre backbone;
structured horizontal cabling system for voice and data systems;
Telephone tie-lines from each floor to the main communications
room.
135
SECTION D
ii.
Communications Rooms/Cupboards
Main Communications Room
a.
The room(s) shall be 2 hour fire separated from the remainder
of the floor and shall house the main computer equipment, BD,
PABX and associated equipment.
b.
The main communications room shall meet the following
requirements:
be designed to AS 3080 and AS 3084;
be locked, monitored by the security system and provided
with access control;
be provided with 24 hour air conditioning and positive
pressurisation;
be provided with antistatic flooring.
c.
The room air conditioning system shall be a dedicated system
with 1+n redundancy maintaining the following conditions 24
hours a day, 7 days a week:
dry bulb temperature 21oC;
relative humidity 50%.
d.
The fire detection system shall include VESDA. Output signals
from the VESDA shall be made available to facilitate server
shutdown in the event of operation of a VESDA alarm level.
e.
The fire protection system shall not include wet sprinkler system
within the room.
f.
The power supply to the main communications room distribution
board shall utilise dedicated 2 hour fire rated feeders from a
main switchboard.
g.
A direct, dedicated and secure cable access shall be provided:
from the AV communications room to the main
communications room;
to the main communications risers.
h.
The main communications room security shall include:
Card key access and monitoring to all doors.
Monitoring of the various computer room alarms.
i.
The main communication room shall be equipped with 1 off, 45
RU, 900 x 600 server cabinets complete with all terminations
and power supplies in addition to the horizontal cabling cabinet.
P
Floor Communications Rooms/Cupboards

Floor communications rooms/cupboards shall house the floor
distributor (FD) racks (24 RU 600x600), be designed to
AS 3084, and shall be located centrally to limit the physical
length of communications cabling to 90 m and the total channel
length to 100 m. The racks shall be 24 RU 600 x 600 and be
complete with all cabling terminations and power supplies.
b.
Easy access shall be provided from the communications
room/cupboards to the area serviced.
c.
The rooms/cupboards shall be lockable with security
monitoring. Automatic remote alarm outputs of all associated
equipment shall be provided to maintenance personnel.
a.
iii.
Cabling
LAN Backbone Cabling
a.
Provide all initial and future cabling for the LAN backbone
cabling system.
136
SECTION D
b.
c.
d.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
The LAN backbone cabling system shall originate from the main
communications room/cupboard and terminate at the floor
distributor racks at the floor communications rooms/cupboards
within the Building
The Building backbone cabling shall use multi mode fibre
cabling. The cabling shall be OM2 or greater. A minimum of 24
cores per floor shall be provided.
The telephone tie lines from each floor to the main
Communications Room shall use Cat 3 cabling with a minimum
of 100 pair per floor.
LAN Horizontal Cabling for LAN
The horizontal cabling to accommodate the LAN shall be
designed as a structured cabling system to AS 3080 and
associated communications standards. The cabling system
shall be current industry standard at the time of installation
however for court security fibre to desktop cabling may need to
be considered in selected areas. Provide all initial and future
cabling for the LAN horizontal cabling system.
Rewirable access of the LAN horizontal cabling to the court
benches without need to penetrate to floor below shall be
provided. Cable access system shall provide easy rewiring
provision and a minimum of 30% spare space. Clearances
between the communications and power cabling shall be
maintained within the access provision to meet the
requirements of the cabling system a minimum of 150 mm
separation shall be maintained for long parallel runs where UTP
communications cabling is used.
There are three different courtroom types ranging from standard
to video conferencing and full electronic court as detailed in the
Section I Audio Visual and Transcription System.
The horizontal cabling system shall be fully cabled in all courts
to ultimately allow conversion to a fully electronic court type
without disrupting room surfaces or necessitating construction
of new access routes or equipment spaces. Rewirable access
spaces shall also be provided in all courts to allow for future
cable upgrades.
All cable access provisions for horizontal cabling systems
including skirting ducts, ducts incorporated in furnishings or
floors shall be sized to suit installation requirements such as
bending radius of future proposed communications cabling
systems.
Communications outlets shall be provided to meet the
functional requirements of all areas and as required for
equipment provided by the Consultant.
Communication outlets shall be provided in the Courts as
detailed in the Section Audio Visual and Transcription Services.
Communication outlets shall be provided at each individual
workstation including counter positions, offices and the like and
in all meeting type rooms. The basic workstation allocation
shall be three (3) communication outlets. Communication
outlets in meeting rooms and larger offices shall be provided
with three (3) communication outlets per 10 m2 of internal area.
Communication outlets shall also be provided for faxes, printers
and the like on the basis of one (1) outlet per 30 m2 in office,
storage and Registry areas. Communications outlets shall also
be provided in resource rooms, reproduction/utility rooms,
P
137
SECTION D
h.
media facilities, staff rooms and the like to suit functional

requirement.
Provide communications outlets (and associated power outlets)
for the connection of wireless data transmitters at high level.
iv.
Work Station Layout

Each individual workstation shall have:
An enhanced triple category SIX data outlet.
4 GPO power outlets. Two of the four power outlets
require a dedicated, surge protected computer use circuit
and should be marked as such.
v.
Port Density and Environment Configuration

The following configuration should be used at all sites regardless
of size. The following items are REQUIRED as standard.
(Field Outlet Terminations)
Series 2000 faceplates or any approved equivalent
faceplates.
Category 6 Inline RJ45 Outlets in: Black only
(Data Cabling Terminations Within Comms Cabinets)
32 Port 1RU ONLY Patch Panel with BLACK ports
Horizontal 1RU Cable Management Panel
** Note - One Cable Management Panel Is Required Per Patch
Panel Used.
(Telephone/Voice Backbone Terminations Within Comms
Cabinets)
32 Port 1RU ONLY Patch Panel with WHITE ports
** Note - One Cable Management Panel Is Required Per Patch
Panel Used.
vi.
Cabinet Specifications
The common configurations are shown below. These comprise of
the standard 45RU equipment cabinet, the 45RU server cabinet,
and the 12RU & 24RU equipment cabinets. Smaller cabinets can
be utilised on a case-by-case basis only with prior consultation
from the Telecommunications Section.
Cabinets shall be secured to the floor or wall.
All Cabinets shall be earthed using 2.5mm green/yellow
earthing cable.
The cabinets below are EXAMPLES ONLY and
equivalent spec cabinets can be used.
a.
45RU Data Cabinet Spec (+10 users with no servers)
External Dimensions: 2115mm(H)x625mm(W)x605mmD
DESCRIPTION
QTY
45RU 19 2100x600mm Deep Data Cabinet
1
Acrylic, Perspex Door 45Rux19
1
45RU Shelf Rail Set (Pair)
1
10 Way Vertical Power Rail
1
2-Fan 19x600 Top Panel
1
19x450mm Deep Fixed Shelf
4
Cabinet Cable Trays
1
1RU Cable Management Rings
8
138
SECTION D
b.
45ru Server Cabinet Specs (+10 users and servers/possibility

of)
DESCRIPTION
QTY
45RUx19 2100x900mm Deep Server Cabinet
1
45RUx19 Vented Steel Door
1
1
1
1
3
19x600mm Deep Sliding Shelf
1
c.
24RU Data Cabinet Specifications (Specific Application Only)
External Dimensions: 1215mm(H)x625mm(W)x605mm(D)
DESCRIPTION
24RUx19 1215x600mm Deep Cabinet
24RUx19 Acrylic, Perspex Door
5 Way Horizontal Power Rail
QTY
1
1
1
1
2
d.
12RU Data Cabinet Specifications (1 5 users with no servers)

(SECONDARY CABINET ONLY UNLESS OTHERWISE
STATED)
DESCRIPTION
12RUx19 600x450mm Deep Cabinet Inc. Door
QTY
1
1
vii.
Cabinet Clearances
The telecommunications room that houses the data/server
cabinets shall be sized to suit the quantity of racks to be installed
and requires the following minimum clearances to the rear, front
and to the sides of the data/server cabinets.
Cabinet Rear 600mm between cabinet rear and adjacent
wall.
Cabinet Side 400mm between cabinet side and adjacent
wall.
Cabinet Front 1000mm between cabinet front and
adjacent wall.
Please see room layout at end of this Section.
viii.
Cable Specifications
The minimum standard of cable brand and type should follow as
per the list below. Please note the vendors listed below are NOT
in any particular order.
a.
Data Installation
Beldon Category 6 cable.
Prestolite/Krone Category 6 cable or TrueNet Cable.
Alcatel Category 6 cable.
Molex Category 6 cable.
AMP Category 6 cable.
Clipsal Category 6 cable.
139
SECTION D
Or any other vendors cable that meets or exceeds the
b.
c.
ix.
Category 6 standard.
Fibre installation
Fibre optic cabling is to be installed with SC terminations
and a 1RU FOBOT.
Blown Fibre can be utilised in certain cases with prior
consultation only.
All in-building fibre cabling shall be Multi-Mode.
All external fibre cabling shall be Multi-Mode unless
otherwise advised.
Each cable shall be 8 cores or more per run.
c. Voice installation
Voice cabling shall be single pair termination unless
otherwise approved.
All voice ties will be direct termination from the IDF/MDF
to the patch panel.
No sub-IDF frame shall be installed into a
communications cabinet.
Minimum voice tie cable size shall be 20 pairs or above.
Each voice tie cable capacity shall be specified by
telecommunications staff as required.
Labelling Standards
a.
General
All telecommunication outlets, cables, patch panel ports
and IDC blocks are to be clearly and systematically
labelled.
Trafolyte labelling 7mm high, with 4mm high black
lettering is to be used for the labelling of all
telecommunication outlets, fibre optic ports and cabinet
identifiers. Refer to AS 3080-1992.
Workstation partitioning is to be labelled (non permanent)
wherever it conceals the location of a telecommunications
outlet.
All IDC type blocks are to be identified using the
appropriate label holders and marked with permanent
pen.
Each field cable shall be permanently labelled 150mm
from each end.
There shall be no duplication of numbers on the patch
panels in each communications cabinet.
Any cables that have been removed as part of an
installation shall have the label removed at both the patch
panel end and the telecommunications outlet end.
b.
Voice
Voice patch panels should be marked with the incoming
telephone ext, the labels should be left blank and should
be updated in pencil only. If the number is not known,
voice patch panels should be left blank.
All Disconnect Modules are to be labelled in accordance
with standard telephone termination conventions.
Confirm termination practices / labelling practices with the
Department of the Attorney General Telecommunications
Section on 9264-6190 or 9263-1319
140
SECTION D
Voice tie line cables shall be permanently identified by
c.
x.
cable tying labels identifying the cable as a voice tie line

and the origin and destination of the tie line. This should
be placed every two metres for the entirety of the cable
run.
c. Fibre Optics
Fibre optic cable shall be permanently identified by fibre
optic warning labels every five metres for the entirety of
the fibre optic run.
Fibre optic break out terminals shall be identified in
trafolyte with a description of the destination of the fibre
optic run.
E.g. 8 core fibre optic to Level 4 Comms Room
The fibre optic cores shall be labelled in trafolyte label.
Colour Coding
Patch leads should be colour coded at the patch panel end only.
In the field the colour of the patch leads should be blue without
exception. For the patch panel end, the following chart lists the
different colours and their uses.
Patch Lead
Colour
Blue
White
Red
Black
F.
Service Type
Example
LAN Services
Voice Services
Ethernet Cross Over Cable
WAN comms
Telephones, Modem Lines

Between Hubs
Servers, Routers
xi.
Site Warranty Information

Any major cabling works should be installed with a 15-year
extended site warranty and depending on the size and scope of
the installation a 20-year extended warranty should be
considered.
xii.
Site Documentation
After a site is re-cabled or any major data cabling works are
carried out, site documentation should be returned to the
Technical Infrastructure section of the Department of the Attorney
General (9264-6190 or 9264-1319). This documentation should
consist of the following.
Category 6 enhanced test results for each data port
installed, supplied on a CD, no hard copy to be provided.
Fibre optics OTDR test results for each fibre core
installed, supplied in a hard copy and in a bound file.
A detailed floor plan should be returned showing the
location of all data outlets in the field as well as comms
cabinet locations, cable tray locations etc.
Site warranty and any other relevant documentation.
Communications Riser Space Requirements

i.
General
The following requirements are common to all risers:
All communications risers shall have locked and monitored doors
at each level.
141
SECTION D
Bunding on each level to prevent the ingress of water into the riser
system; bunding is considered necessary regardless of the vicinity
of water sources such as cleaners cupboards or tea preparation
areas, as water from events such as activation of sprinkler
systems needs to be prevented from entering the riser system.
All system communications risers shall be fitted with cable trays
unless noted otherwise.
All tray / ladder fixings shall be offset from the mounting surface
(i.e. fixings by bolting tray directly to the wall through the tray shall
not be used).
All trays / ladders to be sized with 30% minimum spare capacity
unless noted otherwise.
All communications risers shall be 2 hour fire rated and also be
provided with floor to floor fire rating.
All dimensions given are indicative only and are assumed to be
clear internal dimensions.
G.
ii.
Communications System Riser

a.
The communications riser will be utilised to install the LAN data
backbone cable throughout all levels of the building. The
communications riser shall be physically segregated from any
other riser and be located a minimum of 1000 mm from any
electrical power riser and lift cores and shall be 2 hour fire
rated. The riser shall be located within, or immediately adjacent
to, the floor communications rooms on each level and provide
direct and unobstructed access from the main communications
room to each level. The riser shall be located on one vertical
plane throughout the building.
b.
The communications riser penetration shall be 1200 x 300 mm
minimum with two (2) 600 mm wide trays. Where the riser is
enclosed in the floor distributor cupboard, no additional
enclosure is necessary. However where the two are separated,
lockable and monitored doors shall be provided.
iii.
AV Riser
a.
The AV riser shall be used to house the AV LAN and MATV
system backbone cabling, public address system cabling and
any other courts AV system backbone cabling.
b.
The riser shall be at a common vertical alignment throughout
the building with lockable doors.
c.
Physical separation of the AV riser from any other services riser
is to be considered where necessary for security and to ensure
system integrity.
d.
A redundant AV backbone riser may be necessary subject to
reliability considerations.
Audio Visual System

ii.
General
Audiovisual systems shall be provided where detailed in Section
G. Audio Visual and Transcription System.
iii.
Courtrooms
a.
There are three different courtroom types ranging from Type C
to Type B and Type A electronic courtrooms. The system and
equipment requirements at each court type are detailed in the
Section G Audiovisual and Transcription System.
142
SECTION D
b.
c.
H.
The courts AV system and shall be fully cabled to allow all

courts to be converted to Type B or Type A courtrooms. The
AV system will include an AV network and all associated
equipment as detailed in the Section G. Audiovisual and
Transcription System.
The AV system shall incorporate all associated UPS as
necessary to maintain the service requirements detailed in
Volume 3C Part A and B Audio Visual, Court Recording and
Transcription Services.
iv.
AV Communications Rooms and Spaces

a.
The AV communications rooms and spaces for the courts AV
system shall include but are not limited to:
AV equipment rack space in each courtroom or in
adjacent room (space provision is required for all three
types of courts);
AV system central equipment room;
AV system backbone riser and floor distributor cupboard;
operations room if necessary;
disaster recovery room if necessary;
rewirable cable access to courtroom benches for all
necessary AV cabling without need to penetrate to floor
below;
AV equipment rack spaces in conference spaces.
b.
The generic requirements detailed for the communications
cabling system spaces apply to the AV system spaces.
c.
A Court's IT room shall be provided to service the Court's
business applications.
v.
Courtroom AV System Interfaces

The description below is limited to description of the basic
physical connectivity requirements of the main components. For
further information associated with each system, including sound
reinforcement, displays, hearing augmentation etc, refer to
Section G. Audio Visual and Transcription System.
Court Rooms/AV Network
AV system cabling within the room;
CCTV from remote witness rooms via the AV network;
Teleconferencing via the AV network;
Video conferencing via the AV network.
Equipment Room
Remote witness room CCTV cameras connected to
courtrooms via the AV network;
External service connections via telecommunications
entry room.
MATV
i.
A MATV system shall be provided to distribute VHF and UHF
television signals received by a common head end and distributed
throughout the building.
ii.
Coverage shall include current free-to-air broadcast television and
provision for the inclusion of digital television and satellite signals,
which may be available in the future. Facility for video playback shall
also be provided.
143
SECTION D
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
I.
The system backbone cabling shall use star topology with individual
cable from the head end to each level as minimum.
The system shall have nominal impedance of 75 Ohm and use quad
shield RG11 cable as a minimum for the backbone cabling.
MATV outlets shall utilise F type connectors. MATV outlets shall be
provided in Courts waiting areas, jury assembly area, staff rooms,
Custodial Area cells and holding rooms, Jury Room and pre-trial
Conference Room.
Video inputs shall be provided for the jury assembly area to allow
video presentations to potential jurors.
The MATV system shall be interlinked with the Audiovisual System to
allow MATV signals to be selectively distributed throughout the AV
system.
A Foxtel compliant system is not envisaged to be necessary.
Public Address System

i.
General
The public address system shall be capable of generating
announcements within the following zones:
Public areas adjacent to each courtroom - generated from the
relevant courtroom;
Custodial Area, including the sally port, lifts and associated lobby
areas generated from the Custodial Area control room;
Jury assembly area - generated within the assembly area.
ii.
System Performance
a.
The system installed shall be capable of generating a sound
level (SPL) of 90 dB at 1 watt input measured on axis at 1
metre.
b.
The nominal maximum sound pressure level variation across
the areas covered by the system shall be 6 dB. It shall be
possible to independently control the output level to the
nominated zones by individual zone amplifier and volume
controls. Automatic volume controls shall be provided for public
areas.
c.
As clear natural speech reinforcement is a prime function,
articulation loss shall be kept to a minimum and shall be of less
than a rating of 0.75 on the rasti scale of 0.0 to 1.0.
d.
When the system is driven to produce a SPL of 90 dB, with pink
noise, the frequency response shall be 80 Hz to 10 kHz with a
maximum variation of plus or minus () 3 dB.
e.
Feedback elimination shall be provided with microphone inputs.
f.
No PA systems speakers shall be installed within the
courtrooms and any announcements shall not be heard in the
courtrooms.
J.
Public Telephone
Public telephone facilities shall be provided on each level and in the main
foyer on both sides of the security screened area.
K.
Listing Display System

Details of the listing display system are provided in Section E. Information
Services and Directional Signage.
144
SECTION D
L.
Jury Attending Office Call System

Provide a push button / buzzer system from the jury deliberation room to the
adjacent waiting area to allow the jury to call the attending Jury Officer. The
buzzer shall not disturb other adjacent areas.
M.
Custodial Areas
There are a range of communications systems which may be installed in
custodial facilities to assist operational staff in determining the wellbeing of
the detainees held in custody. The systems installed shall meet the
requirements of Western Australian Police Building Code 3.0 - Planning
Guidelines.
1.3 Electrical Services

A.
General
i.
a.
required for the electrical systems and the proposed objectives.
b.
The electrical systems included in the electrical works are:
Western power substation;
Consumer mains and main switchboard;
Electrical reticulation;
Lighting and Power;
Lighting control system;
Emergency evacuation and exit lighting system;
Lightning protection;
Changes to the electrical systems associated with the
CLC Custodial Area.
ii.
Standards
In addition to the compliance requirements detailed in the general
section of this Design Brief, the works shall comply with the
following:
AS/NZS 3000:2000
AS 1680 series of Standards
The rules and regulations of the supply authority
State electrical requirements
ACA
All relevant Australian Standards.
iii.

The electrical systems shall have adequate durability to achieve a
normal industry standard design life as outlined below, without
requiring undue maintenance.
145
SECTION D
Item
Transformers
HV switchgear
Main switchboard
Distribution boards
Sub-main cables
Sub-circuit cabling
Luminaires
Emergency lighting systems
Emergency lighting batteries / single point
luminaires
Minimum Design
Life Years
30
30
30
30
30
25
25
20
5
iv.
Maintainability
a.
The electrical system shall be designed to allow maintenance
activity to all equipment.
b.
Special attention shall be given to ensuring the serviceability of
all equipment including concealed equipment.
c.
The electrical system shall have isolation on a floor by floor
basis to allow disabling of minimum electrical services during
maintenance and refurbishment.
v.
Flexibility
a.
The electrical system shall be constructed to allow flexibility for
future expansion and refurbishment.
b.
The electrical system shall be designed to allow for future
refurbishment of the building and serve additional electrical
loads. The Consultant shall make provision for increase of
maximum demand by 30% in terms of spatial allocation and
extendibility of equipment such as main switchboard.
c.
Further spare space and load allocations have been detailed for
individual components of the system as part of the description
of each system in the body of the text.
vi.
Sustainability
The electrical systems shall be designed to minimise energy
usage during normal operation.
vii.
Maximum Demand
a.
The electrical connected load for the base building
incorporating the requirements of the future fit-out shall be
determined from the following information:
b.
Lighting maximum demand:
Judicial chambers and offices
15 VA/m2
Courts
20 VA/m2
General public areas
20 VA/m2
Loading dock, car park and
services areas
15 VA/m2
P
146
SECTION D
c.
B.
Building general purpose power maximum demand:

Judicial
chambers
and 20 VA/m
offices
Courts
20 VA/m
General
public
areas
15
VA/m
Loading dock, car park and 10 VA/m
services area
Building special purpose Based
on
power & fixed equipment

equipment
rating and in
accordance
with AS/NZS
3000:2000.
Air
conditioning/lifts/other Based
on
plant
equipment
rating and in
accordance
with AS/NZS
3000:2000.
Typical
allowance
80
VA/m
but advise
shall
be
sought from
Mechanical
Services
Consultant.
Courts
LAN
main
Based
on
communications equipment equipment

room floor distributor rooms rate and in
accordance
with AS/NZS
3000:2000 +
30% spare.
AV
system
central To
be
equipment room
advised by
AV system
designer
3% spare.
Electrical Supply
i.
General
a.
Electrical supply to the Building shall be as negotiated with the
supply authority. Supply may be high or low voltage metered.
b.
HV switchroom, transformer room, associated spaces and cable
access as required by the supply authority equipment and
cabling shall be constructed to supply authority requirements as
part of these works.
c.
Electromagnetic interference from the electrical distribution
system shall be eliminated by careful consideration of location
of main electrical plant and major cable routes, and installation
detail of cable routes.
147
SECTION D
C.
ii.
Power Quality
a.
Power supply shall be at 415 V 6% at 50 Hz, however all
components of the electrical system shall be sized to
accommodate the potential future reduction of supply voltage to
400 V 6% at 50 Hz.
b.
Harmonic distortion shall be contained to within recommended
value as set out in AS 2279 and Western Power requirements
as detailed in "Quality of Electrical Supply Part 2".
c.
Voltage drop shall comply with AS / NZS 3000:2000.
iii.
Electrical Energy Tariffs

The lowest bulk metering rate offered by the energy supplier shall
be utilised in accordance with maximum demand profile for the
development or by contract arrangement with the energy supplier.
iv.
Energy Monitoring
a.
Separate monitoring metering shall be provided to assess
power consumption for large items of plant such as mechanical
plant, lifts and light and power to each individual floor via the
BMS system. (where one is installed).
b.
The monitoring system shall include automatic reporting
functions for each meter.
Reticulation
i.
Main Switchboard
a.
Main switchboard shall be housed in a 2 hour (minimum) fire
rated room contiguous with the substation.
b.
The main switch room shall have the following features:
Not accessed from public areas;
Be provided with monitoring by the security system;
Ventilation / air conditioning to maintain operating
conditions;
Minimum of 2 egress doors.
c.
Electrical lighting and power loads shall be segregated from the
mechanical and lift loads throughout the installation.
d.
The main switchboard shall be form 3b construction as a
minimum.
e.
Provision for power factor correction to be installed at a later
stage shall be provided for the case where the power factor
exceeds 0.8.
f.
In addition to Energy Supplier Metering, the following
instrumentation shall be provided for each main feeder for the
metering of the following:
Voltage;
Current;
Maximum demand;
Power factor;
Energy (kWh).
g.
The above outputs shall be monitored by the BMS. (where one
is installed).
ii.
Mains
a.
Mains cabling between the substations and the main low
voltage switchboards shall be adequately sized to
accommodate the full rating of the facility.
148
SECTION D
b.
iii.
Mains cabling shall be 2 hour fire rated in accordance with the

AS/NZS 3000:2000 and BCA and shall have a wiring system
rating of WS53W in accordance with AS 3018 unless the
substation and main switch rooms are contiguous.
Sub-mains and Distribution Switchboards

a.
Separate submains originating from the main switchboards
shall be distributed to independent areas (i.e. fused T offs shall
not be used as part of the electrical distribution system) via
vertical riser shafts. The submains shall generally be run on
cable trays / ladders with fire protected cable, equal to MIMS,
used for required essential services and where referenced by
statute. Protection shall be use of MIMS cable, or approved
equal method, where physical damage is likely.
b.
All submain and sub-circuit cabling shall be low flame toxicity to
minimise the fire and toxic fumes risk within the complex.
c.
Separate distribution boards shall be provided for each 1000m2
of floor area and each physically segregated area. It is
expected that distribution boards will centrally be located in
each area and zoned essential and non essential as applicable.
d.
Cabling distribution provisions shall be via accessible means to
provide for future flexibility and adaptability.
e.
Where a light well or public atrium style area separates two
areas the two areas shall be considered physically separated to
avoid sub-circuit cabling running through public areas or areas
of limited access for future cabling.
f.
All submains and distribution boards shall be sized to carry full
load and 20% spare capacity with a maximum of 2.5% voltage
drop at the termination point of the submain.
g.
Full size neutrals shall be provided for all submains including
those serving mechanical plant and lifts.
P
iv.
Risers
a.
Where the facility is a multi-level facility the risers shall be on a
common vertical plane.
b.
Where distribution boards are located within the riser cupboards
the cupboard shall have direct access to any underfloor and
overhead cable routes. Separate distribution board shall be
provided for each 1000 m2 of floor area however the submains
shall be run in the common riser and single point of isolation
provided for each floor at that floor.
c.
Electrical rising submains shall not be located within duct space
shared by other services such as fire mains, gas mains,
hydraulic or communications services.
d.
The following requirements are common to all electrical risers:
Bunding shall be provided on each level to prevent
ingress of water into the riser system; bunding is
considered necessary regardless of vicinity of water
sources such as cleaners cupboards or tea preparation
areas as water from events such as activation of sprinkler
systems need to be prevented from entering the riser.
All power risers shall be fitted with cable ladders / tray
mounted on unistrut fixings to space the tray off the wall.
All trays / ladders to be sized with 30% spare capacity.
P
149
SECTION D
D.
Sub-circuit Cabling
i.
Cabling shall be confined to the floor from where the cabling
originates and slabs are preferably not to be penetrated to facilitate
sub-circuit cabling.
ii.
It is envisaged that a combination of the following methods will be
used:
Large open plan office areas power poles (or raised floor).
Small office areas skirting duct (note due to depth requirements
of data jacks 32 mm deep skirting duct is not acceptable).
Courtrooms in floor accessible ducting system with separation
for power and communications cabling (150 mm), minimum of 30%
spare spacing, easy access for rewiring.
iii.
Where skirting ducts or ducts within soft partitioning is used, the
associated ducting shall be manufactured to meet Australian
Standards and facilitate all necessary earthing, cable bending radius,
including Category 7 communications cables and cable system
separation requirements.
iv.
Number of outlets connected to a final sub-circuit shall be limited to
60% of capacity of the protective device with load calculated based
on AS / NZS 3000:2000 maximum demand calculation or actual
equipment load, which ever is greater.
v.
Circuiting of outlets shall separate equipment types.
vi.
Cable support system shall be catenary easily accessible through the
ceiling cavity and below other building services.
E.
General Power
i.
General power outlets shall be provided to meet the functional
requirements of each area and to power all equipment provided. Two
double GPOs shall be provided to each workstation. Power outlets
shall be provided in resource rooms, reproduction rooms, utility
rooms, media facilities, staff, communications and IT rooms and the
like to meet the functional requirement. Power outlets shall be
provided in Courts to provide for all equipment specified and to meet
the functional requirement of the occupants.
ii.
RCD protection systems shall be provided to all general purpose
power outlets throughout, in custody areas, public spaces and to
meet workplace OH&S regulations in the courts, back of house and
amenities areas.
iii.
RCD protected cleaners / maintenance power outlets shall be
provided throughout the Facilities to Occupational Safety and Health
Regulations. A minimum of one RCD protected outlet shall be
provided within each plant room, electrical and communications room
/ cupboard. Provide additional outlets in each area to satisfy cleaning
requirements e.g. physical length of equipment power lead as
obstructed by furniture etc.
iv.
The cleaners outlets shall be connected to dedicated cleaners
circuits shall be clearly identified by colour coding and labelling.
v.
Outlets in offices and work areas / workshops shall be located in
accordance with Workplace OH&S regulations, ergonomic
considerations and in a flexible arrangement convenient to desk and
bench layouts and heights. It is expected that outlets shall be located
above desks and benches or within table boxes accessed from top of
table.
vi.
The Consultant shall liaise with the Superintendent (Architect) to
determine the final allocation and location of outlets.
150
SECTION D
vii.
Some power outlets (and associated communications outlets) for the

connection of wireless data transmitters, may require the mounting of
a number of power (and communications) outlets at high level.
Lighting
i.
The lighting system shall complement the architecture providing an
aesthetically pleasing safe and pleasant environment.
ii.
Lighting design for the courtrooms shall provide vertical illuminance
and modelling to ensure that the faces of all participants are
adequately illuminated to recognise facial features without
shadowing. For example strong vertical point sources such as
dichroic or metal halide downlights are not recommended for use in
these areas.
iii.
The exterior lighting shall be provided to all external areas taking into
consideration security, safety, functional, energy efficiency and
aesthetic requirements of each area including requirements of the
CCTV system. It is envisaged that external lighting design shall be
based on the use of long life metal halide and fluorescent lamp
technology.
iv.
The lighting systems shall be designed in accordance with AS 1680,
AS 1428 and AS 1158 series of Australian Standards.
v.
The following table provides guidance regarding minimum
maintenance illuminance and functional notes for lighting in various
areas.
Table 8 Lighting Maintenance and Function
Area
Minimum Maintenance Illuminance
Judicial Chambers
320 lux
General Office
320 lux
Above Compactus Units
320 lux continuous lighting system with vertical
component ensuring lighting of the bottom shelf at
each section (it is envisaged that separate surface
mounted fittings are used for this task)
General Public Areas
Variable to meet the requirements of AS 1680, AS
1428, to suit CCTV and to enhance Architectural
design and other code requirements
Loading Bay and Car To AS 1680, AS 1428 and to suit the CCTV system
Parks
with increased lighting at entry and minimum
lighting of 20 lux throughout the car park
Courts
Adjustable (dimmable) up to 400 lux, note
requirement for vertical illuminance and modelling
Stairways
80 lux
Toilets
To AS 1428 with 150 lux and good vertical lighting
at the mirrors
Custodial Areas
To AS 1680 and noting requirement for vandal
resistance and harm minimisation
T
F.
vi.
vii.
viii.
The lighting system shall utilise energy efficient light sources and be
based on technically advanced but proven technical solutions.
Lamps used in public areas, courts and office areas shall have colour
temperature of 4000 K minimum and colour rendering index of 85 or
greater.
Office area and judicial chamber lighting design shall be based on
recessed fluorescent luminaires with low brightness semi specular
open cell paraboire louvre with minimum downward light output ratio
(DLOR) of 0.65, designed to AS 1680.
151
SECTION D
ix.
Where discharge luminaires are used for general lighting e.g.

selected plant rooms, consideration should be given to the provision
of standby lighting shall be provided by adjacent luminaires using
lamps with immediate start i.e. tungsten standby lamps in discharge
luminaires shall not be used due to reliability and long term
maintenance considerations.
G.
Lighting Control System

i.
The lighting control system shall either be integrated within the BMS
system where applicable or be an independent system in areas such
as courtrooms, etc.
ii.
Dimming elements are to be considered for selected public areas
such as lobbies and areas where automatic daylighting controls
should be considered to harness energy saving.
iii.
Courtroom lighting shall be fully dimmable with separate scenes
provided for the following functions, the functions shall however be
fully programmable and adjustable to suit changing requirements.
The following scenes shall be provided as a minimum:
Minimum of four (4) different scenes of general proceedings;
Minimum of three (3) different scenes of presentations eg video
conferencing, data projection and video projection;
Cleaning;
Orientation (minimal base lighting during court hours only when the
courtroom is not in use);
Security.
iv.
All external lighting shall be controlled by PE cells and time clock
control.
v.
Movement sensors with programmable time function to be
incorporated for selected areas such as stair lighting, store rooms,
small meeting rooms and amenities areas, in addition to manual local
controls.
vi.
Lighting control requirements eg button size shall be provided to AS
1428 for accessible toilets.
vii. Lighting in security control room, and lighting within switchboard
cupboards and switch rooms shall not be connected to the lighting
control system.
viii. System interface requirements include the following:
Interface with access control system:
control car park and corridor lighting after hours i.e. turn
areas on to suit the person accessing the building;
Interface with the integrated court management system:
turn lighting on and off in courtrooms based on scheduled
events;
set the correct scene in a courtroom based on type of
proceedings scheduled.
Interface with the AV system control panel at each courtroom and
any conference rooms;
Interface with control system for motorised blinds e.g. any daylight
sensing is overridden by closed blinds or lighting is automatically
adjusted to a set scene if blinds are drawn;
H.
Emergency Evacuation and Exit Lighting

i.
An emergency evacuation and exit lighting system to AS 2293 and
the BCA shall be provided.
ii.
The luminaires shall be of the single point (self-contained) type and
be fully tested to AS 2293.
152
SECTION D
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
I.
Interface Requirement
The interface requirements listed below are not exhaustive and additional
information for each item is provided under the relevant sections:
Interface with BMS:
main switchboard instrumentation monitoring at each
load data centre;
distribution board metering;
lighting control system Management;
metering.
Interface with security system:
lighting control system.
J.
Custodial Areas
i.
General
The Custodial Areas shall be converted to allow independent
operation from the remainder of the building.
ii.
1.4
Emergency luminaires shall generally be of the non-maintained type

in which the lamp operates on emergency (battery) supply only, upon
failure of the normal supply.
Emergency luminaires shall not be incorporated in recessed
fluorescent luminaires, downlights, cove lighting or feature luminaires.
Combined emergency and normal fittings of sustained type can be
utilised in surface mounted fluorescent fittings in holding cells, fire
stairs, car parks, plant rooms and other back of house areas.
Exit luminaires shall be of the sustained type containing separate
lamps for normal (240 volt AC) and emergency (battery) operation.
The design shall ensure emergency evacuation lighting is provided in
front of each switchboard, above any security monitoring areas and
areas where cash is handled.
Emergency lighting shall be installed in all Custodial Area handling
areas.
Electrical Supply
a.
The sally port, lift lobby areas and the Custodial Area are to be
supplied from a local area distribution board(s). The lift(s) shall
be fed from the essential services chassis of the switchboard
and is effectively a separate supply.
b.
The Custodial Area shall be provided with its own metered
switchboard independent of other areas. The sub-main for the
Custodial Area DB shall originate from the building risers.
Electronic Security
A.
General
i.
required for the electronic security systems.
ii.
The electronic security system components include:
system control system;
access control system;
lift car security / access control;
intruder detection system;
alarm monitoring system;
duress alarm;
security communications systems;
153
SECTION D
CCTV system;
Custodial Area system;
all associated power supplies including minimum of 2h battery or
UPS backup for all system components;
operational integration of the CLC building security system.
B.
Standards
In addition to the compliance requirements detailed in the general section of
this Design Brief, the works shall comply with the following:
AS 2201;
ACA;
The Western Australia Police Department; and
Commercial agents, licensing requirements for designers and
installers.
C.
Durability and Design Life

A.
The electronic systems shall have adequate durability to achieve
a normal industry standard design life, without requiring undue
maintenance.
B.
All associated cabling and power systems, including UPS, shall
be designed for minimum design life of 20 years.
C.
Minimum design life for any batteries associated with the system
shall be 5 years.
D.
Maintainability
D.
The electronic system shall be designed to allow maintenance
activity to all equipment.
E.
all concealed space equipment.
F.
The system shall have distributed logic and equipment
termination facilities installed on a floor by floor basis to allow
disabling of minimum services and without accessing any other
part of the building during maintenance and refurbishment.
G.
The system shall be designed such that in the event of
refurbishment / maintenance works, the main system and all
unaffected areas shall remain fully operational. Individual system
backbone cabling shall be provided to each floor or duty and
redundant backbones shall be provided throughout the
Facilities.
E.
Flexibility
H.
The electronic system shall be constructed to allow flexibility for
future expansion and refurbishment. Data gathering panels shall
be provided at each level functional area to avoid disruption to
unaffected areas during any maintenance or refurbishment
works.
I.
The system shall be designed to allow for future refurbishment of
the building and serve additional equipment such as door access
control. The system shall allow for a minimum of 6 future
additional door controllers on the court levels and four (4)
additional door controllers at all other levels to be installed on
each floor.
These provisions shall include the following
provisions:
I/Os for each future door at the data gathering panels

ready for the capacity at head end.
154
SECTION D
All conduiting provisions necessary to get cabling to the

security riser without disrupting core area or other fixed
ceilings.
F.
Sustainability
The system shall be designed to minimise the number of cables used,
length of final cable runs and the need to upgrade cabling to facilitate
emergency technologies during the design life period.
G.
Security Management
i.
The electronic systems shall provide immediate intelligence on
conditions about the site. Information from activities about the
Facilities shall be gathered via electronic devices and transmitted via
a dedicated security system data communications network to control
centres in the building and Custodial Areas as applicable.
ii.
The system is to be configured to allow security activity associated
with alarm and access control function to be enunciated only in the
security area responsible for providing the response.
iii.
The system shall be capable of transmitting selected alarms offsite to
a commercial security monitoring bureau after hours.
H.
Security Control System

i.
The system shall consist of a central processor(s) and distributed
processing field terminals. Should the central processor unit(s) fail,
the system shall be capable of storing limited system data and control
information of the standalone operation of access control readers,
alarm monitoring terminals and output functions.
ii.
Colour graphic display terminals and operator keyboards shall be
provided to enable clear and simple display of all security activity
including alarm test, display maps and response text.
iii.
In operation, the keyboards will only be required for the
reconfiguration of system parameters or the generation of system
reports. Control buttons are to be provided to enable alarm
acknowledgment and reset functions.
iv.
Display terminals and keyboards are to be provided in the following
locations:
Security command centre; and
Custodial Area central control desk.
v.
Disk storage facilities shall be provided to record historical data of
alarms, events, card transactions and system faults. Search and sort
facilities by date, time and transaction shall also be provided.
vi.
Indexed retrieval facilities shall be provided for accessing file
information such as:
Records of staff details and security authorisations;
Complex location diagrams showing all security and emergency
equipment including fire hose reels and extinguishers;
Alarm text and services information text;
Required action text; and
Card holder data and card reader data.
vii. Location diagrams and required action text shall be automatically
displayed on occurrence of the relevant alarm event.
viii. No record of a security alarm shall be lost from the system until
properly actioned.
ix.
A summary of all outstanding alarms and requests shall be provided
and all alarms reset by the security operators shall be logged along
155
SECTION D
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
with ID. A reminder of the total number of outstanding alarms shall

be displayed at al times.
All commands executed via the keyboards shall be logged to disk.
The system shall be capable of expansion and of supporting
additional operations or administrative terminals if required.
Hard copy printer facilities shall be provided at each operators
terminal.
The facility to prioritise and categorise alarms shall be provided.
Isolation of continuously troublesome points shall be possible via the
keyboard, but a reminder that points isolated shall remain on the VDU
at all times.
All operator / machine communications shall be in plain English. No
special user skills or operator interpretations shall be required.
I.
Access Control System

i.
An electronic access control system shall be provided to enable
control and monitoring of public and staff throughout the Facilities.
ii.
The systems shall consist of access readers, electric door strikes,
door monitors and exit buttons located on doors to manage
movement within and between the separate circulation systems
according to user profile.
iii.
Electric locking shall be provided, fire stair doors complete with fire
stair intercom system to facilitate BCA re-entry requirement. Break
glass facilities shall also be provided if required by the design.
iv.
Conduiting provision shall be provided for all fire stair doors on all
levels to facilitate installation of future additional access control.
J.
Alarm Monitoring System

i.
An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to indicate
unauthorised access to nominated areas. Forced door alarms, door
ajar and tampering conditions shall be reported to the control system
through the use of magnetic reed door contacts and supervised alarm
circuits.
ii.
Doors required to be monitored are as follows:
All perimeter doors, openable windows and access hatches
(including rooftops);
Fire escape doors at each level;
Plant room doors including any communications rooms;
Service cupboard doors in public accessible areas;
Electronically controlled doors; and
Perimeter doors to Custodial Area.
K.
Duress Monitoring System

i.
A duress monitoring system shall be provided to enable the
monitoring and annunciation of personal duress alarms.
ii.
The monitoring system shall indicate normal, duress and tamper
conditions and shall be provided but not limited to the following
locations:
Security command centre;
Custodial Area Control Centre;
Courtroom (judicial bench and Associates Bench);
Public reception and information desks;
All registry counters;
All reception desks;
Remote witness areas;
Any cash handling areas;
156
SECTION D
iii.
iv.
L.
Custodial Area Reception;

Custodial Interview Rooms;
Each judicial chamber and judicial ante rooms.
A separate duress communication panel is to be located in each of
the courtrooms and Custodial Areas communicating with the security
command centre and Custodial Area Central Control Desk
respectively.
Duress systems in courtrooms may be used to activate other systems
or measures such as but not limited to electronic locks and video
surveillance, in order to prevent an escape by a PIC or to assist in
controlling such a situation.
Intruder Detection System

i.
An intruder detection system consisting of volumetric movement
detectors shall be provided to enable protection of specific high risk
areas of the Facilities.
ii.
The system shall form a part of the alarm monitoring system.
iii.
Areas of the Facilities to be provided (but not limited to) with intruder
detection are:
Any cash handling and storage areas;
Property store / archives;
Exhibit Stores;
Any storeroom where weapons are kept;
Judicial master stations.
M.
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)

i.
A colour CCTV system shall be provided to enable monitoring of
activity within specific areas of the Facilities.
ii.
The CCTV system shall be designed to allow operation by nontechnical security personnel and shall consist of a number of fixed
and manoeuvrable (tilt, pan, zoom etc) colour cameras connected to
display monitors in security command centre and the central control
desk in custodial areas. Each areas system is to be operated
separately but integrated.
iii.
Cameras shall have real time digital recording capabilities and be
provided (but not be limited) to effectively view the following areas:
Building entries;
Public foyers and reception;
Secure car parks;
Cells;
Custodial Area lift;
Custodial Area entry;
Custodial Area.
CCTV INTEGRATION
Integrate CCTV monitoring equipment in existing surveillance systems and link
them to artificial intelligence software for enhancement and analysis which
provides features contained in the Functional Specifications.
Systems that will also allow the video feed from existing cameras, including pan,
tilt, zoom systems, to be used to unify closed circuit feeds to generate single
screen images from multiple cameras and should be able to move through the
images or views.
Analyse zones, object characteristics and object time in zone.
157
SECTION D
ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS:
The intelligent video image analysis system shall be capable of performing the following
essential functions:
Perimeter Breach and Detection - The system shall be capable of:
detecting an intrusion or movement within a specified area or across a specific

perimeter;
detecting human sized intruders while ignoring small animals and birds;
detecting human sized intruders while ignoring vehicles, or vice versa;
using direction(s) of approach as an alarm criteria;
counting the number of objects that have passed through an area at any given
time;
support multiple areas of interest and multiple directions on any camera.
differentiating between humans, vehicles, and small animals, etc.
producing graphs to represent the frequency of traffic in any direction or export
the information to a spreadsheet application.
operate with an accuracy exceeding 98%, unaffected by various lighting and
environmental conditions including those caused by shadows; weather, global
and local light changes, headlights, reflections and movement caused by wind;
detecting a person slipping or falling to the ground. Similarly the system shall be
capable of detecting a man down situation.
detecting loitering within a cameras field of view.
configurable time delays that a person or object spends within the scene before
they are classed as suspicious.
Left / Removed Objects The system shall be capable of:
detecting left objects. The user shall have the ability to configure the detection
time to suit the environment, from seconds to minutes or hours.
detecting multiple objects that are left stationary in a scene.
performing the detection in busy or crowded environments despite constant
movement or the object being regularly obscured.
the system shall be able to detect stationary objects that are less than 3% of the
size of the image.
the system shall be capable of detecting the removal of objects.
the system shall be capable of performing the detection in busy or crowded
environments despite constant movement or the object being regularly obscured.
the user shall have the ability to configure the detection time to suit the
environment, from seconds to minutes or hours.
the system shall be able to detect the removal of objects that are less than 3% of
the size of the image.
Vehicle Movements - The system shall be capable of:
detecting parking violations in busy or crowded environments despite constant

traffic movement or the vehicle being regularly obscured.
the user shall have the ability to configure the detection time to suit the
environment, from seconds to minutes or hours.
the system shall be able to detect parking violations where the vehicle is less
than 3% of the size of the image.
the system shall be capable of detecting graffiti or vandalism.
158
SECTION D
the system shall be capable of performing the detection in busy or crowded

environments despite constant traffic movement or the vehicle being regularly
obscured.
the system shall be able to detect incidents of graffiti or vandalism that are less
than 3% of the size of the image.
General Characteristics The system shall be capable of:
understanding the perspective in the scene;

detecting the loss of video on one or more cameras;
detecting camera incompetence, i.e. if environmental conditions reduce contrast
or visibility in the scene, and will alert the operator. The system shall continue to
operate under incompetent conditions.
Alarms and reporting
the ICE system must be capable of sending alarms and reporting information
generated from the analysis software to a range of dedicated and multi purpose
systems and devices including control stations, email, mobile telephone and
pager services.
Scheduling of Filters
filters shall be configured to allow activation at a preset time based on a

schedule. The schedule shall allow for daily, weekly, or monthly configuration.
Archiving - All events/alarms shall be digitally archived for future review. The Consultant
shall detail the time period that archived recordings are maintained.
the system shall allow the user to configure the pre- and post- record times for an
event.
when reviewing archived images the system shall support standard video
recorder functions including fast forward and rewind.
images shall be capable of being exported to email, disk, or even printers. Video
streams shall be capable of being exported to external storage devices.
all archived images shall include both date and time stamps.
the system shall support auto-archive operation where each alarm is
automatically archived and cleared. Once the alarm is cleared the object is
accepted into the background and the system continues operation.
Replay Options - The system shall be capable of:
instantly replay an event that has been detected.

allowing the operator to view the conditions prior to the alarm or event.
When multiple alarms occur within a scene an operator shall be able to select the
desired alarm and jump to the time prior to this specific event or alarm.
The system shall allow the user an option of archiving the event for later review
or to discard the alarm information.
User/Operator Authority Hierarchy
the system shall support multiple level of authority, such as administrator, user,
operator, and technicians.
159
SECTION D
Video Image Analysis Software
the system shall have a scalable architecture capable of being either centralised
or fully distributed.
authorised users shall be able to monitor the system from different locations
remotely.
all images in a distributed environment are to be transmitted securely.
the system will be open architecture such that it is able to operate with inputs
from any camera, run on any PC computer and interface with any digital recorder
(DVRs or NVRs) or encoders/ decoders. The system will not require proprietary
hardware and shall easily integrate with existing CCTV infrastructure.
the ICE system shall be capable of internet, mobile and wireless operation.
the system shall support analogue, digital, IP or USB cameras simultaneously
using Bitmap, JPEG, MJPG or MPEG4 formats.
the camera may use either PAL or NTSC protocols. Similarly the system shall
support encoders using Bitmap, JPEG, MJPG or MPEG4 formats.
ADD VALUE FUNCTIONS

The following functions would add value to the solution and would be considered during
the evaluation process:
Moving Object/Running Persons - The system shall be capable of:
detecting running within a cameras field of view.

capable of being customised to detect patterns of movement that are deemed
suspicious or abnormal. The relative speed that classifies a person as running
shall be configurable (relative to normal walking speed).
Overcrowding - The system shall be capable of:
capable of detecting overcrowding or congestion.

Able to count the number of people within a user-defined area of interest in realtime.
The user shall be able to set the threshold for the number of people that can
occupy the area before it is deemed as overcrowded.
provide an alarm if the number of people within the region exceeds the threshold
established by the user.
Reports of average counts for given times shall be exportable to a spreadsheet
application.
Frame Rates
the system shall not require frame rates higher than 6 frames per second for
analysis.
160
SECTION D
A.
Weapons and Unauthorised Articles Detection Systems alternatives

may be proposed but reference should be made to Section C. Court
Accommodation Specifications.
i.
Walk Through Metal Detection System
Metal detection systems shall be walk through, multi zone, pulse
induction type coupling with NIJ Standard - 0601.02. Equipment
shall be of a standard and capacity of the PMD2 Elliptic Multi
Zone Metal Detector or equivalent.
ii.
X-Ray Scanners
X-Ray Scanners shall be tunnel type suitable for checking hand
carried articles and packages. They shall be high penetration
type suitable for detecting organic, un-organic and metal
materials. System shall be at least 140KV peak with automatic
scanning and image enhancement. Equipment shall be of a
standard and capacity of the L3 Security and Detection Systems
PX-M or equivalent.
iii.
Hand Held Metal Detectors
Hand held metal detectors shall be suitable for more detailed
scanning of a person or item after walk through metal detection
system has raised alarm. They shall also be suitable for individual
scanning of people and articles at secondary security check
points.
iv.
Hand Held Contraband Detectors
Portable hand-held contraband detectors shall be suitable for
detection of explosives and narcotics by vapour sampling and/or
particle sampling on an individual or specific article. Equipment
shall be of a standard and capacity of the GE VaporTracer or
equivalent.
B.
Associated Building Works

Allowances shall be made for the provision of works by other services that
will be required to support or interface to security and communications
systems as follows:
Purpose built consoles for each control room;
Provision of cable access and penetrations;
Provision or door frame cut-outs for the installation of electric

latches;
Provision of master key locking system; and
Provision of suitable door closers and latches to suit access

control doors.
C.
Interface Requirements
The access control system shall provide inputs to the lighting control system
to allow the following as a minimum interface. Refer to individual system
sections, such as lighting control, BMS etc for further detail:
On demand, after hours lighting in the car park areas i.e. when
card is presented at gate / door selected full lighting to dedicated
(pre-programmed) keys is turned on as well as the preferred
lighting allocated to the card holder.
Lighting control system for setting of scenes to suit particular staff

requirements based on preferences set for the card holder.
Clock for building engineering services.
Building telephone backbone system for external alarms.
Communications room(s) and UPS room(s) alarms.
Court management system.
Court personnel database.

161
SECTION D
i.
D.
Transfer of any Custodial Area alarms after hours to the main

security control centre.
Existing building security and CCTV systems.
Lift controls.corridors on ground floor and basement areas;
Jury spaces;
Offices with external windows on ground floor; and
Public areas (including registry).
Volumetric detectors shall be configured to effectively cover the entire
area specified.
Security Communications
An intercommunications system shall be provided to enable direct
secure communications between security staff and visitors requiring
access into restricted areas.
ii.
Locations to be served (but not limited to) by intercoms are as
follows:
Entries from public to secure areas;
Building entries;
Security air locks;
Custodial Area lifts;
Custodial Area sally port;
Secure car park entry; and
Within Custodial Areas.
iii.
The intercommunications system shall provide the following features:
A call from a field station shall be initiated by the operation of a
single push button, once connected operation shall be hands free.
Master stations shall be multi-call with a handset for privacy and
indicator lights to indicate incoming calls.
i.
E.
Security Risers and Space Requirements Within the HIC Building

General
The following requirements are common to all risers:
security risers and associated equipment rooms shall be locked
and monitored.
bunding on each level to prevent ingress of water into the riser
system; bunding is considered necessary, regardless of vicinity of
water sources, such as cleaners cupboards or tea preparation
areas, as water from events such as activation of sprinkler system
needs to be prevented from entering the riser system.
system riser shall be fitted with cable trays.
all tray / ladder fixing shall be external to the tray / ladder i.e.
bolting tray to wall through the tray is not acceptable.
all trays / ladders to be sized with 30% spare capacity.
all security risers shall be provided with floor to floor fire rating.
all dimensions given re clear internal dimensions.
ii.
Security Control Room
a.
The security control room shall be separately secured from
adjoining circulation spaces and sized to house the main
security monitoring equipment, CCTV monitors, fire indicator
and EWIS MIMIC panels and personnel.
b.
The security control room shall include tea making and ablution
facilities.
iii.
Security Main Equipment Room
a.
Secured area immediately adjacent to the security control room.
i.
162
SECTION D
b.
iv.
F.
The security and main equipment room shall house the security
system server, recording equipment, security system UPS.
c.
The equipment room shall include space for further expansion
by minimum of two additional 19 racks.
Security Riser
a.
The security riser is used to house the security and CCTV
system cabling and equipment.
b.
The riser should be at a common vertical alignment throughout
the building, have lockable doors and have direct and secure
access to the building security equipment room.
It is
anticipated that the riser would be sized at approximately 1000
x 600 and be furnished with a cable tray and fire rating at each
level. Secondary data gathering panel cupboard may be
necessary where voids or similar elements divide areas to
minimise equipment cabling in ceiling spaces of public lobby
areas.
Power Supply Requirements

The security system and all associated field devices shall be
connected to a dedicated power system not interconnected to any
other electrical system outside the main switchboard. The security
system power supply shall be connected to the essential power
supply.
ii.
The entire system shall also be provided with secondary backup for
minimum of 2 hours by a dedicated UPS or integral, monitored,
batteries.
iii.
The UPS shall be sized to provide full load all equipment in the
system, including CCTV cameras, for minimum of 2 hours.
iv.
The main processor shall be provided with secondary backup to AS
2201 or to Best Industry Practice whichever is greater.
i.
G.
1.6
Custodial Area Requirements

i.
General
The Custodial Area, including any existing areas utilised at the
CLC Buildings shall comply with the requirements detailed in the
Western Australian Police Building Code 3.0 for Custodial Areas.
ii.
Required Systems
The following systems need to be provided:
Cell alarms;
Cell intercom;
CCTV system and associated monitoring and recording facilities;
Duress alarm system.
Fire Services
A.
General
i.
a.
The following performance description relates to the provision
required for the fire system and proposed objectives.
b.
The following systems (and not limited to) are required under
the BCA deemed to satisfy provisions. The installed systems
may be modified or omitted if the performance requirements of
the BCA are met as well as approval from the Approval
Authority and FESA.
Water supply;
163
SECTION D
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Fire sprinkler system;

Fire hydrant system;
Fire hose reel system;
Fire detection system;
Emergency warning and intercommunication system;
Portable fire extinguishers;
Fire control centre.
Standards
The fire system for the building shall be installed in accordance
with the requirements of the statutory authorities, Approval
Authority, FESA, the following Australian Standards and the
standards outlined in following sections. The standards outlined
are as a guide and the fire systems shall be designed to all
relevant standards:
Building Code of Australia
AS 2118 Part 1
AS 2419 Parts 1 and 3
AS 1221
AS 2441
AS 1670 Part 1
AS 2444
Custodial Guidelines Section Western Australian Police Building
Code 3.0 Planning Guidelines.
a.
The fire systems shall have adequate durability to achieve a
normal industry standard design life as outlined below, without
b.
The fire pipe work infrastructure shall be selected of materials
to obtain the 40-60 year design life. Electronic fire equipment
and fire equipment under mechanical loads such as pumps and
motors shall be selected to obtain a serviceable life of at least
25 years.
Maintainability
a.
The fire system shall be designed to allow maintenance activity
to all equipment.
b.
all concealed spare equipment, particularly detectors.
c.
The sprinkler system shall have isolation / drainage valves
installed on a floor by floor basis to allow disabling of minimum
fire protection services during maintenance and refurbishment.
d.
The hydrant system shall be designed such that in the event of
refurbishment / maintenance works that at least 50% of the
hydrant services remain operational. The hydrant service shall
be designed to incorporate ring mains where practicable.
Flexibility
a.
The fire system shall be constructed to allow flexibility for future
expansion and refurbishment.
b.
The sprinkler system shall be designed to allow for future
refurbishment of the building and serve additional sprinkler
heads. The Consultant shall allow for the additional sprinkler
head density of 25% to any / every sprinklered area within the
building.
164
SECTION D
c.
vi.
vii.
viii.
The FIP shall have capacity for an additional 25% expansion to

the detection system.
Sustainability
a.
The fire systems shall be designed to minimise water usage
during testing procedures.
b.
The test water from the fire pumps and sprinkler valve set shall
discharge back into the fire tanks to minimise water loss.
c.
Similarly any other test discharge shall be re-routed back to the
fire tank where practicable.
Custodial Areas
No exposed or unprotected fire services are to be installed in
Custodial Area cells, such that PIC can damage the equipment or
use the equipment to harm themselves or others. The design
shall comply with the Custodial Guidelines Section of the Western
Australian Police Building Code 3.0 - Planning Guidelines.
Existing Areas and Pedestrian Link
a.
The following areas form part of this Design Brief:
Pedestrian Link; and
the Custodial Area in the existing CLC Building including
the lifts and lift lobby.
b.
The Pedestrian Link shall have its services fed from either the
new Building or if capacity exists the existing CLC Building.
c.
The existing services installed in Custodial Areas located in the
CLC Building need not be brought up to current Australian
Standards and BCA requirements but shall comply with the
Custodial Guidelines of the Western Australian Police Building
Code 3.0 - Planning Guidelines.
B.
Fire Engineered Solutions

i.
Any fire engineer solutions shall be subjected to an independent fire
engineer peer review as well as review / approval by the Approval
Authority.
ii.
Any fire engineered solution shall not unduly affect the future
operation of the building, including its effects for future fit-outs,
renovations and extensions.
C.
Water Supply
i.
The water supply to the building shall be shall be in accordance with
the BCA, AS2118 part 1, AS2419 part 1 and 3 and Water Corporation
and the Approval Authorities requirements.
ii.
Fire services shall be connected to Water Corporation supplies.
iii.
Water Corporation water supply consists of a 200 mm service located
on the north, east and south side of the site.
iv.
A water storage tank facility and pumps shall be installed as part of
the hydrant / sprinkler systems or combined system.
v.
Enclosures for the sprinkler control valves and pumps shall be
provided in accordance with the BCA.
D.
Fire Sprinkler System

i.
A fire sprinkler system shall extend throughout all levels of the
building.
ii.
The fire sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with the
BCA, AS 2118, statutory and Approval Authority requirements and
FESA.
165
SECTION D
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Special consideration to be given to sprinkler design in and around

holding cell areas. Approved institutional type fire sprinklers shall be
used.
External sprinkler heads shall be provided in accordance with the
BCA to protect all openings that are within the limits of an adjoining
fire source feature.
The sprinkler system shall be designed with flow switches and
monitored isolation valves for each level. The flow switches shall be
equipped with remote test valves and relevant drain connections such
that the flow switches can be tested from the fire indicator panel. An
additional isolation valve and flow switch shall be provided to serve
the occupied spaces of any basements.
A fire brigade booster and suction assembly to be located at the main
entry to site in a location acceptable to FESA.
E.
Fire Hydrant System

i.
A fire hydrant system shall be installed throughout the building.
ii.
The hydrant system shall comply with the BCA, AS 2419.1, the
Approval Authority and FESA.
iii.
A fire brigade booster and suction assembly to be located at the main
entry to site in a location acceptable to FESA.
iv.
Consideration should be given to the installation of a combined
hydrant / sprinkler system.
F.
Fire Hose Reel System

i.
A fire hose reel system shall be installed throughout the building.
ii.
The hose reel system shall comply with the BCA, AS1221, AS2441
and the Approval Authority.
iii.
The fire hose reel system shall be combined with the fire hydrant.
G.
Fire Detection System

i.
An addressable fire detection system shall be designed in
accordance with BCA, AS 1670 and AS 1668 and the Approval
Authority.
ii.
The fire alarm system shall consist of the following equipment:
An addressable FIP located in a fire control centre. The panel
shall also be equipped with a red and black strip printer. For
operational reasons there may be a requirement to interface the
detection system of the new building with the existing CLC Building
hence the detection system of the new building shall be compatible
with the protocol of the CLC Building detection system.
Analogue addressable smoke detectors installed throughout the
building and within specific air handling plant as required by AS
1668; Detectors within the air-handling equipment shall be
addressable smoke probe type. The detection system is required
to activate the smoke control system and accordingly shall be
installed in accordance with BCA Specification E2.2a Clause 5.
Monitoring of sprinkler system flow switches and isolation valves
throughout the building.
Monitoring of all fire pumps and water tank level status conditions.
Afire fan control panel incorporating all AS 1668 fan controls
integrated within the fire panel.
A SFIP located in the security control room. The SFIP to have all
the facilities nominated about above for the FIP.
Smoke detectors for holding areas shall be either an approved
smoke detector and protection cage or VESDA system. The use
166
SECTION D
iii.
iv.
of the VESDA system shall be carefully considered as it gives

superior performance and removes all equipment outside the
holding cell.
The fire alarm system is to have an interface with the following
systems:
Building management system;
Security system;
Existing CLC building detection system.
The fire alarm system shall also be interfaced with the fire brigade
communication equipment via an alarm transponder unit adopting a
dedicated fire rated land line.
H.
Fire Detection System (VESDA)

i.
A VESDA system shall be installed into the new major computer
room/s. The suppression system may be required so that the
computer room can meet the reliability requirements outlined in
Information Technology Brief.
ii.
May be installed in holding cells.
I.
Emergency Warning and Intercommunication System (EWIS)

The emergency warning and intercommunication system in accordance with
AS 2220 shall be installed throughout the building and consist of the
following equipment:
Master ECP located in the fire control centre;
ECP located in the main security room. The ECP shall have the
same specification to the MECP such that evacuation can be
conducted from either panel. However the MECP shall override
the evacuation facility at the ECP. LED indication shall be
provided at each panel to indicate the active panel;
100 mm round flush speakers for all ceiling areas and horn
speakers in car parks and plant rooms;
Visual amber and red strobe warning lights to provide alert and
evacuation signals in areas of high back ground noise ie: plant
rooms etc.;
Warden phones located at MECP, ECP and adjacent to all

required exits;
Manual call points adjacent the warden phones.
J.
Gaseous Suppression System

A gaseous suppression system shall be installed into the new major
computer room/s. The suppression system may be required so that the
computer room can meet the reliability requirements outlined in Information
Technology Brief.
K.
Portable Fire Extinguishers

Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in accordance with BCA, AS
2444 and the Approval Authority.
L.
Fire Control Centre

i.
A fire control centre shall be provided in the building for emergency
use by FESA.
ii.
The centre shall include all fire panels, emergency warning and
communication panels, tactical fire plans and emergency procedure.
iii.
The fire control centre shall be in accordance with BCA specification
E1.8.
167
SECTION D
1.7.
Hydraulic Services
A.
General
i.
a.
required for the hydraulic system and proposed objectives.
b.
The hydraulic services works shall comprise the following
systems:
Cold water systems;
Hot water systems;
Soil waste and vents;
Gas services;
Stormwater system.
ii.
Standards
The hydraulic systems for the building shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements of the Authorities having
jurisdiction, the following Australian Standards and the standards
outlined in the following sections. The standards outlined are as a
guide and the hydraulic system shall be designed to all relevant
standards:
Building Code of Australia
AS/NZS 3500, Parts 1 to 5
AS 1432
AS 5601
Custodial Guidelines Section Western Australian Police Building
Code 3.0 Planning Guidelines.
iii.
a.
The hydraulic systems shall have adequate durability to achieve
a normal industry standard design life as outlined below without
b.
The plumbing pipe work infrastructure shall be selected of
materials to obtain the 40-60 year design life. Hydraulic
equipment under mechanical loads such as pumps, motors
shall be selected to obtain a maintainable service life of at least
25 years. Boilers shall be selected to have a service life of 1015 years.
c.
Consideration to the life cycle cost of fixtures and piping shall
be given due consideration. Consideration shall be given to
and not limited to the following options:
Copper vs uvpac pipe
Brass vs die cast tap ware
China vs acrylic sanitary
iv.
Maintainability
The hydraulic system shall be designed to allow maintenance
activity to all equipment. Special consideration shall be given to
maintenance required by all hydraulic equipment under
mechanical loads such as pumps and water heaters. All discreet
areas serviced by domestic hot and cold services shall have
accessible isolation valves to allow for maintenance activities.
Discreet areas refers to toilets, tea rooms, change rooms and
holding cells. Separate isolation shall also be provided to entire
floors on a floor by floor basis to allow for future refurbishments.
v.
Flexibility
a.
The hydraulic system shall be designed and installed to allow
flexibility for future expansion and refurbishment.
168
SECTION D
b.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
The domestic cold water system and hot water system shall be
designed to allow an additional 25% flow capacity. The 20%
additional capacity is to be allowed for incoming supplies, tanks,
pumps, plant room and main building risers.
c.
The soil and waste system shall be designed to allow an
additional 20% flow capacity. This additional capacity shall
extend downstream of the main soil risers.
Sustainability
The design of the hydraulic system shall incorporate sustainable
design practises. This is to be addressed in two main areas,
energy consumption for hot water generation and distribution of
water. Requirements are further outlined under system headings.
Acoustics
a.
The entire hydraulic design shall meet the acoustic
requirements set out in Section Acoustics and all relevant
standards. Pipe runs shall be minimised over acoustically
sensitive areas.
b.
The hydraulic system shall be free of water hammer under all
circumstances.
Custodial Areas
Special consideration shall be given to hydraulic design in holding
cell areas. The design of the hydraulic systems shall be designed
to minimise the risk of damage to the equipment and the risk of
harm that PIC can inflict on themselves and others. The design
shall comply with the Custodial Guidelines Section of the Western
Australian Police Building Code 3.0 - Planning Guidelines.
Materials
a.
Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 3500 and
the respective statutory authoritys jurisdiction.
b.
Pipe work material selected shall attain required fire rating and
acoustic properties.
c.
Plastic pipe work shall only be used in concealed UV protected
areas.
Existing Areas and Pedestrian Link
a.
The following areas form part of this Design Brief:
Pedestrian Link;
The Custodial Area in the existing CLC Building including
the lifts and lift lobby.
b.
The Pedestrian Link shall have its services fed from either the
new Building or if capacity exists the existing CLC building.
c.
The existing services installed in Custodial Areas located in the
CLC Building shall be modified as necessary to comply with the
Custodial Guidelines of the Western Australian Police Building
Code 3.0 - Planning Guidelines.
1.7 Cold Water Systems

(a) The domestic cold water service for the Building commences from the connection
to the authority water main located in the adjacent street complete with metered
extensions facility.
(b) Domestic water break tanks to statutory approval shall be installed.
(c) Capped off backflow prevention devices shall be provided on the ground floor
level for future connection by landscape.
(d) The systems shall incorporate all valves, tees, bends and automatic controls
necessary in accordance with AS/NZS 3500 and Local Authority requirements.
(e) Pipe work shall be copper tube (Type B) to AS 1432.
169
SECTION D
(f) Maximum and minimum operational pressures within the cold water system shall
be 500 kPa and 250 kPa respectively.
(g) Faucets and fixtures shall be of a suitable type and proven design. Operating
pressure and flow shall be controlled to minimise operating noise, water
consumption and risk of splashback.
(h) Allowance shall be made for the use of water hammer arrestors where
necessary.
(i) Provisions for the prevention of backflow to water mains shall be incorporated.
(j) Dead legs shall be kept to a minimum. Accessible isolation to be provided to all
holding cell facilities.
(k) Accessible isolation valves shall be provided to all holding cell facilities.
(l) Vandal proof fixtures shall be used throughout all public areas.
(m) Toilet cisterns shall be 6/3 flush capacity installed in hidden locations in all public
areas.
(n) Vandal proof and harm minimisation fixtures to be used in all Custodial Areas.
(o) Low flow basin fixtures shall be incorporated.
(p) Low flow shower heads and waterless urinals shall be considered on a case by
case basis.
(q) Urinal cisterns shall incorporate sensor controls for automatic flushing while
maintaining minimum water wastage.
2.7 Hot Water Systems
(a) Each hot water service shall include all necessary hot water pipes from the cold
water feed to all fixtures and fittings and faucets requiring hot water.
(b) The heat source and system arrangement shall be selected, to minimise lifecycle
costs. The system shall be tailored to the layout and requirements of the
building.
(c) The decision on the hot water generation system shall be based on lifecycle
running costs (15 years) taking into account capital costs, energy costs and
maintenance costs. The energy costs shall include hot water generation energy
costs, water reticulation energy costs, thermal loss energy cost and standing loss
energy cost.
(d) If two options provide similar costs, the system with the lowest projected CO2
emissions shall be selected.
(e) If a centralised hot water system is installed the hot water reticulation for each
system shall be circulated via strategically located risers through a fully insulated
flow and return system. The system shall be fully balanced at the top of each
riser. Circulation shall be achieved via pumps. Branch pipe work from the main
circulation system shall be kept to a length to prevent cold water dead legs and
unacceptable waiting time.
(f) All hot water pipe work shall be insulated.
(g) Expansion provision shall be allowed for.
(h) Air relief valves shall be positioned on risers to prevent potential system air
locking.
(i) Insulation used shall have a zero flame and smoke index.
(j) Pipe work shall be copper tube (Type B) to AS 1432.
(k) Maximum and minimum operational pressures within the hot water system shall
be 500 kPa and 250 kPa respectively.
(l) Allowance shall be made for the use of water hammer arrestors where
necessary. Dead legs on pipe work shall be kept to a minimum.
3.7 Soil Waste and Vent Systems
(a) The sanitary drainage system shall comprise the connection to the authority
sewer system located at the point of connection yet to be determined with
extension to new fixtures and fittings as required.
170
SECTION D
(b) The new sewer drainage system shall serve all new fixtures and fittings
throughout the building. Areas unable to gravitate to the authority system shall
be pumped to the authority drainage system.
4.7 Authority Supplies
(a) Where the ground is deemed unstable or water charged, all pipe work shall be
supported on a continuous reinforced concrete raft support in accordance with
AS/NZS 3500.
(b) The sanitary plumbing system shall comprise of the connection to all fixtures and
fittings requiring sanitary and waste plumbing and extension to the sanitary
drainage service through a network of stacks and vents situated at strategic
locations throughout the building.
(c) The system shall include all required inspection openings, traps, fittings and
ancillary items in accordance with AS/NZS 3500.
5.7 Gas System
(a) The system branches shall then reticulate to gas fired plant and equipment as
required. Each branch shall include a stop valve for isolation purposes.
(b) The system shall incorporate all valves, tees, bends, regulators, tail pipes and
sundry items in accordance with AS 5601 and Local Authority requirements.
(c) OPSO vented regulators shall be used at points where high gas pressures are
reduced to serve appliances of low pressures.
6.7 Stormwater System
(a) Stormwater drainage from the site shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements of AS/NZS 3500 and City of Perth.
(b) The system shall include all stormwater pipelines, pits and fittings necessary to
drain the water from the site.
(c) The stormwater drainage system comprises the collection of surface and runoff
from roof areas catchment areas of the site.
(d) Discharge to the stormwater system the stormwater shall be via retention tanks
and pumps as required to meet City of Perth requirements.
(e) The rainwater plumbing system shall comprise a series of downpipes serving
roof areas, gutters and balconies as required. The system shall be designed to
accommodate 1 in 100 year storm recurrences. Special consideration shall be
given to overflows.
(f) Subsoil drains shall be installed to relieve ground water pressure from new
perimeter footings, retaining walls and slabs as required.
(g) The car park drainage system shall comprise all stormwater pipelines, pits and
fittings necessary to drain water from the basement.
(h) Pits shall be located so as to provide full access for rodding and maintenance.
(i) The subsoil and car park drainage system shall be pumped to stormwater
drainage system if unable to gravitate to stormwater drainage system.
7.7 Interface requirements
(a) All pumps, meters and level switches shall be interfaced and monitored by the
BMS.
(b) Hydraulic services shall be interfaced with mechanical and fire services to
provide all required drainage.
1.8.
Mechanical Services
A.
General
i.
a.
of the mechanical systems and proposed objectives.
171
SECTION D
b.
ii.
iii.
The mechanical services works shall comprise the following

systems:
Air conditioning (central and or packaged plant);
Chilled water thermal plant and distribution (when
required);
Heating water thermal plant and distribution (when
required);
Heat rejection plant and distribution (when required);
Toilet exhaust;
General exhaust eg tea preparation areas and print
rooms;
Kitchen and caf ventilation (when required);
Custodial Area ventilation sally port;
Water treatment systems condenser, chilled and
heating water (when required);
Car park ventilation (when required);
Smoke hazard management and stairwell pressurisation
systems (when required);
BMS.
c.
The above mentioned systems shall include all associated
ductwork, pipework, controls, electrical works and noise and
vibration isolation systems.
Standards
The mechanical systems for the building shall be designed
installed and commissioned in accordance with the requirements
of all authorities having jurisdiction over the works and the
relevant Australian Standards and Codes.
The principal
Standards and Codes are identified as follows:
Building Code of Australia and all referred standards
AS 1228
AS1324.1
AS 1324.2
AS / NZS 1668.1
AS / NZS 1668.2
AS 1668.3
AS / NZS 1677.1
AS / NZS 3666.3
AS 4254
AS 4508
Western Australian Police Building Code 3.0 Custodial Design
Guidelines
Design Philosophy Requirements
a.
All mechanical systems shall be designed to meet the following
objectives:
To provide an environment that will contribute towards the
effective delivery of Justice to the State.
Provide safe, secure and efficient operation.
Maximisation of staff productivity.
Achieve lowest whole of life costs.
Provide environmental responsibility and energy
efficiency.
b.
In order to achieve these objectives, the following items shall be
considered in the design and installations:
172
SECTION D
Comfort;
Acoustic control;
Air quality;
Aesthetics;
Design life and durability;
Quality;
Maintainability;
Plant replacement/accessibility;
Adaptability;
Energy efficiency;
Personnel safety;
Environmental integrity;
Reliability.
iv.
Design Criteria
Table 9 - Ambient Thermal Conditions
Extreme ambient conditions within which
Maximum and minimum recorded
plant shall be required to continue to
temperatures for the site/location.
operate:
T
Outside ambient conditions in which air

conditioning shall be required to achieve
continuous maximum ratings of
performance
Internal conditions required to be achieved
at the above mentioned ambient conditions:
Office Type Areas:
Courts:
AIRAH comfort design conditions for

Summer and Winter for the site/location.
Summer
23.5oC
P
Winter
21.5oC
P
As with office areas but with user

adjustability of 2.5oC DB
P
Public Areas:
Jury Areas:
Corridors and Amenities:
Control Limits:
23.5oC
23.5oC
23.5oC
1oC
Relative Humidity:
40% to 60% by virtue of cooling coil

performance for sensible cooling. No
automatic control of humidity, coils shall be
selected for 50% RH under design
conditions
21.5oC
21.5oC
21.5oC
P
Air Velocity:
0.1 0.25 m/s measured
1.0 1.5 m above floor level
Air Quality
Maximum temperature gradient between

ankles and head
The air quality shall meet occupant health

and safety requirements. This is expected
to require evaluation of external pollutant
characteristics, indoor sources of pollutants
and determination of internal objectives.
The building will be designated nonsmoking
2oC
P
173
SECTION D
Table 10 Internal Loads
Lighting loads
W/m2
Refer to Electrical Section/Consultant for Allow minimum of 15 w/m
actual requirements.
Equipment
W/m2
Refer to Electrical Section/Consultant for
actual requirements.
Courts
Allow minimum of 20 PCs in courts
78 W per person sensible (Refer
People load/Numbers
Architectural Seating Layout)
52 W per person latent (Refer Architectural
Seating Layout)
Table 11 - Miscellaneous Items
Outside air
After hours operation

Control system
Filtration
Acoustic performance
Sensors
Custodial Area
v.
vi.
To comply with AS 1668 Part 2 (1991)

A performance approach shall be adopted
in determining ventilation rates appropriate,
varied as required to meet occupancy
needs using indicators such as carbon
dioxide monitoring. Consideration shall be
given to locate outside air and intakes to
maximise air cleanliness and quality
On a floor by floor, functional area and zone
basis
Building Management System with Direct
Digital Control
In accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52
76, minimum efficiency 80%, arrestance
98% and AS1668 Pt 2
The entire mechanical system shall meet
the acoustic requirements set out in section
F Acoustic & Sound Reinforcement
Specification
Sensors shall be concealed
Special consideration shall be given to
mechanical systems within the Custodial
Area and in particular in the cells, to
minimise damage to the equipment and any
harm that people in custody can inflict on
themselves and others. Special security
grilles shall be provided in the Custodial
Area to comply with Western Australian
Police Building Code 3.0 Custodial Design
Guidelines
Aesthetics
Mechanical systems shall be integrated within the concealed
ceiling spaces available to minimise impact on the aesthetics of
the interior spaces and the external envelope. Air diffusion and
other visible equipment shall be selected to provide the required
performance and to meet acceptable appearance criteria.
The mechanical systems shall have adequate durability to achieve
a normal industry standard design life as outlined below without
requiring undue maintenance (i.e. economic life).
174
SECTION D
-
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
Mechanical infrastructure systems e.g. ductwork, piping,

electrics etc 25-30 years.
Mechanical central plant 20-25 years.
Mechanical packaged plant 15-20 years.
Quality
Construction quality shall meet high quality commercial standards
for the duty concerned. Equipment and components selected
shall be of a type with proven performance.
Maintainability
a.
The mechanical systems shall be designed to allow
maintenance activity to all equipment.
b.
There shall be a minimum of maintenance of equipment and
systems within the areas occupied by the Judiciary such as
courts (e.g. no fans, filters, dampers and terminal devices shall
be allowed in the areas). Items within the occupied space shall
be selected for ease of component maintenance and
replacement of consumables.
c.
Plant and building systems routine preventive maintenance
shall be achievable without the need to access judicial or
custodial circulation routes.
d.
Access for annual performance verification of statutory
systems and for breakdown repairs or major alteration may be
achieved via access through judicial and custodial circulation
routes. System layouts shall be arranged to avoid the need to
access the judicial or custodial circulation routes more than
once annually in normal circumstances.
e.
Equipment shall be selected where possible of standard
manufacture and configuration to increase the familiarity to
service personnel and achieve long term availability of spare
parts and specialist backup. Selections shall demonstrate
avoidance of technical obsolescence whilst utilising mature
technologies.
f.
Centralised and packaged plant and equipment shall be
configured for ease of service access and to permit the removal
and replacement of major items or components with minimum
disruption and in the least time.
g.
Operation and alarm monitoring of all equipment status,
temperature and humidity points shall be possible via the BMS.
Adjustment of air conditioning temperature and airflow shall be
facilitated by simple controls. The BMS Head End Display shall
provide read-out of the set and actual sensed conditions at the
sensor location.
Plant Replacement
Consideration during design shall be given as to the ease of future
plant and equipment replacement.
Adaptability
a.
Systems shall be designed to facilitate the requirements of:
changes to occupancy and internal loads by 10% of the
initial capacity; and
b.
Systems shall be capable of maintaining operational
requirements for a range of varying conditions such as
occupancy and thermal loads and to operate with stability and
reasonable efficiency for the full range of operating conditions
from no load to full design load.
175
SECTION D
c.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
Provision for expansion of 20% of the initial capacity shall also

be provided within riser shafts to enable additional services to
be included in the future.
d.
Provision for change in plant infrastructure shall allow an
additional 15% of the plant space to that required by the initial
installation.
Energy Efficiency
a.
Consideration shall be given to minimise the energy
consumption of systems whilst not compromising their reliability
nor the amenity they provide.
b.
Free cooling potential and recovery of waste heat shall be
considered.
c.
Each energy consuming system shall be demonstrated to have
low total ongoing running and operating costs including energy
consumption costs. Life cycle costings for each form of energy
shall be provided.
Personnel Safety
a.
The completed installation shall comply with the relevant
Australian Standards called upon by Statute and Codes for
Building and occupational health and safety as interpreted and
applied by the Approval Authority.
b.
Handover training shall ensure the proper integration of the
installation with operator skill levels.
Environmental
a.
Refrigerant gases shall be selected with regard to their ozone
depletion potential and global warming potential to ensure the
minimum environmental impact.
b.
The refrigerant selected shall have the following qualities:
ozone depletion potential (ODP) < 0.055
global warming potential (GWP) < 2000 (100 years)
Reliability
a.
Mechanical plant shall be selected such that failure of any
single component shall not reduce the available capacity in
accordance with the following table:
Central cooling plant:
by 65%
(chillers, cooling towers, pumps)
Central heating plant:
by 50%
(boilers, pumps)
Independent air conditioning:
Critical spaces (such as computer rooms) N+1
b.
In addition, no central air handling unit or packaged unit shall
serve more than 25% of the courts.
Custodial Areas
Special consideration shall be given to the mechanical design in
holding cell and Custodial Areas. The design of the mechanical
systems shall be:
a.
Designed to minimise damage to equipment by PIC; and
b.
Designed to minimise damage PIC can inflict on themselves.
c.
Conform to the requirements of the Custodial Design
Guidelines.
System Types
The type of air conditioning system proposed for the project will be
based on Life Cycle Costing Analysis (LCC). The term of the Life
Cycle Costing Analysis shall be either 15 years or 25 years as
advised by the client. It is envisaged that small facilities
comprising five of less court rooms will be assessed on a 15 year
176
SECTION D
B.
C.
LCC and could be served by packaged plant systems subject to

confirmation by LCC analysis.
Thermal Plant (chillers, boilers and cooling towers - where required)
i.
Chilled Water Thermal Plant and Distribution System
a.
Water cooled chillers shall be utilised and these shall be located
within the plant room(s). The chillers shall cater for maximum
and minimum loads and the range between with stable
operation. They shall also operate economically under the full
range of load conditions. Chiller size and type (such as
centrifugal and screw) shall be ascertained to economically
cater for varying ranges of loads from out of hours or 24 hour
operation through to the peak loads within the restraints of
economic capital expenditure whilst maintaining stable
operation of the plant. The chillers shall be arranged for parallel
operation complete with individual bypass.
b.
The capacity of the chilled water thermal plant shall be
designed to cater for the peak building load with 20% spare
capacity.
c.
Chilled water shall be reticulated to the air handling units via
insulated pipe work.
ii.
Heating Water Thermal Plant and Distribution System
Gas fired boilers shall be provided to satisfy the building heating
load during early morning warm up. Hot water shall be reticulated
to the heating coils in the air handling units via insulated pipe
work.
iii.
Heat Rejection Plant
Heat rejection from the chillers shall be via a condenser water
system. This condenser water system shall comprise of cooling
towers and condenser water pumps to match the chiller
requirements including chiller spare capacity. The plant shall be
located so as not to cause a nuisance. The cooling towers shall
be designed, installed and maintained to AS/NZS 3666.
Air Conditioning Systems
i.
General
a.
The building shall be air conditioned throughout with the
exception of any car parks, plant rooms and the Custodial Area
sally port. It is envisaged this will be achieved by using a
combination of:
central systems; and or package plant systems
independent systems.
b.
The central systems shall serve all spaces with exception of:
kitchen / restaurant type areas; and
spaces requiring close temperature and humidity control.
c.
These areas shall be served by independent systems.
d.
The Consultant shall ascertain whether spaces requiring 24
hour operation shall be served by either central system or
independent systems on the basis of operational efficiency.
ii.
Central Systems
a.
Air conditioning to the building shall be provided by a variable
air volume central plant system but suitable alternatives may be
considered. The central plant comprising of AHUs and thermal
plant (including chillers, boilers, cooling towers and associated
equipment) shall be located within the plant rooms. Subsection Thermal Plant provides details of the thermal plant
requirements.
177
SECTION D
b.
c.
The air conditioning to the building shall be zoned to take

account of:
thermal loads; and
functionality of spaces.
These zones recognise different space utilisation, load
distribution and occupant comfort objectives. The objective
shall be to provide an appropriate level of zone control to
ensure design conditions are achieved in an energy efficient
manner.
Thermal Zones
The thermal zones shall be divided between perimeter
(north, south, east and west) and interior zones.
Thermal zones may be arranged vertically between
floors. Thermal zones are required to be designed in
such a way that comfort conditions are achieved
economically irrespective of the variance of the cooling
and heating loads throughout the Facilities.
Functionality Zones
1. The functionality zones shall be determined by space usage
and occupancy levels. Typical functionality zones being:
courts;
public areas;
jury areas;
library;
Custodial Area;
Judges chambers;
registry;
office areas;
lift motor rooms.
2. Functionality zones are not required to be served by
separate AHUs but can be grouped together on the basis of
like thermal and hours of operation requirements.
Functionality zones are required to be designed in such a
way that comfort conditions are achieved irrespective of the
variance of the cooling and heating loads throughout the
Facilities.
3. After hours control of each zone shall be provided by
selection of relevant AHU and control of respective
motorised dampers on the branch connections.
4. The BMS shall have the facility to monitor and override the
functions described above.
5. Each vertical bank of zones shall be served by dedicated air
handling units.
6. Conditioned air shall be distributed to the space via vertical
risers with branch connections to respective zones served by
variable air volume terminal boxes and diffusers.
7. Terminal boxes shall not be located within courts.
8. Return air shall be drawn from the space via the ceiling
plenum connected to return air riser shafts. Combined return
air shafts can be utilised however the shafts shall be located
to ensure return air paths do not cross court zones. The air
shall be either returned to the air handling unit or relieved to
outside through a relief air system. Return air to the AHUs
shall only be drawn from thermal and functional zones which
are in operation.
178
SECTION D
9. Acoustic transfer ducts shall be provided where required in
order to meet the acoustic requirements.
10. For economic operation, each unit, subject to life cycle
costing justification, shall have full economy cycle with
enthalpy control. In addition, air quality sensors shall be
installed in the return air systems to monitor CO2 and enable
the reduction in outside air when levels are below acceptable
limits.
11. Utilisation of economy cycle systems shall be based on life
cycle running costs (25 years) taking into account capital
costs, energy costs and maintenance costs.
12. An early morning warm up cycle shall be provided by a hot
water heating coil in each air handling unit. Perimeter zone
VAV terminal boxes shall incorporate electric heaters if
required to maintain space conditions throughout the zone.
13. Interior zone VAV boxes shall maintain space conditions
by reducing primary supply air from the air handling units
subject to satisfying the return air CO2 levels minimum
outdoor air requirements and minimum flow rate of 5L/s/m.
14. One thermal control zone shall be provided per maximum
of 3 perimeter offices with the same faade orientation and
similar equipment and occupancy loads. One thermal
control zone shall be provided per 120 m2 for the interior
areas.
Packaged Plant Systems
Air conditioning to the building will be provided by constant
volume package plant systems.
B
iii.
Package plant systems shall be:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
iv.
v.
vi.
Zoned similar to central plant systems.

Provided with after hours control to each unit and zone.
Controlled and monitored via a BMS System.
Provided with Acoustic transfer Ducts where required.
Utilises economy cycles in accordance with the BCA and/or
based on Life Cycle Costing.
f.
Utilise reverse cycle heating.
Independent Systems
a.
Independent air conditioning systems shall serve kitchen /
restaurant spaces or similar to minimise odour and
contamination to other parts of the building; and computer/IT
spaces requiring close temperature and humidity control.
b.
Spaces requiring 24 hour operation e.g. security control desks
etc may be served by independent systems on the basis of
operational efficiency.
Air Distribution System
a.
The air distribution shall promote a uniform climate via rapid
mixing of the incoming conditioned supply air with the room air.
b.
Alternatively, displacement ventilation principles may be
employed where the conditioned air meets comfort
requirements and enters at very low velocity at or near the floor
with warm polluted air being exhausted at ceiling level.
Custodial Areas
Air conditioning shall be provided to the Custodial Area utilising
the central air conditioning system or package plant systems.
179
SECTION D
D.
Smoke Hazard Management and Stairwell Pressurisation Systems

i.
Smoke hazard management and stairwell pressurisation shall be
provided in accordance with AS 1668 Part 1 and the requirements of
the Building Code of Australia.
ii.
For the Custodial Areas, the smoke hazard management system shall
also comply with Western Australian Police Building Code 3.0
Custodial Design Guidelines.
E.
Toilet Exhaust Systems

i.
A toilet exhaust ventilation system be provided in accordance with AS
1668 Part 2. Duty/standby fans shall be utilised on all central toilet
exhaust systems.
ii.
For the Custodial Area, the toilet exhaust system shall also comply
with Western Australian Police Building Code 3.0 Custodial Design
Guidelines.
F.
General Exhaust Systems

The general exhaust ventilation systems shall be provided in accordance
with AS 1668 Part 2. This shall provide ventilation to tea preparation areas,
print rooms, lift motor rooms and custodial areas. For the Custodial Areas,
the general exhaust shall also comply with Western Australian Police
Building Code 3.0 Custodial Design Guidelines.
G.
Car Park Ventilation Systems

If required car park ventilation systems shall control the concentration of
atmospheric contaminants to deemed safe levels in accordance with the
minimum requirements of AS 1668 Part 2 and Building Code of Australia. A
system of carbon monoxide detectors / analysers shall be used to enable
the ventilation system to run at reduced volume and hence reduce energy
consumption levels in non-peak times.
H.
Custodial Area Vehicular Access

Ventilation to this area shall consist of full mechanical exhaust using either
mechanical or naturally ventilated supply air make up as appropriate. The
ventilation shall be operated and designed in accordance with AS 1668,
Part 2 and Building Code of Australia. A system of carbon monoxide and
NO2 sensors/analyses shall be used to enable the ventilation system to run
at reduced volume and hence reduce energy consumption levels in nonpeak times.
B
I.
Kitchen / Restaurant Exhaust Systems

Kitchen / restaurant areas shall be ventilated separately in order to minimise
perceptible odour and contamination to adjacent areas. The ventilation
systems shall comply with AS 1668, Part 2.
J.
Other Related Services

i.
Other mechanical provisions may include:
Service area ventilation e.g. switchrooms, transformer rooms etc;
garbage area ventilation.
K.
Building Management System (BMS) and Controls

i.
A BMS shall be provided for control / monitoring of building functions.
All plant shall have DDC control. The system shall have a central
BMS control with intelligent outstations. Each outstation shall have
10% spare capacity.
180
SECTION D
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
The BMS shall consist of stand alone microprocessor based

controllers located throughout the building and connected via a
network to allow data to be transferred around the system. Current
generation personal computers shall be utilised to provide the
operator interface and user friendly software provided to facilitate
operation and monitoring of the building.
The system shall incorporate functions to enable data to be collected
and displayed in a number of formats to facilitate system
troubleshooting and fault diagnosis. Operation of the system shall be
performed primarily by a GUI and interactive grap screens.
The system shall be installed to control and monitor the following:
All mechanical services including:
all air handling systems including supply and return air
temperatures;
fan static pressures to enable fan status/failures to be determined
and alarmed;
all space temperatures, variable volume boxes;
space relative humidity and outside air temperatures in a sample
of areas;
air quality / CO2 levels in major air handling systems;
the chiller system, incorporating load limiting and chilled water
reset control by a high level interface;
all entering / leaving temperatures on the chiller and cooling tower
systems;
the cooling towers;
the boilers and associated heat exchangers;
all entering / leaving temperatures on the boiler;
various ventilation systems; and
all two speed or variable speed drives.
Various electrical services including:
all time and / or day light controlled lighting systems;
all other time controlled functions (eg. pumps);
alarm outputs from the emergency lighting installation and UPS
system;
main incoming energy meters to record and monitor building loads
and maximum demands; and
all electrical sub-meters, together with the main gas and water
meters.
Various hydraulic services including:
appropriate hydraulic alarms inputs including high / low level tank
alarms, pump run / fail status; and
load shedding outlets to allow shedding of electric water heating
systems for essential load as well as energy management
purposes.
Miscellaneous services including:
miscellaneous other items considered appropriate; and
alarm monitoring from lift and fire systems.
The system shall incorporate one head end workstations equipped as
follows:
Current generation PC
17 inch monitors
Colour printer (1 only)
Alarm printers (2 off)
Windows based software
BAS software (latest revision at time of practical completion)
P
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
181
SECTION D
L.
1.9.
MS Office
Modem for remote dial in
Modem for auto dial to pager
Provide software for remote PC terminal.
i.
All plant and systems (mechanical, electrical, fire, hydraulic, security
etc) shall utilise the same protocol as the BMS or include for suitable
protocol interfaces.
ii.
The interface requirements listed below are not exhaustive:
Chillers (high level interface);
Main computer rooms (high level interface);
Integrated court management system (high level interface);
Metering, including reporting facility, for all electricity energy
meters within the Facilities;
Lighting control system monitoring:
Fault monitoring;
Emergency lighting central monitoring system;
Security system, monitoring and alarm;
Lift system monitoring.
Structural
Design Codes and Standards
The building shall be designed in accordance with current Australian Codes
and Standards including, but not limited to:
AS 3600
AS 4100
AS 3700
AS 1720
AS/NZS 1170.0
AS/NZS 1170.1
AS/NZS 1170.2
AS/NZS 1170.4
Austroads Bridge Design Code
Main Roads Interim Bridge Design Loads
Building Code of Australia.
If Australian Standards do not cover particular circumstances, reference
shall be made to relevant ACI or British standards.
Durability
The building shall have adequate durability to achieve a nominal design life of
40-60 years without requiring undue maintenance. Durability shall be built into
the concrete structure through careful concrete mix design, attention to design
details and correct construction practice.
The Code criteria relating to durability shall be regarded as minimum
requirements, and the designer shall exercise appropriate judgement and
experience in order to achieve the desired outcomes.
Minimum exposure classifications for reinforced or prestressed concrete
elements as defined in Table 4.3 of As 3600 shall be as follows:
Surfaces of members in contact with the ground:
A2
182
SECTION D
Surfaces of members in interior environments:
Surfaces of members in above-ground exterior environments:
A1
B1
Reference Documents
Technical Note Geotechnical Recommendation, Tunnel Connection, New CBD
Court Project; URS; Doc No 08021-063-562/585-6028.0; 20 October 2003.
Geotechnical Investigation, Perth CBD Court Complex, URS, Doc. Ref. 08021062-562/585-F6073.0; 4 November 2003.
Minimum Design Loads
Dead Loads
Permanent Dead Loads
Structure dead loads to be calculated using:
concrete weight 24 kN/m3;
other material weights in accordance with AS 1170.1, Appendix A.

Superimposed Dead Loads
Ceiling and services:
courtrooms
0.5 kPa
other areas
0.3 kPa
Floor finishes:
toilets and wet areas 1.2 kPa (allows for 50 mm finished)
plant rooms 1.2 kPa (allows for 100 mm plinths on 50% of floor area)
terraces 3.0 kPa (allows for average 125 mm graded finishes)

Internal partitions:
lightweight partitions
1.0 kPa
permanent partitions to be determined based on actual material

weights and architectural plans and details
External faade:
curtain walling 1.0 kPa
other wall types to be determined based on actual material weights

and architectural plans and details
Live Loads
Courtrooms, jury rooms, registry, sheriff, interview, offices,
conference rooms - 4.0 kPa or 2.7 kN.
Stairs and landings, corridors, hallways, research library, lift
lobbies - 4.0 kPa or 4.5 kN.
File rooms - 5.0 kPa or 4.5 kN.
Cafeteria - 2.0 kPa or 2.7 kN.
Terraces - 5.0 kPa or 4.5 kN (terraces generally).
Terraces - 5.0 kPa or 31 kN (ground level terraces accessible to
wheeled vehicles).
Balconies - 4.0 kPa or 1.8 kN, or same as load on areas providing
access to balcony, if these are greater.
Slabs on grade - 10.0 kPa or 31 kN.
Plant or fan rooms - 5.0 kPa or 4.5 kN (unless plant loads are
more severe).
Lift motor rooms - 7.5 kPa or 4.5 kN (unless machinery loads are
more severe).
Car parks and vehicle ramps - 5.0 kPa or 31 kN (on elevated
decks and ramps).
Compactus zones - 10.0 kPa on slab areas, 7.5 kPa on tributary
areas to bands, beams, columns and cores.
Roofs (metal deck) - 0.25 kPa.
183
SECTION D
Roofs (concrete) - 3.0 kPa or 4.5 kN.
Other areas - in accordance with AS / NZS 1170.1.
Note that in line with common practice in major buildings, the
specified office floor loading is greater than the minimum required
by the Code. When combined with the allowance of 1.0 kPa for
lightweight partitions, it provides considerable flexibility for
accommodating moderately heavy items of equipment such as
small safes, clusters of filing cabinets, etc.
The structure shall be able to support all items of plant and
equipment required to fulfil the various services design briefs,
including tanks, BMU, masts, etc.
Live load reductions shall be determined in accordance with AS /
NZS 1170.1, Clause 3.4.2.
Wind Loads
Wind loads shall be determined in accordance with AS / NZS
1170.2 as follows:
Region - A1
Regional wind speeds Ultimate V1000 = 46 m/sec
Serviceability
V20
= 37 m/sec
Terrain category
= 3 (all directions)
Wind direction multiplier (Md)
= determine in
accordance with
Table 3.2
Shielding multiplier (Ms)
= 1.0
Topograp multiplier (Mt)
= 1.0
Terrain / height multiplier (Mz,cat)
= determine in
accordance with
184
SECTION D
Table 4.1(A)
Earthquake Loads
Earthquake loads shall be determined in accordance with AS / NZS 1170.4 as follows:
General structure type
= II
Importance factor (I)
= 1.00
Acceleration coefficient (a)
= 0.09
Site factor (s)
= 1.25
Earthquake design category
= C (Table 2.6 of AS /
NZS 1170.4)
Static analysis in accordance with Section 6 or dynamic analysis in accordance with Section 7
of AS/NZS 1170.4 is required.
The requirements for securing non-structural components as outlined in Section 5 of AS/NZS
1170.4 shall be adhered to.
Vertical Transportation Services
General
Scope of Systems
Standards
Vertical transport services are to be designed to the following
standards. The standards outlined vertical transport services
guide only and are to be designed to all relevant standards.
The Building Code of Australia
AS 1735, Parts 1-12
Vertical Transport services are to be available for 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Escalators
The escalators are to be designed to operate without
undue maintenance for at least 20 years based on a 16
hrs/day 5 days/week usage pattern.
Lifts
The lifts are to be designed to operate without undue
maintenance to the following minimums based on a 16
hrs/day 5 days/week usage pattern.
Cars and landing doors systems, buttons, indicators and
controls and finishes in lift cars - 15 years 16 hrs/day 5
days/week usage pattern.
Basic mechanical components, motors - 25 years.
Maintainability
Lifts are to be configured and installed in such a fashion that
allows routine maintenance of all lift components.
Sustainability
Energy saving management of lifts shall be controlled via the
master controller and the BMS. This includes the shutdown of
lights, motors etc while lifts are idle. Also energy saving brownout
and black out power modes shall be used.
Aesthetics
Lifts are to be furnished with high quality vandal proof finishes and easily cleaned wall, floor and
door finishes.
Passenger lifts shall be provided with protective blankets to prevent damage when lifts are used
to transport goods.
185
SECTION D
General Performance Requirements Lifts and Escalators
Lifts
Lift modelling and design shall be designed on a detailed functional analysis of the Courthouse.
Allowances shall be made for court visitors and peak traffic experienced in this type of facility.
The lifts shall achieve the following general performance ratings:
Maximum horizontal acceleration inside lift car of 15 milli-g, peak to peak, in the 1-10Hz
frequency range. The horizontal acceleration is to be measure on the lift car floor from side to
side and front to back.
Sound level within lifts, lift landings and adjacent to lift motor rooms are to be in accordance with
Section F Acoustic & Sound Reinforcement Specification.
Specific performance requirements are outlined under specific lift headings.
Public Escalators
Escalators may be installed as an alternative to lifts in all high
traffic public areas to facilitate high volume people movement. It is
envisaged that escalators will be installed to link foyer areas to
large courtroom areas.
Escalators shall be at least 1000 mm wide.
It shall be assumed that 95% of all inter-floor visitor traffic will use
the escalators during peak periods. There shall be no escalator
queuing time during these peak periods.
Control Systems
Lifts
The lift management control system shall be the latest product of microprocessor based lift
traffic control. The system shall have a level of intelligence to place lifts to ensure lift waiting
times are kept to a minimum.
There shall be a fully automated lift management system installed.
A car position panel shall be installed above all landing doors.
A programmable information display shall be installed in all lifts except the Custodial Area lifts.
Security
All lifts shall be provided by interface to the electronic card access control system enabling car
and specified landing calls at basement, transfer and chamber floors to be individually secured
as required by the building security system.
Custodial Area lift shall be capable of exclusive service operation and able to be individually
recalled to the main floor from a security control point.
Building Lift Areas
Lift Areas
General
The lift areas are to be designed to transport while maintaining physical separation of the 5
main types of building users as outlined below:
Public
Judges
Jurors
Custodial Area
A&CWS.
Separate lifts are to be installed to service these differing users as outlined below.
Public Lifts
The separate public lifts shall perform the following transport function:
Main entrance to courtrooms.
Link courtroom floors.
Access to controlled entry points in the judicial zone.

186
SECTION D
The public lifts shall meet the following specific performance criteria:
Average up / down peak waiting interval 31 seconds.
5 minute up peak handling capacity 13.3%.
Estimated car loading peak capacity 80%.

Judicial Lift System
The judicial lift system shall perform the following transport functions:
Join chambers floors;
Chambers to car park;
Public to chambers (secure);
Registry to chambers;
Registry and judges to courtrooms.

The lifts in the judicial lift system shall meet the following specific criteria:
5 minute up peak handling capacity 159%.
Estimated car load at peak capacity 60%.
Judiciary shall have the ability to use jury lifts, accessed directly off
the judicial circulation system, when not in use by jurors. The design
criteria for shared use by the judiciary shall be an average up / down
peak waiting interval of 43 seconds and a 5 minute peak handling
capacity of 159%.
Jurors Lifts
The separate jury lifts shall perform the following transport functions:
Jury waiting area to courtrooms.
Link jury areas of courtrooms.

Note: Persons who are yet to be entabled as jurors may be
transported in public lifts.
The jury lifts have to have the following specific performance requirements:
Peak transport people quantity full court jury contingent to all courts
(approx. 20 people).
Peak transport interval 20 minutes for all jury to be transported to

courts.
Estimated car loading 80%.

Custodial Area Lifts
The separate Custodial Area lifts shall perform the following transport functions:
PIC delivery area to Custodial Area.
Custodial Area to courts.
Custodial Area to Pedestrian Link.

The internal design of the Custodial Area lifts is to be considered as to whether they are to be
separated or open cars. The final design shall be determined by Custodial Area transport
operational procedures.
The Custodial Area lifts shall meet the following specific performance criteria:
Average up / down peak waiting interval not applicable.

Adult and Child Witness Service (A&CWS)
The separate A&CWS lifts shall perform the following transport functions:
A&CWS area to courts.

A&CWS lifts shall meet the following specific performance criteria:

CLC Custodial Area Lifts
General
The upgrade, management and maintenance of the 2 Custodial Area lifts located in the existing
CLC Building forms part of this contract.
187
SECTION D
The lift upgrades is to address 3 areas: the Project Companies duty of care; to allow usage of
the lifts by disabled persons and to improve the efficiency and quality of ride.
Description of Existing Systems
The existing lift services in the building comprise 2 lifts as detailed below.
Two (2) Custodial Area lifts.

The passenger lifts were installed by Elevators Pty Ltd (now KONE) around 1982/83.
Number of lifts
Two (Numbers 7
and 8)
Type of lifts
Geared overhead
traction
Control system
EICON
Drive System
Variable voltage.
Thyristor drive
Manufacturer
Elevators Pty Ltd
Year of installation
1982/83
Maintenance provider KONE Elevators
Load
1,696 kg
Speed
1.5 metres per second
Levels served
Two
Scope of Works
The following works shall be undertaken by the Contractor.
Duty of Care Upgrades
The following works shall be undertaken so as to fulfil the owners
Duty of Care obligations:
Provide earth leakage protection on general purpose
outlets on and within the lift cars.
Provide engraved registration numbers adjacent to each
lift main switch.
Provide evidence of plant registration adjacent to the
equipment.
Provide machine room emergency lighting.
Upgrade the lift car internal emergency lighting.
Provide hands free phone communication within the lift
cars.
Provide governor idler switches.
Provide hydraulic oil buffer actuation switches.
Provide car rooftop handrails.
Provide LMR hatchway handrails and guards.
Disabled Access Upgrades as per As 1735.12 and BCA
Provide new lift car handrail.
Install new infrared 3D door protection.
Performance Upgrades
The following works shall be undertaken to improve the
performance, efficiency and safety of the lifts:
Upgrade lift control and drive systems.
Provide new car door operators.
Provide new landing door locks and hangers.
Upgrade lift car interiors.
188
SECTION D
The lift control system shall be interfaced to the BMS. The BMS interface shall report all alarms
/ faults and log the aforementioned. Alarms shall be forwarded by the BMS to the security
system for notification of security personnel.
A phone system shall be provided to the Building Security Control Centre.
189
SECTION E
E.
1.
Information Services and Directional Signage

Overview
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.
The DotAG has a distinguishable corporate identity with a standardised

signage system. The corporate standard is not to be altered. A sign
manual has been prepared by the DotAG and is available from public
affairs.
Signage shall be integrated both externally and internally.
Signage shall be easily discernable, clear, complete and consistent.
Internally signage shall allow easy modification over time.
Signage shall be secure and vandal proof.
Signage shall comply with standards pertaining to safety for the occupied
environment and access and mobility requirements.
Generally signage shall comprise: Entries, pedestrian directional signage
externally, internal way finding signs, statutory signs, room and door signs
and tactile signs.
Information services and directional signage comprises both static
signage/identification as well as electronic displays, the latter being covered
in the remainder of this section.
Special Considerations
As an outcome of the architectural psychology and aboriginal cultural studies particular
attention in respect to signage requirements is to be paid to the needs of non-English
speaking users, indigenous people and the visually impaired, including those who are
short sighted and long sighted. There is a strong preference for symbols rather than
words, and maps to support good floor planning and effective way-finding cues.
3.
Building Listing Display (This section is optional depending on the size and type of
proposed courthouse)
The Building Listing Display shall accurately and reliably represent all court proceedings
held within the Facilities. It shall be a principal tool to assist way-finding within the
Facilities.
3.1.
Placement and User Ergonomic

A.
B.
C.
3.2.
The Building Listing Display shall be a large screen, prominently displayed

near the entrance on the ground floor of the building. It shall be
strategically placed in a position that is clearly visible to Court Users without
any structural obstruction, glare or reflection and shall not strain the eyes.
The Consultant shall ensure that the Building Listing Display shall be
aesthetically designed and presented.
The Building Listing Display shall be legible for viewing at a reasonable
distance in an open area where a reasonable number of concurrent users
are expected.
Logos and Emblems

A.
B.
The display shall be partitioned by the jurisdictions (e.g. Supreme Court,

District Court and occasionally, any other jurisdictions that proceed within
the Building) and the case matters (e.g. criminal and civil).
Each jurisdiction shall be prominently represented by the use of their
current version of the emblem.
190
SECTION E
3.3.
Timing of Display Information

A.
B.
3.4.
Arrangement of Listing Information

A.
B.
C.
3.5.
The listing information shall be arranged and displayed in a simple and

easy to understand manner.
It shall be structured in alphabetical order of the key parties of the matter so
as to assist in navigation and look-up of the listing display. The following
information shall be clearly displayed.
Names (Plaintiff first, followed by accused/s);
Time;
Building and Floor;
Courtroom Number;
Matter Number;
Presiding judge.
The Consultant shall liaise with the State for its endorsement on the format
and arrangement of the cause list content to be displayed.
Search Engine and Sub-Display

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6.
The content of the display shall represent the cause list for the day. It shall
be ready with the correct listing information before the Building is open to
Court Users.
Any changes to the cause list shall be accurately updated in the display on
a real time basis.
In addition to the large screen display, the Consultant shall provide a

computer screen based display to allow Court Users to interactively search
for their case matters of interest as well as the courtroom numbers.
The keywords that shall be useable in the search include any one of or a
combination of the following.
Names (Plaintiff and accused);
Time;
Building and Floor;
Courtroom Number;
Matter Number;
Presiding judge.
This search engine shall be designed to be user friendly and shall be
placed near the large screen display without obstructing the latter from
being viewed by other Court Users. The Consultant shall provide access to
the same search engine facility at the information desk in the Building.
The Consultant shall liaise with the State to determine if there is a need to
provide various levels of security access to the searchable listing system.
Technology
A.
B.
The Building Listing Display technology selected shall be state-of-the-art,

reliable and proven products that have been used in a similar court
environment. It is expected to be computer driven electronic devices.
Systems that maximise the provision of services to Court Users via
technology are encouraged. Where such systems are not currently
available, the systems provided shall include provisions to simplify the
inclusion of these technological innovations at a later date.
191
SECTION E
3.7.
System Availability and Resiliency

A.
B.
C.
4.
The Building Listing Display shall be designed with high resiliency in order
to achieve the necessary system availability.
The Consultant shall ensure that all single points of failure in the system
are identified and that the Building Listing Display shall be able to recover
from those single failure events.
The Consultant shall ensure that back-up strategy shall be designed and
developed as part of the Booking Services Operation Manual.
Electronic Signage - Courtrooms and Mediation Rooms (This section is optional

depending on the size and type of proposed courthouse)
Electronic Signage for all courtrooms and the large mediation room shall provide a
second-tier display of cause list outside the courtroom with more relevant details than
those shown in the Building Listing Display. It shall accurately and reliably represent all
court proceedings held within that particular courtroom for the day.
4.1.
Placement and Position

A.
B.
C.
4.2.
Logos and Emblems

A.
B.
C.
4.3.
The logo and/or emblem shall be prominently displayed for the jurisdiction
that presides over the proceeding held within the courtroom.
The Consultant shall ensure that the identity of the presiding jurisdiction is
clearly distinguished from other jurisdictions.
It is possible on occasions, to have more than one jurisdiction presiding in
the same courtroom, on the same day. In this case, the identity of each
jurisdiction shall be clearly displayed immediately prior to and during each
proceeding.
Timing of Display Information

A.
B.
4.4.
The courtroom electronic signage shall be a moderately large (at least

50cm) screen, prominently displayed near the entrance of the courtroom or
large mediation room. It shall be strategically placed in a position that is
clearly visible to Court Users without any structural obstruction, glare or
reflection and shall not strain the eyes.
The Consultant shall ensure that the courtroom electronic signage shall be
aesthetically designed and presented.
The electronic signage shall be legible for viewing at a reasonable distance
in an open area where a reasonable number of concurrent users are
expected.
The content of the electronic signage shall represent the cause list for the
day for that courtroom. It shall be ready with the correct courtroom listing
information before the building is open to Court Users.
Any changes to the cause list shall be accurately updated in the electronic
signage on a real time basis.
Arrangement of Listing Information

A.
B.
The cause list information outside the courtroom shall be arranged and
displayed in a simple and easy to understand manner.
It is expected that the following information shall be clearly displayed:
Time;
Matter Number;
192
SECTION E
C.
D.
4.5.
Status of Proceeding
A.
B.
4.6.
Presiding judge;
Status of the proceeding;
Names (Plaintiff first and accused);
Courtroom Number;
Floor and Building.
The Consultant shall liaise with the State for its endorsement on the format
and arrangement of the cause list content to be displayed.
This information shall be included as part of the Booking Services
Operation Manual.
The status of the court proceeding for each particular courtroom shall be
clearly shown for each case matter held for the day. The status information
shall be one of the following states:
In Progress;
Adjourned;
Completed;
Current case if multi list.
The status information shall be triggered and easily operated in a
standalone fashion, that is, limited to that particular courtroom.
Technology
The electronic signage or display technology selected shall be computer driven
electronic devices that are state-of-the-art, reliable and proven products that
have been used in a similar court environment.
4.7.
Availability of Display System

A.
B.
The electronic signage shall be designed with high resiliency in order to

achieve the necessary system availability.
The Consultant shall ensure that all single point of failures in the system
are identified and that the electronic signage shall be recoverable from
those single failure events.
193
SECTION F
F.
1.
Acoustic & Sound Reinforcement Specification

Introduction
The following performance descriptions relate to the acoustic requirements for this project.
The acoustic design is generally concerned with the following:
Environmental noise;
Background noise levels;
Acoustic isolation;
Speech Privacy;
Reverberation;
Room Acoustics;
Hearing conservation; and
Noise control in Services.

1.1.
Environmental Noise
The environmental noise must be considered in terms of the noise emission from
the building and also the intrusion of external environmental noise.
1.2.
A.
Environmental Protection (Noise) Regulations

All noise emission from the building is to be in full compliance with the
requirements of the Environmental Protection (Noise) Regulations 1997 as
amended.
B.
Rain Noise
The noise of rain on metal roofing and stormwater disposal including box
gutters and down pipes shall be considered in this project. In critical
spaces the rain noise shall be controlled to meet the background noise
levels as set out in this Design Brief. In non-critical areas they shall not
exceed the recommended level by more than 5 dB.
Background Noise
A.
B.
C.
The background noise level shall meet the requirements of the Australian
Standard AS/NZS 2107 Acoustics - Recommended Design Sound Levels
and Reverberation Times for Building Interiors.
The background noise sources to be considered in terms of the specified
design sound levels shall include but not be limited to:
ventilation and air conditioning systems;
hydraulic systems;
lighting;
computer equipment (including keyboards and printers);
intrusive noise from adjoining spaces;
external noise sources such as mechanical plant and environmental noise
sources; and
impact noise sources within the building.
The design sound levels for the major spaces are detailed in the following
table.
194
SECTION F
Table 8 Design and Sound Levels
Space / Area
Courtrooms
Jury Rooms
CCTV Rooms
Conference and Discrete Interview Rooms
Judicial Chambers
Executive Office
General / Administrative Offices
Toilets Showers Washrooms
Custodial areas
Pedestrian Link
1.3.
dB(A)
25 to 35
35 to 40
30 to 35
35 to 45
35 to 40
35 to 40
40 to 45
45 to 50
45 to 50
40 to 50
Acoustic Isolation
A.
The minimum standard of sound reduction to the following critical areas is

detailed on the following table.
Table 9 Minimum Sound Reduction

Space / Area
Courtrooms
Jury Rooms
Mediation rooms
CCTV Rooms
Recording Booth Room
Custody areas to adjoining
sensitive spaces
Custody Control Room
Floors generally
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
noise
Dntw
55
50
50
50
50
55
40
50
In general, the acoustic isolation to rooms shall be designed to ensure that

activity noise in a room does not exceed the design sound level as set out
in the Australian Standard AS/NZS 2107:2000 in all adjoining spaces.
In critical spaces such as Courts, CCTV rooms, and any space where voice
recordings are carried out, the noise intrusion from adjoining areas shall not
affect the voice recording requirements for those spaces.
The noise sources to be considered in terms of noise isolation include:
internal noise sources from plant and equipment;
activity noise within a space, including custody areas such as cells,
corridors, outdoor areas;
structure borne noise, particularly from Accused-in-Custody Areas and
holding rooms close to Courts; and
external noise sources including traffic, emergency vehicles, and
externally located plant etc.
Careful detailing of walls, windows, doors floors and ceilings shall ensure
that the performance of the construction is not downgraded due to flanking
transmission.
Planning - Careful planning is critical in achieving the acoustic objectives in
terms of acoustic isolation between spaces. Noise sensitive spaces should
not be located adjoining high noise areas. Where high noise areas are
located directly adjacent to noise sensitive spaces higher levels of acoustic
isolation than suggested in the table above may be required.
195
SECTION F
G.
H.
I.
1.4.
Any holding cells located adjacent to courts should preferably not be

located directly adjacent to courtroom walls. The acoustic isolation via the
doors must be carefully considered.
Doors - Generally, doors shall not noticeably downgrade the acoustic
isolation or speech privacy requirements between spaces. Use acoustic
lobby where high acoustic isolation requirements are required.
Flanking Sound Transmission Paths - The wall construction systems shall
be designed to adequately control all acoustic leakage and flanking sound
transmission paths. Issues to be addressed include:
floor ceiling junctions;
flanking sound transmission over ceiling;
corner detailing of walls and glazing systems; and
flanking transmission though window frame on external wall.
Speech Privacy
A.
B.
C.
D.
Spaces requiring speech privacy shall be designed in accordance with the

method described in the Australian Standard AS2822 - "Acoustics - Method
of Assessing and Predicting Speech Privacy and Speech Intelligibility".
The design for speech privacy takes into account the following factors:
Vocal Effort: i.e. normal, raised, stage or shouting voice level;
Privacy requirement: i.e. normal or confidential privacy;
Background noise level in the receiving space;
Size of intervening partition;
Size and acoustic absorption in the source room; and
Size and acoustic absorption in the receiving room.
In the assessment of acoustic isolation requirements, a realistic
assessment of occupancy noise and the expected background noise due to
the mechanical system must be taken. Low ambient sound levels often
occur at the ends of duct runs. Often the lower level of the specified design
sound levels is the appropriate level to use for the speech privacy analysis.
Definitions for vocal effort are:
Table 10 Vocal Effort

Vocal Effort
Sound level at 1 Description
metre
Normal
60 dB(A)
Speaking in normal office
Raised
66 dB(A)
Speaking in Conference Room.
Interjecting in small office
Loud voiced person
Loud
72 dB(A)
Addressing a medium sized
group
Disagreement between persons
Shouting
78 dB(A)
Distraught person
E.
Definitions for Speech Privacy Levels are:

Normal Speech Privacy - Is taken to mean that speech, although partly
intelligible. is not intrusive. It assumes a noise-to-speech ratio of
9 dB and corresponds to an Articulation Index of approximately
0.10.
Confidential Speech Privacy - Is taken to mean that speech will not be
intelligible, except when a person concentrates on hearing. It
assumes a noise-to-speech ratio of 15 dB and corresponds to an
Articulation Index of approximately 0.05.
196
SECTION F
Table 11 Speech Privacy Requirements
Vocal Effort
Courtrooms
Jury Deliberation Areas
General Administrative offices
Executive offices
Interview Rooms
Witness interview rooms
Custodial Interview rooms
Judges Chambers
Mediation rooms
Associate's Offices
1.5.
Loud
Loud
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Raised
Raised
Loud
Normal
Speech
Privacy
Level
Confidential
Confidential
Normal
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
F.
Doors - Generally, doors shall not noticeably downgrade the speech

privacy requirements between rooms.
G.
The speech privacy requirement set out in Table 11 - Speech Privacy

Requirements shall be achieved in the completed building. The speech
privacy is ultimately measured by the Articulation Index that is achieved
between any two spaces (e.g. adjoining judicial chambers). The Articulation
Index as set out in the brief is:
Normal Privacy
AI<0.1
Confidential Privacy
AI<0.05
Reverberation
The control of reverberation in spaces is normally carried out either for noise
reduction within a room or to create a specific acoustic environment. RT shall
meet the RTs recommended in the Australian Standard AS2107 - Acoustics Recommended Design Sound Levels and Reverberation Times for Building
Interiors.
1.6.
Room Acoustics
A.
B.
C.
D.
Detailed room acoustic design is to be carried out for all areas requiring
critical listening conditions. This includes all courts, conference facilities
and chambers where groups of persons are required to communicate.
The room acoustic design shall consider:
volume of room;
pattern of acoustic reflections;
location of acoustic absorption;
location of various sources, e.g. courts;
ambient sound level; and
reverberation.
Rooms requiring high levels of speech intelligibility such as large courts,
conference areas are to achieve a minimum Rapid Speech Transmission
Index (RASTI) of 0.7.
Courts - The Courtroom acoustics shall be designed to maximise the
speech intelligibility for natural voice. The plane of the surfaces and the
surface finishes in the courtroom are to be designed to assist the acoustic
reflection for natural speech. Acoustic reflections from concave surfaces
must be controlled. Due recognition must be provided to the requirements
of microphones used in the Court Recording and Public address systems.
197
SECTION F
E.
F.
G.
1.7.
In courtrooms, the design of the sound reinforcement system is critical in

achieving both a quality recording and to amplify quietly spoken persons
such that all parties in the core of the court as well as the public gallery can
hear them. The public address system is to be designed to assist the
natural acoustics of the room. The location of speakers in relation to
microphone positions and the selection of microphone characteristics shall
be such so as to avoid feedback.
The acoustics in the public gallery are to be designed to minimise noise
emission from this area projecting into the main body of the court.
Conference Rooms:
All conference rooms to be designed to provide a
high level of speech intelligibility for normal speech levels.
Hearing Conservation
The requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, 1996
shall be met in full. Regulations 3.45 to 3.47 inclusive addresses hearing
conservation aspects of the work environment. Other aspects of employee
health and safety must not be compromised.
1.8.
Mechanical Services - Acoustics

A.
B.
C.
D.
Environmental Protection (Noise) Regulations

All noise emission from mechanical equipment in the building is to be in full
compliance with the requirements of the Environmental Protection (Noise)
Regulations 1997 as amended.
Background Noise
i.
Noise control of mechanical plant is to ensure that the background
noise level in occupied spaces shall meet the requirements of the
Australian Standard AS/NZS 2107 Acoustics - Recommended Design
Sound Levels and Reverberation Times for Building Interiors. The
noise of equipment is to be free of tonality and intermittency as
outlined in the Australian Standard.
ii.
The recommended design sound levels for the major spaces are
detailed in the table within Section F1.2. Background Noise.
iii.
Duct attenuation systems to be designed to ensure noise breakout
from ducts together with duct borne noise and regenerated noise at
air grills meets the recommended design sound levels when
measured in accordance with AS/NZS 2107.
Acoustic Isolation
i.
This project has a significant number of spaces with high acoustic
isolation requirements. Where mechanical systems penetrate walls
or ceiling systems, the design sound reduction performance of the
wall or ceiling system shall not be compromised. The use of door
grills for relief air must be carefully considered for each and every
situation.
ii.
Plenum ceilings shall not reduce the design sound reduction
performance of the ceiling systems. Where ceilings are used to
achieve noise isolation, mechanical penetrations shall not downgrade
the performance of the ceiling.
iii.
Open waiting or seating areas adjacent to courtrooms and
mediation/pre-trial rooms, where connected vertically via open stairs
or balconies etc shall be isolated to D'ntw 25.
Vibration
All mechanical equipment and associated pipe work and ducts are to be
vibration isolated from the structure to ensure vibration is imperceptible in
accordance with Australian Standard AS2670-2, and structure borne noise
is controlled within the background noise levels as specified.
198
SECTION F
1.9.
Hydraulic Services- Acoustics

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.10.
Background Noise
All hydraulic systems shall be designed to be free of water hammer and for
minimisation of hydraulic system noise. Generally, the hydraulic systems in
use shall comply with the satisfactory (lower) level of the design sound level
as set out in the Australian Standard AS/NZS 2107 Acoustics Recommended Design Sound Levels and Reverberation Times for Building
Interiors. The recommended design sound levels for the major spaces are
detailed in the table within Section F1.2. Background Noise.
The criteria is relevant to water supply fixtures and pipe systems as well as
waste water systems and stormwater. In noise sensitive areas such as
courtrooms, mediation suites all judicial chambers, CCTV rooms and rooms
where recording is used, noise from hydraulic services shall not be audible.
Operating pressures and flow at fixtures shall be controlled to minimise
operating noise.
Planning - Careful planning is critical in achieving the acoustic objectives in
terms of acoustic isolation between spaces. Areas with hydraulic supply or
waste should not be located adjacent to or above noise sensitive spaces.
Electrical Services- Acoustics

A.
B.
Background Noise
i.
All electrical equipment and systems to be installed to ensure
compliance with the Australian Standard AS/NZS 2107 Acoustics Recommended Design Sound Levels and Reverberation Times for
Building Interiors. The noise of equipment is to be free of tonality and
intermittency as outlined in the Australian Standard.
The
recommended design sound levels for the major spaces are detailed
in the table within Section F1.2. Background Noise.
ii.
Electrical Ballasts - Electrical ballast shall not be installed within the
ceiling space of noise sensitive spaces. For all courts and video
interview rooms where recordings are used, ballasts shall be located
outside the acoustic rated walls around the perimeter of the room.
iii.
Penetrations in Ceilings - Where ceilings are used to provide part of
the noise enclosure to a space, the electrical penetrations such as
light fittings shall not downgrade the acoustic performance of the
ceiling material.
Lifts
i.
Acoustic Criteria - The noise levels specified below form the basis of
the acoustics for lifts where included. The noise levels should be
determined by measuring the 10 second fast response Leq levels
except where noted as being the maximum levels.
Inside lift foyer (measured 1 m from doors)
Lift pass by - Leq 50 dB(A)
Opening and closing of doors - Lmax 60 dB(A)
Inside lift car with fan turned Off
Car levelling onto floor and door opening - 60 dB(A)
Car accelerating or decelerating - 60 dB(A)
Car running at speed - 50 dB(A)
Inside adjoining spaces - Satisfactory (lower) level

of AS/NZS 2107
Inside lift car with fan switched on and car stationary - 45

dB(A)
Inside lift motor room - 85 dB(A)

199
SECTION F
i.
ii.
Inside lift Shaft - 75 dB(A)

In noise sensitive areas noise of lifts shall not be audible
Noise sensitive areas include courtrooms, mediation
suites, all judicial chambers, CCTV rooms and rooms
where recording is used
in non sensitive areas the LAmax of a lift pass-by shall not

exceed the satisfactory (lower) level of the design sound
level as set out in AS 2107 Acoustics - Recommended
Design Sound Levels and Reverberation Times for
Building Interiors.
Lift Vibration Control - Vibration control measures shall include, but
not be limited to, the use where appropriate of :
Lift rail isolators
Larger than standard lift guide rollers
Shearflex multi-layer pad isolators for lift machines
Inertia base for lift machines.

Acoustic Control - Consideration should be given to minimising or
deleting audible alarms from the indicating panels. Noise associated
with lifts shall not intrude into noise sensitive spaces. Voice systems
in the lifts shall not operate whilst doors are open.
200
SECTION G
G.
1.
Audiovisual and Transcription System

Introduction
This section details the standard set of requirements applicable for Audiovisual and
Transcription System for Courts in Western Australia. The design of the Audiovisual and
Transcription System shall not only be limited to the design for the construction of the
electronic courtroom but shall be extended to include the design for maintainability,
serviceability, operability, and manageability.
1.1.
Scope Overview
The scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
2.
Familiarisation of and system compliance to the judicial protocols,

processes, procedures and instructions applicable for the jurisdictions
of the State that operate in the Building;
Evaluation of the fit-for-purpose and cost-effective technologies
meeting the requirements of the State;
System and equipment compliance to Australian and International
standards;
Compliance to applicable Acts, Regulations and Statutory
Requirements;
Built-in system resiliency and back-up facilities;
Construction including the installation, functional & performance
testing and commissioning of electronic courtroom facilities meeting
the design specifications;
Provisioning and management of any necessary carrier or third party
services.
States Policy and Requirements

The development of the Audiovisual and Transcription System shall comply with the
following policies and requirements of the State. The State reserves the right to change
any of these policies.
2.1.
IT Policy and Standards

The Audiovisual and Transcription System shall not be an operational island for
the Building that will be disconnected from the rest of the States audiovisual
network.
Where there are any interfaces to the States IT system, the system shall comply
with, at all times, the States IT policies, procedures and standards including any
future revisions made by the State.
Justice Architecture Model (JAM);
Third Party Access Policy;
Third Party Access Procedure;
Computer and Telecommunications Facilities Policy;
Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards.
201
SECTION G
The system shall comply with the following policies:
3.
Maintain consistency and standardisation of user access and interface;
No impediments or interference to the courtrooms case and knowledge

management business applications and its future developments;
No impediments or interference to the States IT network infrastructure and

its future developments.
Audiovisual Standard Operating Environment

The system shall abide to the Department of the Attorney Generals (DotAG) AV SOE for
all audiovisual components and facilities in the Building.
The system shall provide an identical user interface irrespective of the types of electronic
courtrooms and audiovisual facilities. This is outlined in the living AV SOE document
called Department Of The Attorney General Courts Audio-Visual Control System User
Manual.
The System shall ensure that this SOE can be ported for use in other audiovisual sites if
the State elects to adopt the same SOE in these sites.
The audiovisual solutions used within the Building must be compatible and interoperable
with the videoconferencing and other audiovisual systems used by the State.
4.
Audiovisual Operations
Judicial support staff shall be responsible for operating the audiovisual system via the AV
controller interface within the courtroom or other audiovisual facilities in the Building.
5.
Electronic Courtrooms and Audiovisual Facilities

5.1.
Electronic Courtroom Types

The System shall provide three standard types of electronic courtroom for the
Building.
The three types of electronic courtroom are specified as follows:
Electronic Courtroom Types
No
Type
Electronic
Courtroom
Function
Type A
Full
Type B
Plus e-court applications
Type B
Enhanced
Type C
Plus integrated video conferencing
Type C
Basic
Video playback + digital audio recording

Plus all cables necessary for Type A
The System shall ensure that the formats and standards of video playback of
evidence are supported in all types of electronic courtrooms and audiovisual
facilities in the Building.
202
SECTION G
A.
Type C Courtroom Functions

The Type C courtrooms shall have the following functionalities:
Fully cabled as part of the audiovisual network within the Building;
Full audio playback (including analogue VCR, digital CD/DVD and PC

based);
Full video playback (including but not limited to VCR and DVD)
complying with the requirements of the States prosecuting
authorities;
Comprehensive digital audio recording;
AV controller interface;
Document camera;
One fixed camera providing a wide-angle view of the courtroom for

monitoring and security purposes;
Low-end displays that are able to display information from various

video and audio formats / sources;
IT communication outlets for computing needs of Judicial Officer,

judicial support staff, counsel, witness and other court participants in
accessing the States IT system and/or part of the States e-Court
applications.
Low end display is defined as a display device that shall be sized to

ensure high quality viewing (with acceptable resolution) of the
proceedings to all the participants, and the gallery in the courtroom whilst
being of lower cost.
These courtrooms shall be equipped with quality microphones and any
necessary audio processing system, hearing-aid loop and sound
reinforcement.
B.
Type B Courtroom Functions

The Type B courtrooms shall have the following functionalities:
All functionalities of Type C courtrooms;
Fully equipped with cameras capable of capturing all views of the

courtroom;
Integrated video conferencing incorporated into the audiovisual system;
Integrated audio conferencing incorporated into the audiovisual system;
CCTV to AV equipped remote witness and child witness rooms;
Digital video recording (including but not limited to DVD and PC based
applications);
Automatic video scaling capability;
High-end displays that are able to display information from various

video and audio formats / sources including those from the personal
computers.
High-end display is defined as a display that shall ensure very high quality
and resolution viewing of the proceedings to participants in the courtroom
and the gallery.
203
SECTION G
C.
Type A Courtroom Functions

The Type A courtrooms shall have the following functionalities:
All functionalities of Type B courtrooms;
LCD screens dedicated for counsel that can be selected to view the
courtroom displayed items, the intranet items of the State or the
counsels VPN;
Capable of conducting a full electronic trial and running a full set of

concurrent e-Court applications of the State;
Provision for a secured facility for the States IT system that shall be
located in close proximity of the courtrooms dependent on the optimal
design solution from the System.
A full electronic courtroom is defined as a courtroom with the capability to

deliver all the e-Court applications used to support evidence, case and
knowledge management.
This facilitates electronic presentation of
evidence and remote examination of witnesses.
The courtroom shall support multiple media in a networked environment. It
shall also deliver electronic examination and documentation of proceeding.
The term LCD is used to simply highlight the fact that very high-resolution
computer display screens shall be adopted. These shall be mounted on
the counsel benches.
D.
Future Proofing of Courtroom Types

As part of the future-proofing requirements, all courtrooms shall be fully
cabled to allow them to incrementally become Type A full electronic
courtroom as need arises without any performance degradation or
disruption to the courtroom operations.
The upgrade shall include the following:
5.2.
Type C to Type B;
Type B to Type A.
Courtroom Assignment Matrix

All courtrooms shall be provided with at least the basic electronic courtroom
functionalities as stated in Type C. The quantities of the microphones, cameras,
displays and LCD screens are dependent on the size of the courtroom and the
type of electronic courtroom.
The System shall ensure that the type of electronic courtrooms is usually
associated with the size and purpose of these courtrooms in order to simplify the
courtroom allocation and listing process for the State.
5.3.
Other Audiovisual Facilities

The System shall provide other audiovisual facilities for the following rooms if
contained within the Building:
Jury rooms;
Remote witness rooms;

204
SECTION G
Child witness rooms;
Judicial Officers conference room;
Judicial chambers;
Mediation rooms;
Jury assembly area.
Where portable equipment is specified, this will be shared among the same type
of audiovisual facilities in the Building.
A.
Jury rooms
The jury rooms shall be equipped with standalone video playback units,
and be capable of replaying any form (audio and video) and format (VHS
tape and PC based) of evidence played inside the courtroom. These units
shall be fixed mounted to the appropriate wall cabinet of the jury rooms.
The term standalone is used to highlight the fact that the AV systems in
the jury rooms are neither part of nor connected to the audiovisual network
of the Building.
B.

The Remote witness rooms shall be equipped with all necessary
audiovisual system to enable an adult witness to give evidence to both the
courtrooms within the Building and external to it.
These rooms shall be equipped with CCTV capability and be linked to the
audiovisual network. They shall also be networked to allow courtrooms
outside of the Building to connect to these rooms and vice-versa.
The System shall ensure that these rooms are capable of conducting video
or audio conferencing sessions via a portable AV controller interface.
The System shall provide the necessary interface (for example, docking
station-like connection) for the plug-and-play connection of the AV
controller interface.
C.
Child witness rooms

The child witness rooms shall be equipped with all necessary audiovisual
system to enable a child witness to give evidence remotely from both the
courtrooms of and those outside the Building.
The choice of audiovisual equipment and their placement shall be carefully
designed to meet the psychological needs of the children and shall be
unobtrusive in any way, shape or form.
All other audiovisual system requirements for the child witness rooms shall
be the same as those for the remote witness rooms.
D.
AV Equipped Holding Cell

The System shall link the AV equipped holding cell to the audiovisual
network via a CCTV circuit. The audio and video signals of the courtroom
shall be fed into this cell. The audiovisual system shall be designed such
that the audio and video signals from this cell can be fed back to the
courtroom.
205
SECTION G
The AV controller interface shall be configurable to allow or disallow the
audio from this holding cell to be broadcasted in the courtroom and be
captured on the digital recording system.
E.
Judicial Officers conference room

The System shall equip the Judicial Officers conference room with all the
audiovisual functionalities of a Type A courtroom but without the digital
audio recording functionalities.
The system shall be able to facilitate the following functions to the State:
Conduct audiovisual presentation

professional communications;
Conduct of audio and video conferencing;
Demonstration and training of pre-launch testing of new e-Court

applications;
Showcase audiovisual functionalities of the Building.
and
facilitate
judicial
and/or
The System shall ensure that the facilities connected to the conference
room are electronically segregated and secured from the courtroom
audiovisual network.
The conference room shall be equipped with a broadcast television service.
A large high-end display screen shall be the centrepiece of the boardroom
and the microphone solution shall effectively capture the words spoken
from all participants during a videoconference or audio conference.
F.
Judicial Chambers
Where video playback is required, the System shall provide the State with
the use of the portable video playback units that have the same
functionality as those for the jury rooms.
G.
Mediation rooms
The System shall link the mediation rooms to the audiovisual network. The
System shall facilitate the use of a plug-and-play portable video/audio
conference unit in these rooms and provide all necessary connections and
attachments to this portable unit.
Where video playback is required, the System shall provide the State with
the use of portable video playback units that have the same functionality as
those for the jury rooms.
The mediation rooms shall be upgradeable to provide digital audio
recording functionalities in the future.
The System shall install and maintain all cabling necessary for this room to
become a Type B courtroom.
H.
Jury assembly area

The jury assembly area shall be equipped with video playback equipment,
and be capable of replaying any form (audio and video) and format (DVD,
VHS tape and PC based) used for the courtrooms and other AV facilities in
the Building. This equipment shall be fixed mounted to the appropriate
cabinet of the jury assembly area.
206
SECTION G
This area shall be equipped with large low-end display(s) suitable for a
large assembly area.
I.
Monitoring Room
The System shall ensure that suitable central monitoring and recording
facilities are available to satisfy the monitoring and recording service
requirements of the State.
J.
Central Equipment Room

The System shall ensure that this room shall be strategically located within
the Building in order to minimise the cable distances to all other audiovisual
equipped rooms on the audiovisual network.
5.4.
Portable AV Equipment
A.
Portable Video and Audio Conferencing

The self-contained portable video and audio-conferencing units shall be
equipped with monitor display and AV controller interface functionalities
that are necessary to initiate and hold audio or video conference sessions.
B.
Portable Screens for Type A Courtrooms

The System shall ensure that the computer screens (typically LCD screens)
for Type A courtrooms are portable and can be connected to these
courtrooms via a simple plug-and-play method without the need for
software reconfiguration of the audiovisual system. The size of the screens
shall be such that it does not impede the view of the courtroom users, and
is large enough not to cause any OH&S concerns to the users.
The System shall provide sufficient screens to allow the State to conduct
two concurrent electronic trials in the nominated Type A courtrooms.
Type A courtrooms may be used for non-electronic trials. In such cases,
the System shall ensure that the screens are easily removable from these
courtrooms to provide additional workspace for the counsel.
C.
Plug and Play of Portable Units

Where portable facilities are introduced, the cable, connectors, plugs and
positions located within the portable unit shall interface seamlessly to the
fixed mounted facilities without additional components or adjustments. It
shall not disrupt or impact the quality and reliability of the signals and
system.
The portable units shall be partitioned and modularised to reflect the
required functionalities of various types of electronic courtrooms as
described previously using a simple plug-and-play method.
6.
Structured Cabling System

A suitable structured cable management system shall be provided for all cabling,
termination and labelling requirements of the electronic courtrooms and other audiovisual
facilities within the Building.
207
SECTION G
The design shall also cater for the flexibility required so as to allow for the easy upgrade(s)
or replacement(s) of various cable systems. The design parameters include but are not
limited to the choices of cable materials, topology, and methods of reticulation.
6.1.
Audiovisual and IT Cables

The System shall provide and maintain all network cable for the audiovisual
system within the Courthouse including the IT cabling system serving the needs
of the audiovisual facilities and electronic courtrooms.
The System shall provide and maintain all the necessary network links and
cables external to the Building. The external cables and/or links may be
provisioned via third party carrier(s) or service provider(s).
The System shall ensure that the cable distances shall be minimised, including
the cables for KVM. Optical cables shall be used to reduce costs and/or to
overcome distance limitations.
The System shall ensure that the IT cabling can facilitate all aspects of the IT and
communications requirements of the state including PC/LAN, broadband Internet,
IP and traditional telephony.
The System shall provide all audiovisual cables and connection points required
to facilitate the functionality of video and audio playback from various PCs
positioned inside the courtroom.
6.2.
IT Communication Outlets in Courtrooms and AV Facilities

The System shall provide the following nominated types and minimum quantities
of IT communication outlets.
Nominated Types and Quantities of IT Communication Outlets
No Types of Participants or Audiovisual Facilities
Minimum Number
of Connection
Outlets
Telephone IT
Per Seated Judicial Officer Position (courtroom)
Associate Position (courtroom)
Usher/Orderly Position (courtroom)
Witness Position (courtroom)
Accused Position (courtroom)
Jury Officer Position (courtroom)
Per Seated Counsel Position (courtroom bench 1)
10
Jury Room
11
AV Equipped Holding Cell
12
Remote Witness Room
3
208
SECTION G
No Types of Participants or Audiovisual Facilities
Minimum Number
of Connection
Outlets
Telephone IT
7.
13
Child Witness Room
14
Judicial Officer Conference Room (general)
15
Judicial Officer Conference Room (per seated 0

position)
15
Mediation Room
16
Judge Chamber
17
Jury Assembly Area
10
30
Cabling and Associated Infrastructure

7.1.
Cabling standards
The following cable brands and types are intended to indicate the minimum
specification required. Other brands meeting and exceeding these requirements
are acceptable. All cables shall be installed with permanent labelling at each end
of the cable to facilitate easy identification by staff or external parties. A label
legend shall be supplied as a reference.
7.2.
7.3.
Audio
Audio Reticulation Cable - single twisted pair, stranded, 22 AWG, with 100%
foil shield and drain wire (Belden 8761);
Audio Microphone leads - flexible star-quad cable. 4 conductor, 24 AWG

stranded, with 100% braid shield, and PVC jacket (Belden 1192A).
Nominal o.d. mm 4.45
Nominal capacitance pF/m 79
Connectors soldered bucket 3-pin XLR style connectors (eg, Neutrik NC3)
with full strain-relief on all line plugs and sockets.
Non-contiguous
conductors and insulation piercing connectors are not acceptable.
Composite video
The maximum attenuation for all video cables shall be less than 3 dB/100m at 5
MHz. All video cables shall be 100% screened.
7.4.
Cable - 75 ohm, coaxial 22 awg, stranded copper conductor, braided shield

(Belden 9259);
Connectors - 75 ohm BNC.
RGBHV & XGA
Cable - 75 ohm
(Extron mini high resolution (100)

22-103-02);
209
SECTION G
7.5.
7.6.
Connectors - BNC mini-hr
(Extron 100);
Cable - 75 ohm >5 MHz (>15m lengths)
(Extron super high

(500) 22-100-02);
Connectors - BNC male super-hr
(Extron 100-075)-51.
Connectors HD15.
Network
Cable - Cat 6, paired unshielded twisted pair (utp), 4 pair;
Connectors - RJ45.
Control
7.7.
resolution
Inter-room (i.e. room to room) Cat 6 (as above);

Cable - intra-room (i.e. within room), paired, 2 pairs, stranded, 24 AWG, foil
shield;
Connectors - soldered bucket 4-pin XLR style connectors (eg, Neutrik NC4)
with full strain-relief on all line plugs and sockets.
Non-contiguous
conductors and insulation piercing connectors are not acceptable. 3-pin XLR
style connectors are not to be used.
Rack specification
Equipment rack(s) shall comply with the following requirements:
7.8.
Courtroom racks and equipment room racks shall accommodate 44 RU of

electronic equipment in a standard 19-inch configuration with 600 mm depth
and 600 mm height.
The height of any in-court rack(s) shall be selected to fit within

accommodation under the JSOs bench.
The rack shall be free standing on a rigid base.
The lowest item of equipment shall not be less than 100 mm above floor
level.
The 44 RU racks shall support up to 100 kg of equipment without twisting or

leaning in any direction.
The rack shall be fitted with front and rear support rails to accommodate
equipment mounted on sliding rails.
The rack shall be fitted with an earth stud that is welded to the frame and
shall not be les than 4 mm in diameter.
At the sides and back, there shall be a minimum of 100mm clearance

between the equipment and doors or covers to allow for ventilation.
Cooling fans shall be supplied to ensure the installed equipment meets the
manufacturers operating temperature limits.
Patch Panel specification

Patch panels shall comply with the following requirements:
Panels shall be 24-port 1RU complete with RJ45 sockets for incoming
telephone cables and outgoing data/voice outlets.
210
SECTION G
Patch panels for the incoming telephone cable shall be or equivalent to Krone
Keystone series panels complete with WHITE coloured ports.
Termination of the incoming telephone cable must be dual pair per white port.
The size of the incoming telephone cable is to be NOT LESS than a 50 pair
(category 3) copper cable complete with internal colour bands.
Patch panels for the outgoing data cabling (to the wired field outlets) shall be
or equivalent to Krone TM8 Category 6 series panels complete with BLACK
coloured ports.
Fit each patch panel with rear cable support brackets running the full length
of the panel and spaced approximately 100mm from the panel.
Supply and install vertical ring loops with a minimum diameter 40mm x
125mm.
Install horizontal cable brackets between every 1RU of patch panels (unless
noted otherwise).
The exact location of patch panels within the cabinet will be verified on site by
DotAG staff at the time of installation.
The System shall ensure that all other audiovisual connection points for video
and audio signals shall be appropriately designed and placed within the
courtrooms and other AV facilities in the Building.
The System shall ensure that the nominated IT communication outlets are
replicated and strategically placed on every wall of the room to cater for the
possible re-arrangement of office desk and/or workstation position in the room in
the future.
7.9.
Future Proofing, Conduit and Cable Access

The System shall ensure that the cable conduits are installed with spare capacity
to cater for future cabling requirements and/or technological changes.
The System shall ensure that the conduits are aesthetically designed and placed
relative to furniture fixtures of a room.
The State shall have the full access rights to the IT cable terminations as
specified in Section D: Building Engineering Services Specification.
8.
In-Court Equipment and Housing

The System shall ensure that the layout, equipment housing, cabinets, and racks shall be
standardised across all types of electronic courtrooms and audiovisual facilities.
The housing shall be secured, covered, and positioned with easy access for
maintenance, fault diagnostic, cable access, rewiring, operational adjustments, and
connections to portable AV units where applicable.
The equipment and housing shall be designed and positioned in such a way that the
technical personnel shall be able make adjustments to the equipment and at the same
time, be able to observe the results of the adjustments directly without having to move
to another position.
Where the equipment cabinet is movable within the housing, the System shall ensure
that the movements shall have no impacts to the quality and reliability of the signals
and systems.
211
SECTION G
9.
The System shall minimise the number of different types of in-court audiovisual
equipment.
The System shall minimise the number of audiovisual equipment required on the
workbench of the judicial support staff.
The System shall install all audiovisual technologies and systems in an unobtrusive
fashion including but not limited to the disruption to line-of-sight within the courtroom.
All equipment placed inside the courtrooms and other AV facilities in the Building shall
be aesthetically designed and presented as well as complying with the acoustic
requirements of the courtroom.
All IT communication outlets shall be installed ergonomically to facilitate the ease of

plug-and-play for the users in the courtrooms and other audiovisual facilities within the
Building.
The System shall liaise with the State to finalise the States IT requirements inside and
outside the courtrooms. The States PC requirements may be housed at both ends of
the counsel benches.
The System shall comply with all requirements of the e-court infrastructure of the
State, including the provision of IT accommodation and cabling for e-Court PCs to the
satisfaction of the State. The System shall integrate all IT facilities of the State
(including broadband access for Counsel within the courtrooms) as part of the Design
Work.
Master Clock Synchronisation

The Audiovisual and Transcription System shall be synchronised to a primary reference
clock source of the State.
The synchronisation protocols to be supported shall include the following:
IP based NTP;
Analogue pulses (per minute and hour);
Digital pulses (per second, minute and hour).
212
SECTION G
The system components that shall be synchronised to the States primary reference
source shall include but are not limited to the following:
10.
All video images including video conferencing and PC images;
All monitors display;
Courtroom clock;
Recording and monitoring system;
Network computing system;
Way finding system (including the Building Listing Display).
System Characteristics and Design Criteria

The audiovisual system shall be designed, installed and maintained to ensure the delivery
of highest quality audio and video signals being captured, played back and presented
inside the courtroom. The audio quality shall be in natural human speech form and free
from humming, digitalisation or any other interference noise other than those embedded in
the original audio source.
Where external network technologies are used, the audio quality shall meet the relevant
ITU-T standards (P.800 MOS and P.862 PESQ) with acceptable toll quality of at least 4.2
in the Mean Opinion Score (MOS). It shall also be free from excessive jitter noise in the
voice quality.
The Audiovisual (AV) System shall be designed with the following system design
characteristics:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
10.1.
Scalability and modularity;

Connectivity;
Transparency;
Capacity;
Availability;
Security Access;
User Ergonomic and Interface;
Maintainability and manageability.
Scalability and modularity

The AV System shall be scalable to allow for the future addition of functionalities
and/or performance enhancements into the original system. That is, the initial
system configuration shall be scalable to upgrade to a higher level of electronic
courtroom in simple and uniform series of steps.
10.2.
Connectivity
The design of the AV System shall provide a fully non-blocking connectivity for all
audiovisual equipped facilities and rooms within the building and cater for all
required permutations of video and audio connection paths. The System shall
ensure that the external networks connected to the Building shall be able to
concurrently handle the maximum peak operational demands of all audiovisual
facilities in the building. These networks include but are not limited to audio and
video conferencing connections.
213
SECTION G
10.3.
Transparency of Signals
The Audiovisual and Transcription System shall be designed with a high degree
of system transparency from one end to the other end of the audiovisual network.
The System shall ensure that a high degree of transparency is achieved and
unnecessary signal or path conversions minimised. Digital technologies shall be
adopted for both audio and video signals as much as practically possible.
10.4.
Capacity of Systems
The design for the system capacity shall meet the specified performance
requirements of the State in terms of speeds, response times, quality of the audio
and video content.
The capacity of the Audiovisual and Transcription System shall be designed to
cater for initial configuration requirements as well as those requirements defined
in each upgrade of electronic courtrooms.
10.5.
Availability of Systems
The AV System shall be designed to achieve high availability of the courtroom
operations based on the following parameters.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Built-in resiliency in system architecture and design;

Selection of high reliability products and / or solutions;
Engineered QoS (Quality of Service) design in the system;
Appropriate levels of spare holdings for critical components on-site;
Emergency back-up equipment/facilities (i.e. backup digital recorder.)
The design should exclude any single point of failures in the system and the
operation of the AV system shall be able to recover from multiple failure events.
10.6.
Security and Access

The AV System shall be secured and segregated from other systems within the
courtroom, maintaining and meeting the necessary interfacing and connectivity
requirements. It should also be free from virus and shall be engineered to
minimise any security threats and/or risks. For all local and remote accesses,
the design shall ensure that the proper authentication, access security levels for
different user classes are adopted and enforced at all times.
10.7.
User Ergonomic and Interface

The AV System shall be designed to ensure that the layout, look and feel, and
set-up of all AV Controller Interfaces (e.g. touch screens) shall be standardised
and defaulted to the optimal settings with all necessary pre-configurations.
The AV Services section shall approve the final:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Layout design;
Look and feel;
Pre-settings;
Configuration options;
System security access control.
214
SECTION G
10.8.
Maintainability and Manageability

The AV System shall be designed to provide all necessary network access
methods for maintainability and manageability. The manageability features shall
include the following capabilities:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
11.
Local and remote fault diagnostic;

Local and remote configuration;
Local and remote performance;
Local and remote security;
Local and remote accounting and reporting.
Audio System System Design

The audio system component of the AV System shall be designed, installed to ensure the
delivery of highest quality audio signals being captured, played back, and presented inside
the courtroom. The audio quality shall be in natural human speech form and free from
humming, digitalisation or any other interference noise other than those embedded in the
original audio source.
Where external network technologies are used, the audio quality shall meet the relevant
ITU-T standards (P.800 MOS and P.862 PESQ) with acceptable toll quality of at least 4.2
in the Mean Opinion Score (MOS). It shall also be free from excessive jitter noise in the
voice quality.
11.1.
Audio System Characteristics

A.
Audio System Reference Level

The system reference of 0 dBr shall be equivalent to +4 dBm
B.
Frequency Response
The frequency response shall be better than + 2 dB from 200 Hz to 6,000
Hz.
The attenuation at 100 Hz shall be better than 25 dB.
C.
Audio Output Levels

The nominal output signal level shall be 0 dBr. The output signal shall be
adjustable from 10 dBm to +4 dBm for all balanced 600-ohm outputs.
D.
Signal to Noise Ratio

The unweighted signal-to-noise ratio for a fully equipped system (with all
inputs terminated) shall be more than 30 dB.
E.
Total Harmonic Distortion

The total harmonic distortion between any input and any output at + 10 dBr
shall be better than 0.8%.
F.
Cross Talk
The cross talk at any frequency between any two isolated channels in the
system shall be no more than -60 dB at 8 kHz. This requirement applies to
all cabling, connections, and switching.
G.
Noise Level
The noise level on any microphone circuit terminated at 600 ohm shall not
exceed -70 dBm.
215
SECTION G
11.2.
Microphones
Microphones shall have a sensitivity of more than 25 mV/Pa and shall have a
uni-directional pattern. A typical microphone that has been used in previous
installations Courts installations is the AV Leader Type PA322 with AKG GN30E
or suitable equivalent gooseneck microphone.
The microphone shall comply with the following characteristics:
A unidirectional polar response with a front to back ratio of typically 20 dB;
The equivalent noise level less than 20 dB(A);
High sensitivity - at least 25 mV/Pa (-30 dBv);
Have a minimum frequency response of 100 Hz to 12 kHz, when tested in

accordance with IEC standard 268-4;
With a wide dynamic range - typically in excess of 120 dB;
Have a low impedance balanced output;
Total harmonic distortion less than 0.15%;
Powered via 12/24/48volts phantom power (battery powered microphones

are not acceptable for use);
Must be mountable on a bench top or wall such that the microphone, its
stand, or base cannot be detached easily;
A.
Microphone stands
The general-purpose microphone stands shall be black heavy-duty tabletop
stands with built in shock absorption. Base attachments shall be suitable
for the specific location.
The attenuation of mechanical vibrations shall be at least 15 dB for
frequencies above 200 Hz.
The accused and witness microphone stands shall be suitable for attaching
to a rail or desk top with built in shock absorption complete with plugs and
sockets protected from tampering.
The wheelchair witness microphone stands shall be black, heavy-duty base
floor stand with built in shock absorption and boom with adjustable length
and height.
11.3.
Processing equipment
Separate equipment shall perform the processing and switching of the audio
inputs. Multi-purpose devices capable of performing both these functions are
unacceptable.
These devices shall operate independently of each other and the failure in one
device shall have a minimal impact on the operation of other devices.
The audio processors shall have the capability of performing the following
functions automatically:
Gating of inactive microphones.
Adjustment of audio levels of softly and loudly spoken parties to ensure

consistent signal levels for recording and/or transmission.
Echo cancellation.
This equipment shall be located in the designated equipment rack.
216
SECTION G
A.
Volume control
It shall be possible to adjust the level of the audio signal from the remote
locations or AV sources within the Courtroom on the touch screen
controller.
The gain adjustment shall be limited to 15 dB to +5 dB.
B.
Audio performance
Audio performance must be better than ITU-T series g.711, with a
preference for CD quality audio.
C.
Echo cancellation
Echo cancellation shall be on a per channel basis with a minimum of two
other associated inputs. It is acceptable to combine two microphone inputs
provided the microphones are in the same zones and are not spaced more
than 1.5m apart.
D.
Background noise
It shall be possible to isolate the input signal (background noise gate) from
the output, if the signal is below a pre-set level.
The range of thresholds for the pre-set level shall be service adjustable
from 40 dBr to 75 dBr.
E.
Mixer requirements
It shall be possible to automatically mix any combination of available inputs
to any one of eight outputs. Manual mixers are not acceptable.
F.
Output configuration
It shall be possible to select either a balanced or an unbalanced output, by
the use of a jumper switch.
11.4.
Sound reinforcement system

The integrated sound reinforcement system shall deliver sound to the courtroom
via speakers and a hearing aid loop(s) for the hearing impaired. The sound
reinforcement system shall be able to:
Amplify specific microphones into the courtroom.
Amplify audio from the remote witness room into the courtroom.
Amplify audio from the videoconferencing system into the courtroom.
Amplify the audio from the VCR player, CD player, or any other audio source
into the courtroom.
Provide a power amplifier to the courtroom system.

The volume of each zone shall be independently adjustable.
A.
Speaker positions
A minimum of two speakers shall be positioned over each of the following
positions:
Judges bench and witness position.
Counsel bench(es).
Jury box.
Gallery and accused dock
Speakers shall be located in such a way that each of the bullet points
mentioned above will constitute a separate zone. Speakers shall be
217
SECTION G
located in such a position and direction that there shall be no feedback into
any of the relevant microphones zones.
B.
Minimum power output

The power amplifier shall be capable of producing a power level of 95
dB(A) (pink noise) in the position of the judge or magistrate, jury and at the
centre of the public gallery.
11.5.
Audio switching unit

The audio switching unit will be located in the equipment room and used to
interconnect the courtrooms, the remote witness room, the teleconferencing unit
and the video conferencing equipment in any arbitrary manner.
The audio switching unit shall be capable of being controlled by the touch screen
controller(s).
A.
Audio and video switching

It shall be possible to select and switch audio channels independently of
the video switching system. Where required the audio signal shall be
switched to follow the video signal. It is permissible to use a combined
audio and video switcher providing that the first statement can also be
satisfied.
B.
Transmission loss
The variation in level between any input device and any fully loaded output
channel shall be less than 1 dB.
11.6.
Audio teleconferencing unit

The audio teleconferencing unit will be located in the equipment room and used
to connect the audio systems in the courtrooms or the remote witness room to
the PSTN. The unit shall be capable of being controlled by the touch screen
controller(s) and shall be compliant with the relevant Australian communication
authority standards.
A.
Signal quality
The quality of the voice transmission shall be better than 1 qdu.
(quantization distortion unit as defined by ITU-T.)
B.
Dial tone detection

The unit shall be capable of detecting dial tone. If no dial tone is detected
then a message shall be generated to inform the user of the fault.
C.
Number of dialled digits

The unit shall be capable of dialling up to 24 digits in one number.
D.
Incoming calls
The unit shall be capable of detecting an incoming call and signalling the
relevant touch screen that an incoming call is present. The unit shall be
capable of looping and holding an incoming call.
12.
Video System General

The video system component of the AV System shall be designed, installed to ensure the
delivery of highest quality video signals being played back and presented inside the
courtroom and other AV facilities in the building.
218
SECTION G
The video quality shall be clear with stable image and be maintained at the designed level
of resolution. It shall not have any fluctuations or ghost effects caused by EMI noise or
inflict any occupational, health and safety concerns for the viewers.
The video signals shall be of a quality standard that is suitable for legible and viewable
recording. Video capture and recording of the court proceedings may be required.
12.1.
Video System Standards

A.
Composite Video Signal

The standard composite video signal shall be a 4 MHz PAL TV signal
complying with the CCIR 600 series standard composite format at 1 V p-p.
B.
Cabling bandwidth
All cabling, patch panels and connectors shall have a bandwidth suitable
for the intended signal (analogue or digital).
C.
Synchronising compatibility
All cameras and monitors shall be capable of synchronising to the standard
external television synchronising signals and the 50 Hz mains supply.
D.
Recording of Video Conference Feed

The audiovisual system shall be capable of recording of video evidence
from an outside source via the videoconference or CCTV, including but not
limited to the following functions:
12.2.
Provide an indicator as to the video recording status on the AV

controller interface;
Display the video recording time and date stamp on screen;
Display of recording image on screen;
Display of video playback and recording control buttons on the AV

controller interface;
Provide volume up / down override control for the audio mixer;
Ability to control the courtroom document camera and to switch the

document image to any one, many, or all of the courtroom video
displays while the recording of the video feed is in progress.
Camera equipment
A.
Specifications
The cameras shall comply with the following characteristics as a minimum.
Better than 480 TV lines horizontal resolution;
At least one 1/3 or interline transfer type colour charge coupled
device (CCD) chip;
Fitted with a manual zoom lens with a ratio greater or equal to 4:1;
The minimum sensitivity shall be better than 20 lux (including
losses in the protective cover);
Signal to noise ratio better than 48 db;
Incorporate digital signal processing techniques, or alternative
proven image enhancement circuitry, to generate a video image
with a wide dynamic range, so as to accurately reproduce detail in
both bright and dark portions of high contrast scenes;
219
SECTION G
Have a metal case to minimise magnetic and electrostatic
interference;
Have a tinted one-way hemispherical cover
Have a built in character generator to provide camera id label of
not less than 15 characters.
Each camera shall be powered from a 12, 24, or 48 vdc supply.
The camera shall perform an auto white balance and an auto black
balance.
In addition to the specifications described above, pan tilt zoom (PTZ) type
cameras shall meet or exceed the following specifications:
360-degree continuous pan movement.
180 degrees (0-90-180 degree) vertical tilt movement. Complete
with auto-flip of scenes as the camera moves through 90-degree
position.
The manual control range of pan and tilt speed shall be variable
between 0.5 deg/sec and 40 deg/sec (minimum range). Control
should be such that pan/tilt speed is sensitive to lens zoom
position i.e. slower when the camera lens is zoomed in and faster
when the camera lens is zoomed out.
When responding to a preset command, the maximum time from
receipt of the preset view shall not exceed 1.5 seconds.
Gear backlash not to exceed 0.1 degree.
A lens enabling a head and shoulders picture to be taken of
counsel in the eight possible counsel positions or of the judge and
witness. (Note: prior to ordering the lens the contractor shall
inform himself of the actual distance and picture size for each
position.)
The design and positioning of the camera(s) in the courtroom
prevents any images to be captured/sent of the dock position or of
the accused to a far-end site eg remote witness room.
The design and positioning of the camera(s) in the courtroom
prevents any images to be captured/sent of the public gallery to a
far-end site.
The PTZ shall support a minimum of nine (9) pre-set positions.
The PTZ and pre-set positions shall be capable of being controlled
from the touch screen controller(s).
12.3.
Video switcher equipment

A video switcher shall be located in the equipment room to enable
interconnection between the courtrooms, the remote witness room and the video
conferencing unit. The touch screen(s) shall control the video switcher. There
needs to be provision for the video switching of composite video signal as well as
RGBHV (or Computer based) video signals.
A.
Minimum port switching capability

The minimum size of the video switcher at each site shall support the
following:
Reticulation of two simultaneous video channels;
Document camera;
All the cameras in the courts, witness rooms and conference
rooms;
All the display devices (plasma, LCD, and the like) in the Courts,
witness rooms and conference rooms;
220
SECTION G
All the video playback devices in the courts (VHS/DVD and the
like);
Test pattern generator;
Site identification CCTV image; and
Two spare ports.
B.
Maximum difference in gain

The difference in gain between any two channels shall be less than 0.5%.
C.
Minimum cross talk

The cross talk between any two channels shall be less than -54 dB at 5
MHz.
D.
Non-linearity requirements
The non-linearity on any path through the video switcher shall be better
than 1.0%.
E.
Black level clamping

There shall be black level clamping on each input.
F.
Switcher bandwidth
The 3 dB bandwidth of the video switcher shall be more than 5 MHz.
G.
Switching requirements
Each cross point shall be able to switch PAL-b TV signal.
12.4.
Video Playback and Recording

The video playback and recording facility shall be capable of replaying a
comprehensive variety of formats (i.e. S-VHS, DVD etc) from sources internal or
external to the courtroom. This shall include but not be limited to video signals
from the following sources:
Court Cameras;
Document Cameras;
VCR/VCD/DVD playback system;
CCTV system;
Video conferencing system;
PC Video Playback;
Images from the e-Court applications (high resolution computer images.)
All video playback and recording equipment shall be capable of being controlled
from the AV Controller Interface using at least IEC basic set of commands (Play,
Fast Forward, Rewind, Pause, and Stop.) The video playback and recording
equipment shall be suitably mounted and accessible by the judicial support staff.
The AV system shall enable at least analogue video recording of courtroom
proceedings via the courtroom VCR.
The format of all recorded content shall be open and playable using the
audiovisual equipment existed within the building.
The video recorder shall support all of the following requirements:
The output of each video recorder shall be synchronised to the

system clock signals by a time base synchroniser.
221
SECTION G
12.5.
The record/play signal resolution shall be better than 400-lines.

The system shall be capable of recording the date and time on the
recorded picture.
Displays
The displays shall support the following requirements:
The displays shall not be less than 68 cm diagonally except in the remote
witness room, which shall not be less than 48 cm diagonally.
The displays shall have a minimum resolution of 400-lines.
It shall be possible for service staff to adjust display controls.
A.
High resolution courtroom displays

Courtroom displays (e.g. Plasma or LCD.) The high-resolution courtroom
displays shall comply with the following requirements:
Fixed on wall or ceiling mounted on brackets at the locations offering

the most appropriate sightlines for the courtroom participants.
Not be less than 125 centimetres diagonally with an aspect ratio of

16:9.
Support component (RGBHV etc) and composite signals.
Support the following input signals at a minimum but not limited to; RGB
/ NTSC /PAL / SECAM /HD /DVD /DTV
Provide a minimum colour reproduction rate of RGB 256 levels.
Be capable of synchronising on horizontal refresh rates from 30 kHz to

85 kHz.
It shall be possible for service staff to adjust standard monitor controls.
Be capable of accepting signals with a pixel resolution of 1280(h) x

1024(v).
Courtroom displays shall be utilised for, but not limited to, the following
functions within the courtroom:
B.
Video evidence replay
Videoconference calls
Electronic evidence display (e.g. legal documents)
PC based presentations (e.g. PowerPoint presentations)
Document camera
Participant displays (eg LCD)

High-resolution displays for courtroom participants. The high-resolution
participant displays shall comply with the following requirements:
Display size diagonally shall be in the range of 38 to 47 centimetres;
Support a minimum screen resolution shall be 1280(h) x 1024(v) pixels;
Accept RGBHV signals;
The base and screen shall not be more than 150 mm deep;
222
SECTION G
It is preferable for the angle of the screen to be adjustable and that it

can swivel up or down, when not in use, to ensure that viewing beyond
the screen is not obstructed.
The participant displays shall provide the following minimum set of local
controls for screen and viewing adjustments:
C.
Brightness and contrast.
Hue or colour saturation.
Vertical and horizontal alignment.
Pincushion adjustment.
Composite Video Distribution Amplifiers

The composite video distribution amplifiers shall support the following
requirements:
D.
Distribution amplifiers shall have a bandwidth of dc to 5 MHz.
The distribution amplifiers shall have an adjustable gain of not less than
6 db, provide phase compensation and phase pre-emphasis for long
cable lengths.
The distribution amplifiers shall operate from 12, 24, or 48 vdc.
RGBHV Video Distribution Amplifiers

The RGBHV video distribution amplifiers shall support the following
requirements:
Frequency Compatibility - Horizontal: 20 to 200 kHz, Vertical: 50 to 150

Hz, a minimum Video Bandwidth : 300 MHz@ -3dB, with a typical Video
Bandwidth: 450 MHz @ -3dB.
The distribution amplifiers shall have a diff gain of less than 0.06%.
Operate with a Cross-talk: -40dB @ 10 MHz.
DC coupling.
E.
High-resolution image distribution

Where high-resolution image display is required in a jury courtroom, such
as in an electronic trial, the jury court will require dedicated displays to the
following court participants:
Judge x 3 (PC display, Courtroom evidence display, remote participant

display)
Counsel x 4 (two points on the front bench and two points on the second
bench)
Witness (in court witness position)
Associate
Jury (1 screen per 3 jurors.)
Courtroom display.
223
SECTION G
F.
XGA/SVGA to RGBHV converter

The converter shall comply with the following requirements:
12.6.
Accept signals in SXGA, SVGA, XGA or WXGA format.
Transmit 1V p-p pal signals into a 75-ohm load.
It is desirable to be able to adjust the compensation for cable attenuation.
The frequency response of the converter shall be better than +/- 3 dB

between dc and 150 MHz.
Videoconference CODEC(s)
The videoconferencing codec(s) shall be located in the common equipment rack
in close proximity to the Courtroom. This shall enable the transmission of audio,
video and data signals between courtrooms or a remote witness room within the
Courthouse and another site. The latter includes but is not limited to the
following:
The DotAG and DCS (Department of Corrective Services) sites in the

metropolitan area.
The DotAG and DCS sites in the WA regional centres.
Other sites in Australia (cross-vesting act 1999).
Other remote or overseas sites.
The video codec(s) shall be capable of interfacing to the WA state ATM and
satellite network using ATM UNI protocols or via a V.35 interface at 384kbps.
It shall be possible for the codec(s) and ISDN interface to be controlled by the
touch screen controller.
Videoconference codec(s) must meet the following requirements as a minimum:
Allow point to multipoint video conferencing;
Support multiple network interfaces including IP (including QoS), ISDN, DSL

and other external network;
User definable bandwidths;
Standards-based embedded encryption such as AES;
Support multiple formats of video input and output, (i.e. Composite video,
XGA etc);
Support ITU-T H.320 and H.323 standards;
H.239 Dual Video
A.
Videoconference Specifications
The videoconference codec(s) shall meet the following specifications as a
minimum:
Accept and produce PAL video signals at 75 ohm.
Accept and produce balanced 0 dbr audio signals at 75 ohm.
The codec(s) shall accept RS232 or RS485 signals for data

transmission via the T.120 protocol.
The codec(s) shall support the simultaneous connection to three (2b +

d) ETSI ISDN lines at data speeds up to 384kbps with a minimum
512kbps for IP.
224
SECTION G
B.
The ISDN interface shall be capable of dialling numbers up to 22 digits

long.
The video compression standard shall be H.261 at 30 frames per

second.
Compatibility
For compatibility with existing codec(s), the video codec(s) supplied shall
be capable of detecting, decoding and encoding images using the following
standards:
C.
H.261
H.263
H .263+
H.263++
H .264
Picture resolution
The video codec(s) shall support the following picture resolutions as a
minimum:
D.
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels)
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
Interlaced SIF (352 x 480 pixels)
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
Audio compression
The video codec shall support the following audio standards as a minimum:
E.
G.711
G.722
G.722.1
G.728
Echo suppression
Local echo suppression is to be performed by the audio signal conditioning
equipment and it shall be possible to disable any echo cancellation features
of the codec(s).
Note: depending on the overall system performance, it may be desirable to
use the echo cancellation features in the codec.
F.
File transfer requirement

The codec(s) shall support the following transfer capabilities as a minimum:
ITU-T T.120/r127
CIF
SIF
225
SECTION G
G.
4CIF
4SIF
VGA
H.243 multi-site
Self-diagnostic check
The codec(s) shall include a self-diagnostic system check and if a fault is
detected then an alarm shall be sent to the controller or alarm-monitoring
device, it also should have remote IP management for software upgrade,
alarms, and reporting.
13.
System Support
The system design shall allow any support personnel to quickly diagnose any point in
failure.
13.1.
Defects liability period service levels

To be nominated within the contractual terms between main contractor and
audiovisual sub-contractor as determined by the Principal.
13.2.
Remote access
The system shall provide a remote on-line networked system capable of on-line
support for the remote diagnostics of the videoconferencing equipment.
13.3.
Software
Where a contractor is engaged to provide software, the software patches will be
supplied at no cost to clear faults or problems that occur during the defects
liability period.
13.4.
Intellectual property
The title, copyright and all other rights to the intellectual property in and to all
software code, video tapes, audio tapes, objects, displays and other materials of
whatsoever kind produced, created, designed, devised or made by, or on behalf
of the contractor whether part or whole shall forthwith vest in the State of WA
upon payment to the contractor of the price payable in accordance with the
contract.
13.5.
Reporting
The contractor shall maintain a site and equipment log for recording all faults,
actions taken and time taken to repair. This log will provide the operational
history of the equipment.
13.6.
Maintenance
The contractor shall identify and provide a schedule of maintenance of the
system as specified and recommended by the manufacturers.
226
SECTION G
14.
AV Touch screen control system

14.1.
General requirements
The final command structure and touch screen layout shall be developed in
accordance with the current DotAG standard and shall be reviewed and
approved by AV Services at the Courts Technology Group. The layout and
functionality of the touch screen shall operate on the same principles as the
touch screens in the other Court audiovisual facilities.
A.
The contractor shall supply sufficient touch screens.

Connection points for the touch screens shall be installed in the following
locations:
B.
At the Associates position in a Jury court;
At the JSOs position in a Magistrates court;
At the witness position in the remote/child witness room.
Touch Screen hardware configuration

Touch screens shall:
C.
Be able to be positioned to ensure that viewing beyond the screen is

not obstructed;
Be able to represent information in colour;
Not interfere with any touch screen controller in another location in the
Courthouse.
Touch screen programming specification

The contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
D.
The command structure shall not require or support two or more

repetitive operations of a button (e.g. No double clicking allowed);
It shall be possible to cancel a partial or complete command and/or

modify the last character;
The screens shall be arranged under the current DotAG standard. The
layout of these screens is in the accompanying annexure;
A button shall indicate to the user when a command is detected;
Simple text identifying the function shall be included in the buttons; the
phrase enter is NOT acceptable as button labels.
Except for PTZ camera control, volume control the time that a button is
depressed shall not alter the interpretation of the command;
An alarm status shall be located at the top of the screen in the event
that an alarm has been raised;
Special features
In preview mode, only the judge and associate shall see pictures from the
remote witness room and only the picture of the judge will be sent to the
remote witness room.
227
SECTION G
E.
The default condition for the screen shall be preview mode, if the
display mode is not selected;
When the court display mode is selected;

o
The head and shoulder image (primary image) of the witness in

the remote witness room shall be shown on the court display
system and the associates display;
The wide-angle view (secondary image) of the remote witness

room shall be shown on a dedicated judges monitor;
Any video evidence that may be presented by the court server will be
sent to the remote witness room and displayed;
The primary remote witness screen image shall display the image as
selected by the associate via the touch screen controller;
The secondary remote witness display shall present an image of the

judge at all times.
Video conferencing system fault reporting

The videoconferencing equipment shall support on-screen status
messages and error reporting. The videoconferencing equipment shall
include a self-diagnostic system check. If a fault is detected an alarm shall
be sent to a central alarm-monitoring device.
15. Voice Over IP

Whilst the DotAG does not currently have a policy for the use of Video Over IP solutions,
this draft information is provided as a reference only. All future proposals need to
comply with current (up-to-date) industry standards for IP video conferencing and DotAG
staff must be involved in the planning & design stage.
15.1.
Audio Standards
Any Video Over IP equipment purchased for the DotAG must meet the following
audio specifications:
G.711: 64 Kbps, 8K samples/sec, 8-bit companded PCM (A-law or -law),

high quality, low complexity.
G.722: ADPCM audio encode/decode (64 kbit/s, 7 kHz).
G.722.1: ADPCM audio encode/decode (24 or 32 kbit/s, 7 kHz)
GSM: Group Special Mobile -- European telephony standard, not ITU.
AAC: Advanced Audio Coding, variations include AAC-LD (low delay
The following audio standards are preferred, but are not mandatory:
G.723: Speech coder at 6.3 and 5.3 Kbps data rate. Medium complexity.
G.728: 16 Kbps, LD-CELP, high quality speech coder, very high complexity.
G.729: 8Kbps, LD-CELP, high quality speech coder, medium complexity.
228
SECTION G
15.2.
Video standards
video specifications:
15.3.
H.261: Supporting 352x288 (CIF or FCIF) and 176x144 (QCIF). DCT-based

algorithm tuned for 2B to 6B ISDN communication.
H.263: Much-improved derivative of H.261, tuned for POTS data rates.

Mostly aimed at QCIF and Sub-QCIF (128x96 -- SQCIF), while providing
better video than H.261 on QCIF and CIF.
H.264: Joint collaboration between the ITU and ISO.
Communications Standards
communications specifications:
15.4.
H.221: Frame Structure 64-1920 Kbps.
H.223: Multiplexing protocol for low-bit rate multimedia communication.
H.225: Media Stream Packetisation and synchronisation on non-guaranteed

quality-of service LANs.
H.230: Frame synchronous control and indication signals for audio visual
systems.
H.241: Extended video procedures and control signals for H.300-series

terminals, signalling for H.264
H.242: System for establishing audio visual terminals using digital channels
up to 2Mbps.
H.243: Procedures for establishing communication between three or more

audio visual terminals using digital channels up to 2 Mbps.
H.245: Control of communications between visual telephone systems and

terminal equipment on non-guaranteed bandwidth LANs.
Encryption & Collaboration Standards

The following Encryption Standards are required:
15.5.
H.233: Confidentiality system for audiovisual services
H.234: Encryption key management and authentication

audiovisual services (Diffe-Hellman key exchange)
H.235: Security and Encryption for H.323 multimedia terminals
The following Collaboration Standards are required:
H.239: Role Management and Additional Media Channels for H.300-series

Terminals
T.120: Data protocols for multimedia conferencing
system
for
Jitter & Latency

The network Jitter must not exceed 10ms within a Local Area Network, with a
preferred maximum jitter of 5ms.
229
SECTION G
The Local Area Network must support a round trip latency of less then 10ms
between endpoints, with a maximum one way delay of 5ms.
16. Applicable and Relevant State-of-Art Technologies

16.1.
General
The System shall ensure that all equipment proposed shall be proven in similar
works undertaken by similar courtroom environment to ensure the highest quality
sound and video signals with emphasis on reliability and durability.
The System shall maximise the deployment of the state-of-the-art audiovisual
technologies in order to improve the operational efficiency as well as the future
proofing and longevity of audiovisual equipment.
The System shall ensure that the lifetime of the AV equipment at least covers for
the expected life of seven years. During this time, the performance of the
equipment shall not degrade and all aspects of the equipment, cabling and
associated accessories shall offer durability and high reliability.
16.2.
Relevant Technologies
The System shall evaluate the following technologies that can be relevant to this
Design Brief, including but not limited to the following:
IP addressable (LAN based) audiovisual system;
IP telephony;
Video over IP;
Smart board;
Tablet PC, control and annotation;
Mobility technologies (wireless microphones, Bluetooth and Personalised

Area Network PAN);
Intelligent patch panels.
Standards Compliance
All aspects of the system and equipment shall comply with the latest relevant
Codes of Practice, Australian and International standards, including the
requirements of the ACA and the CCM.
All equipment shall comply with the relevant Australian standards for EMI/EMC
and shall not expose users to dangerous EMR levels.
The System shall provide immediate notification to the State if at any time during
the Project Term it is discovered that the installation will not comply with any
requirements of this Design Brief.
17.
PC Playback Positions
The System shall ensure that the audiovisual system can accept audio output produced
from personal computers at various positions internal to the courtroom and other locations
external to it. These shall include:
Witness position;
Counsel positions (for Type A courtrooms only);
Associates position (AV controller interface and the Associates State supplied PC);
230
SECTION G
Ushers/Orderlies position;
Judicial Officers position,
Remote witness rooms; and
Child witness rooms.
All the personal computers are to be separately procured by the State.

18.
Digital Recording, Monitoring and Transcription Systems

The digital recording, monitoring and transcription systems shall be able to be integrated,
compatible and interoperable to each other and with the audiovisual system. These are
separately specified in the following sections for clarity purposes only.
The digital recording system shall effectively capture quality audio evidence and all other
spoken words within the courtroom and all other relevant audiovisual facilities in the
Building.
All audio feeds from the audio, video and conferencing system shall be recordable. All
spoken words shall be clearly recorded onto the audio recording system so that an
accurate transcript can be produced.
18.1.
Digital Recording
The digital recording system shall be designed and equipped to handle
simultaneous recording of all courtrooms and other audiovisual facilities in the
Building without any limitations or performance degradation.
The system shall capture the audio and digitise the signal for recording in digital
format and shall be equipped with all necessary digital storage.
The digital format shall not be proprietary, but comply with latest open and
international standards.
The System shall provide the following digital recording functions to the State:
Provision for the activation, deactivation, control and monitoring of the digital
recording functions operated by the System personnel in the monitoring room
or by the States judicial support staff in the courtroom;
Capable of transmitting the digital audio files to any transcription service

provider.
A.
Digital Recording System

The System shall provide the features for the digital recording system
including but not limited to the following:
Compresses audio to reduce file size using industry standard proven

file formats and CODECS (including dct, wav, mp3, adpcm, celp,
gsm6.10, or others);
A visual display allowing the operator to check that all sources are
being captured properly;
The ability to alert the operator of any breakdown in the recording

system;
The ability to record on multi-channel audio signals received from

different original sources, the software shall be able to record all audio
channels required concurrently.
231
SECTION G
B.
The ability to continue to record the session while playing back a portion
of the record that was previously recorded;
Sends the recordings as it continues to record with overlapped file

breaks at preset intervals;
Robust design and simple interface for fail-safe but user-friendly day-today operation.
Monitoring System and Software

The System shall ensure that staff are able to operate all court recording
and monitoring functions.
It shall be simple to operate with an on/off process with automatic alert to
the judicial support staff via a GUI when any of the participants voice levels
captured by the microphones are below the acceptable audio limits as set
out in the Commissioning Standards.
This system shall clearly indicate to the operator that:
Recording is in progress;
All channels are operational;
Participants voice levels captured by the microphones fall below the

acceptable limits in accordance with the Commissioning Standards.
The System shall provide the features for the digital recording system
including but not limited to the following:
C.
Enable one person to monitor and record proceedings in multiple

courtrooms simultaneously;
Check audio quality and insert annotations into electronic running

sheets for each proceeding;
The ability to automatically assign digital audio grabs (sections) of

proceeding to transcribers;
The log notes (running sheets) shall be linked to the digital audio;
The ability to store the text notes with an integration utility that provides
a method for directly accessing the desired audio segment;
The ability to make changes and to search through the annotations

associated with proceedings;
The ability to extract information from the States case management

system for the details of the proceedings.
Emergency Recording
The System shall provide emergency recording as a backup system in the
event of integrated digital recording system fails.
19.
AV Controller Interface and System

19.1.
AV Controller Interface
The System shall provide the AV controller interface that is computer based
equipped with a simple GUI. Access to the Interface shall be restricted to those
nominated by the State.
232
SECTION G
A.
User Control
The System shall ensure that a nominated user either in the Court or at a
remote location is able to control all aspects of the use of audiovisual
systems. This includes but is not limited to:
Making a Video Conference call from a directory listing;
Making a Video Conference call by manually dialling the number;
Making an Audio Conference call;
Being able to select any one of the following sources of image:
PTZ cameras;
Courtroom participants personal computers;
Video-Conference;
Computer Generated Image;
CCTV;
Document camera;
Video Cassette Recorder (VCR);
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc).
Selecting any one or combination of the following displays:

o
Judicial Officer video display;
Judicial support staff video display(s);
Counsel video display;
Witness video display;
Videoconference participant video display;
Jury video display;
General courtroom displays.
Connecting and disconnecting one or more remote witness room and/or

remote child witness room;
Selecting the image of the remote witness to view in Court;
Adjusting the volume from the remote witness room;
Recording video and audio from video conference;
Recording video from document camera;
Controlling PTZ cameras.
The judicial support staff shall have the facilities to preview (or check) the
matrix output to enable the inspection of audio and video contents before
switching to the general or individual courtroom displays and/or speakers.
B.
Layout and Ease of Use
The System shall ensure the AV controller interface and layout shall be intuitive
requiring minimal user interaction.
The system shall allow the user to activate and deactivate different components
of the system with one button functionality. Short cuts shall be provided for the
most commonly used functions.
233
SECTION G
20.
Switching and Routing Functions

The switching functionality shall be modular and scalable allowing the easy upgrade to
service the maximum number of input and output sources for the courtrooms and all other
audiovisual facilities in the Building.
The System shall facilitate external routing and interconnection between the audiovisual
network and the public (or States IT) network as required.
Where interfaces between the networks are required, the System shall ensure that these
are open and standards based.
20.1.
Audio Switching
The System shall ensure that the AV controller interface is capable of controlling
the audio switching and interconnection of courtrooms and all other audiovisual
facilities in the Building, including the audio and videoconferencing connections,
in any arbitrary manner.
The System shall ensure that it is possible to select and switch audio channels
independently of the video switching system, as well as being able to switch the
audio signal to follow the video signal.
20.2.
Video Switching
The video switching functionality shall allow the interconnection of video feeds
between the courtrooms and all other audiovisual facilities in the Building,
including the videoconferencing connections.
The video switching functionality shall be fully non-blocking for all video signals
inside the Building. It shall support any permutations of these links without
limiting to the type (including CCTV and video conferencing) of links,
concurrently.
The video switching functionality shall include but not be limited to the following:
20.3.
Link to a video conferencing CODEC;
Receive input from the document cameras;
Receive input from all the cameras and provide outputs to video displays in
the courtrooms and all other audiovisual facilities in the Building;
Provide inputs and outputs for all the video playback and recording
equipment in the courtrooms, mediation rooms and conferencing room;
Provide the connections to enable the video recording of court proceedings

from the security control room of the Building;
Provide site identification, date and time of the video image and;
Provide upgradeability for future expansion.
Self Test
The AV controller shall be equipped with built-in diagnostic and self-test
capabilities.
This self-test shall be configurable to activate on a per courtroom basis. The
record of the self-test shall be displayed via the AV controller interface. The
diagnostic functions shall be designed to ensure that all audiovisual equipment
234
SECTION G
within the courtroom and other audiovisual facilities in the Building are properly
functioning and are operational ready for use.
The System shall ensure that the judicial support staff in the courtroom shall be
able to initiate the self-test process.
21.
System Performance
The System shall ensure that the audiovisual system meets the following system
performance levels as tabulated below:
Audiovisual System Performance

No
Audiovisual System
1
System Response Time

(Confirmation of an user command being processed)
System Command Completion Time
(Completion of an operation requested by the user.)
Video Conferencing Initiation Time
(From initiation, connection, self-test to in-session.)
Audio Conferencing Initiation Time
(From initiation, connection, self-test to in-session.)
2
3
4
22.
Performance
Levels
2.0 sec
5.0 sec
60 sec
60 sec
System Change-out Facilities

The System shall provide a change-out facility. The change-out facility shall offer a plug
and play interface requiring minimal set-up to allow other service provider(s) to connect to
the AV system and to access the digitally recorded content.
23.
Statistical Reports
The System shall ensure the AV system shall be capable of producing statistical data in
relation to its performance and the overall health of the audiovisual system and network.
This data shall be presented in the form of electronic reports and transferable to the
States IT system. The reports shall contain statistics, including but not limited to the
following:
System downtime and availability;
Most frequently used functions;
Faults statistics;
Maintenance records;
Equipment upgrade records;
Numbers and durations of dialled audio conferencing;
Numbers and durations of dialled video conferencing;
Digital recording statistics (eg durations, file size, date and time of recording);
It is the responsibility of the System to include any other statistics that may be required.
24.
User Manuals and Documentation

The System shall develop in liaison with the State the following:
235
SECTION G
Quick Reference Guide and Audiovisual Operation Manual.
24.1.
Quick Reference Guide

All documentation in the guides shall be free from technical jargon and the
wording in plain English.
The quick reference guide shall be able to enable a user to use the AV system,
from start-up to the full operation of all of the most commonly used functions.
The System shall provide a copy of the quick reference guide on a standard A3
sheet for each room that is equipped with the AV controller interface.
The System shall also provide a more comprehensive user guide on the uses of
the audiovisual system. This shall detail simple step-by-step descriptions on the
operation of the system
Each system function shall be displayed in detail allowing the user to drill down
on the information.
24.2.
Audiovisual Operation Manual

The contractor shall develop a Operation Manual for the Audiovisual and
Transcription system covering all aspects of the operation and procedure of the
use of the audiovisual system within the Building.
25.
Documentation
The System shall supply to the State in both electronic and hardcopy versions the
documents specified under the following functions:
26.
Design Documentation;
System Feature and Functional Specifications;
System Design, Drawings and Technical Documents;
Programs and software source code;
AV controller interface and layout documents;
Commission and Acceptance Test Plan;
Commissioning Standards and Acceptance Test Records.
Telecommunications
26.1.
Summary
This document outlines the Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards for the
Department of the Attorney General & the Department of Corrective Services.
Outlined below are the relevant standards for installation of telecommunication
cabling, termination equipment and telecommunication cabinets.
This document, in conjunction with communication from our internal
Telecommunications Section, should be used when Department sites are
upgraded, modified or constructed. All approvals and amendments MUST be
authorised by the TELECOMMUNICATIONS TEAM.
A.
Work Station Layout

Each individual workstation shall have:
236
SECTION G
An enhanced triple category SIX data outlet.

4 GPO power outlets. Two of the four power outlets require a dedicated
computer use circuit and should be marked as such.
Communications rooms, control rooms etc. have special requirements and

need to be catered for on a case-by-case basis.
Under NO
CIRCUMSTANCES should a Communications Cabinet share infrastructure
space with a buildings Security or Video Conferencing infrastructure. The
Department of the Attorney General Telecommunications Section can be
contacted on (08) 9264-6190 or (08) 9264-1319 for confirmation or
clarification of any requirements.
B.
Port Density and Environment Configuration

The following configuration should be used at all sites regardless of size.
The following items are REQUIRED as standard.
(Field Outlet Terminations)
Series 2000 faceplates or any approved equivalent faceplates.
Category 6 Inline RJ45 Outlets in: Black only
(Data Cabling Terminations Within Comms Cabinets)
32 Port 1RU ONLY Patch Panel with BLACK ports
** Note - One Cable Management Panel Is Required Per Patch Panel
Used.
(Telephone/Voice Backbone Terminations Within Comms Cabinets)
32 Port 1RU ONLY Patch Panel with WHITE ports
** Note - One Cable Management Panel Is Required Per Patch Panel
Used.
C.
Cabinet Specifications
The common configurations are shown below. These comprise of the
standard 45RU equipment cabinet, the 45RU server cabinet, and the 12RU
& 24RU equipment cabinets. Smaller cabinets can be utilised on a caseby-case basis only with prior consultation from the Telecommunications
Section.
i.
Cabinets shall be secured to the floor or wall.

All Cabinets shall be earthed using 2.5mm green/yellow earthing cable.
The cabinets below are EXAMPLES ONLY and equivalent spec
cabinets can be used.
45RU Data Cabinet Spec (+10 users with no servers)
DESCRIPTION
QTY
45RU 19 2100x600mm Deep Data Cabinet
1
Acrylic, Perspex Door 45Rux19
1
1
1
1
4
Cabinet Cable Trays
1
1RU Cable Management Rings
8
237
SECTION G
ii.
45ru Server Cabinet Specs (+10 users and servers/possibility of)

DESCRIPTION
QTY
45RUx19 2100x900mm Deep Server Cabinet
1
45RUx19 Vented Steel Door
1
1
1
1
3
19x600mm Deep Sliding Shelf
1
iii.
24RU Data Cabinet Specifications (Specific Application Only)

DESCRIPTION
24RUx19 1215x600mm Deep Cabinet
24RUx19 Acrylic, Perspex Door
iv.
12RU Data Cabinet Specifications (1 5 users with no servers)

(SECONDARY CABINET ONLY UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED)
DESCRIPTION
12RUx19 600x450mm Deep Cabinet Inc. Door
D.
QTY
1
1
1
1
2
QTY
1
1
Cabinet Clearances
The telecommunications room that houses the data/server cabinets
requires the following minimum clearances to the rear, front and to the
sides of the data/server cabinets.
Cabinet Rear 600mm between cabinet rear and adjacent wall.
Cabinet Side 400mm between cabinet side and adjacent wall.
Cabinet Front 1000mm between cabinet front and adjacent wall.
Please see for floor layout at the end of this chapter.
E.
Cable Specifications
The minimum standard of cable brand and type should follow as per the list
below. Please note the vendors listed below are NOT in any particular
order.
Data Installation
Beldon Category 6 cable.

Prestolite/Krone Category 6 cable or TrueNet Cable.
Alcatel Category 6 cable.
Molex Category 6 cable.
AMP Category 6 cable.
Clipsal Category 6 cable.
Or any other vendors cable that meets or exceeds the Category 6
standard.
238
SECTION G
Fibre installation
Fibre optic cabling is to be installed with SC terminations and a 1RU

FOBOT.
Blown Fibre can be utilised in certain cases with prior consultation only.
All in-building fibre cabling shall be Multi-Mode.
All external fibre cabling shall be Multi-Mode unless otherwise advised.
Each cable shall be 8 cores or more per run.
Voice installation
Voice cabling shall be single pair termination unless otherwise approved.

All voice ties will be direct termination from the IDF/MDF to the patch
panel.
No sub-IDF frame shall be installed into a communications cabinet.
Minimum voice tie cable size shall be 20 pairs or above.
Each voice tie cable capacity shall be specified by telecommunications
staff as required.
F.
Labelling Standards
i.
General
All telecommunication outlets, cables, patch panel ports and IDC
blocks are to be clearly and systematically labelled.
Trafolyte labelling 7mm high, with 4mm high black lettering is to
be used for the labelling of all telecommunication outlets, fibre
optic ports and cabinet identifiers. Refer to AS 3080-1992.
Workstation partitioning is to be labelled (non permanent)
wherever it conceals the location of a telecommunications outlet.
All IDC type blocks are to be identified using the appropriate label
holders and marked with permanent pen.
Each field cable shall be permanently labelled 150mm from each
end.
There shall be no duplication of numbers on the patch panels in
each communications cabinet.
Any cables that have been removed as part of an installation shall
have the label removed at both the patch panel end and the
telecommunications outlet end.
ii.
Voice
Voice patch panels should be marked with the incoming telephone
ext, the labels should be left blank and should be updated in
pencil only. If the number is not known, voice patch panels should
be left blank.
All Disconnect Modules are to be labelled in accordance with
standard telephone termination conventions.
Confirm termination practices / labelling practices with the
Department of the Attorney General Telecommunications Section
on (08) 9264-6190 or (08) 9263-1319
Voice tie line cables shall be permanently identified by cable tying
labels identifying the cable as a voice tie line and the origin and
destination of the tie line. This should be placed every two metres
for the entirety of the cable run.
239
SECTION G
iii.
G.
Fibre Optics
Fibre optic cable shall be permanently identified by fibre optic
warning labels every five metres for the entirety of the fibre optic
run.
Fibre optic break out terminals shall be identified in trafolyte with a
description of the destination of the fibre optic run.
E.g. 8 core fibre optic to Level 4 Comms Room
The fibre optic cores shall be labelled in trafolyte label.
Colour Coding
Patch leads should be colour coded at the patch panel end only. In the
field the colour of the patch leads should be blue without exception. For the
patch panel end, the following chart lists the different colours and their
uses.
Patch Lead
Colour
Blue
White
Red
Black
Service Type
Example
LAN Services
Voice Services
Ethernet Cross Over Cable
WAN comms
Telephones, Modem Lines

Between Hubs
Servers, Routers
H.
Site Warranty Information

Any major cabling works should be installed with a 15-year extended site
warranty and depending on the size and scope of the installation a 20-year
extended warranty should be considered.
I.
Site Documentation
After a site is re-cabled or any major data cabling works are carried out, site
documentation should be returned to the Technical Infrastructure section of
the Department of the Attorney General (9264-6190 or 9264-1319). This
documentation should consist of the following.
Category 6 enhanced test results for each data port installed, supplied
on a CD, no hard copy to be provided.
Fibre optics OTDR test results for each fibre core installed, supplied in a
hard copy and in a bound file.
A detailed floor plan should be returned showing the location of all data
outlets in the field as well as comms cabinet locations, cable tray
locations etc.
Site warranty and any other relevant documentation.
240
SECTION G
Typical Telecommunications Room Layout
The above is a typical Telecommunications Room layout.
241
SECTION G
Typical Telecommunications Layout
RU #
DESCRIPTION
1
BLANK PANEL
2
FIBRE OPTIC BREAKOUT BOX IF REQUIRED (FOBOT)
3
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT UNIT
4
BLANK PANEL
5
TELEPHONE TIE LINE PATCH PANEL
6
7
8
9
10
11
BLANK PANEL
12
FIELD CABLING PATCH PANEL
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
SHELF
26
27
28
29
30
31
SHELF
32
33
34
35
36
37
SHELF
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
The above is a typical Telecommunications Cabinet layout.
242
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
1.
BCA Alternative Solution for Custodial Accommodation
2.
Courtroom Analysis Report
243
APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1
BCA Alternative Solution for Custodial Accommodation
244
APPENDICES
APPENDIX 2
COURTROOM ANAYLSIS REPORT
245

Courts Design Brief

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Courts Design Brief

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

COURTS STANDARD DESIGN

Document Version Control

Client Issue Monday 5th June 2006

The following changes/additions completed on Fri 28th July 2006.

Client Issue Friday 13th October 2006.

Client Issue Friday 17th November 2006

Client Issue Monday 20th November 2006

Client Issue Friday 19th January 2007

Client Issue 4th April 2007

Client Issue 6 March 2009

Client Issue 18 February 2010

The Department of the Attorney General contact for this document is

Scope and Legislative, Executive and Judicial Contexts ............................1

Scope of the Brief............................................................................................1

Building Requirements Generally................................................................ 16

Applicable Codes, Standards and Statutory Controls ............................... 16

Architectural Design and Construction Principles..................................... 17

Building Design for Sustainability...................................................... 32

Architectural Psychology Brief .................................................................... 36

Design Philosophy ............................................................................ 17

Western Australian State Sustainability Strategy ...................................... 32

Aboriginal Cultural Brief............................................................................... 42

Multicultural or Culturally and Linguistically Diverse (CALD)

Operational Needs of a Courthouse .................................................................. 50

Facilities Design Brief ....................................................................... 50

Mediation and Pre-Trial Conferences .......................................................... 97

Trials and Hearings Support Including Witness Services ......................... 85

Overview of the Component ............................................................. 70

Functional Group .............................................................................. 59

Legal and Support Agencies (External) .................................................... 100

Schedule of Accommodation..................................................................... 102

Accommodation Requirements (Provisions, Location &

Activity Flow Diagrams............................................................................... 108

Section C.5 Jury........................................................................... 108

Police Courts ............................................................................................... 129

Building Engineering Services Specification ........................................... 132

Introduction ................................................................................................. 132

Information Services and Directional Signage ......................................... 190

Overview ...................................................................................................... 190

Special Considerations............................................................................... 190

Building Listing Display (This section is optional depending on

Placement and User Ergonomic ..................................................... 190

Electronic Signage - Courtrooms and Mediation Rooms (This

Placement and Position .................................................................. 192

Acoustic & Sound Reinforcement Specification ...................................... 194

Introduction ................................................................................................. 194

Environmental Noise....................................................................... 194

Audiovisual and Transcription System ..................................................... 201

Introduction ..................................................................................... 201

Processing equipment .................................................................... 216

APPENDICES ............................................................................................................. 243

BCA Alternative Solution for Custodial Accommodation........................ 243

Courtroom Analysis Report ....................................................................... 243

Scope and Legislative, Executive and Judicial Contexts

If the public were to lose confidence in the impartiality of judicial officers

vi. The Attorney-General

The provision of new court buildings involves the following procedures:

Determination by the Department of the Attorney General in

The Judiciary in Western Australia

This chapter provides a succinct overview of the operations of the courts in

i. The District Court of Western Australia

j. Criminal Jurisdiction in the Supreme and District Courts

A Typical Day in a Large Magistrates Court

n. Coronial Service of Western Australia